WO2004103275A2 - Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants - Google Patents

Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004103275A2
WO2004103275A2 PCT/US2004/014254 US2004014254W WO2004103275A2 WO 2004103275 A2 WO2004103275 A2 WO 2004103275A2 US 2004014254 W US2004014254 W US 2004014254W WO 2004103275 A2 WO2004103275 A2 WO 2004103275A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
growth hormone
human growth
seq
ofthe
mutant human
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/014254
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2004103275A3 (en
Inventor
Shawn Defrees
Henrik Clausen
Original Assignee
Neose Technologies, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Neose Technologies, Inc. filed Critical Neose Technologies, Inc.
Priority to MXPA05011832A priority Critical patent/MXPA05011832A/en
Priority to US10/556,094 priority patent/US7932364B2/en
Priority to BRPI0410164-2A priority patent/BRPI0410164A/en
Priority to EP04751591A priority patent/EP1624847B1/en
Priority to CA002524936A priority patent/CA2524936A1/en
Priority to AU2004240553A priority patent/AU2004240553A1/en
Priority to AT04751591T priority patent/ATE540055T1/en
Priority to ES04751591T priority patent/ES2380093T3/en
Priority to JP2006532844A priority patent/JP2007523630A/en
Publication of WO2004103275A2 publication Critical patent/WO2004103275A2/en
Publication of WO2004103275A3 publication Critical patent/WO2004103275A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/575Hormones
    • C07K14/61Growth hormones [GH] (Somatotropin)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/06Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the anterior pituitary hormones, e.g. TSH, ACTH, FSH, LH, PRL, GH
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • Human growth Hormone (hGH) and agonist variants thereof are members of a family of recombinant proteins, described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,658,021 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,352. Their recombinant production and methods of use are detailed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,342,832, 4,601,980; U.S. Pat. No. 4,898,830; U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,199; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,795,745.
  • Human growth hormone participates in various aspects of the regulation of normal human growth and development. Through interaction with its receptors, this 22 kDa pituitary hormone modulates a multitude of biological effects, such as linear growth
  • hGH Both purified and recombinant hGH have been used for treating conditions and diseases due to hGH deficiency, e.g., dwarfism in children.
  • an immunogenic response to an administered peptide can neutralize the peptide and/or lead to the development of an allergic response in the patient.
  • Other deficiencies of therapeutic glycopeptides include suboptimal potency and rapid clearance rates.
  • the problems inherent in peptide therapeutics are recognized in the art, and various methods of eliminating the problems have been investigated. For example, to provide soluble peptide therapeutics, synthetic polymers have been attached to the peptide backbone.
  • PEG Poly(ethyleneglycol)
  • PEG poly(ethyleneglycol)
  • the use of to PEG to derivatize peptide therapeutics has been demonstrated to reduce the immunogenicity of the peptides.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,179,337 (Davis et al.) concerns non-immunogenic polypeptides, such as enzymes and peptide hormones coupled to polyethylene glycol (PEG) or polypropylene glycol.
  • poly(ethyleneglycol) is added in an essentially random, non-specific manner to reactive residues on a peptide backbone.
  • a derivitization strategy that results in the formation of a specifically labeled, readily characterizable, essentially homogeneous product.
  • a promising route to preparing specifically labeled peptides is through the use of enzymes, such as glycosyltransferases to append a modified sugar moiety onto a peptide.
  • Enzyme-based syntheses have the advantages of regioselectivity and stereoselectivity. Moreover, enzymatic syntheses are performed using unprotected substrates. Three principal classes of enzymes are used in the synthesis of carbohydrates, glycosyltransferases (e.g. , sialyltransferases, oligosaccharyltransferases, N- acetylglucosaminyltransferases), and glycosidases.
  • glycosyltransferases e.g. , sialyltransferases, oligosaccharyltransferases, N- acetylglucosaminyltransferases
  • glycosidases are further classified as exoglycosidases (e.g., ⁇ -mannosidase, ⁇ -glucosidase), and endoglycosidases (e.g., Endo-A, Endo-M).
  • exoglycosidases e.g., ⁇ -mannosidase, ⁇ -glucosidase
  • endoglycosidases e.g., Endo-A, Endo-M
  • Glycosyltransferases modify the oligosaccharide structures on glycopeptides, producing specific products with good stereochemical and regiochemical control. Glycosyltransferases are used to prepare oligosaccharides and to modify terminal N- and O- on glycopeptides produced in mammalian cells.
  • the terminal oligosaccharides of glycopeptides have been completely sialylated and/or fucosylated to provide more consistent sugar structures, which improves glycopeptide pharmacodynamics and a variety of other biological properties.
  • ⁇ -1,4- galactosyltransferase was used to synthesize lactosamine, an illustration of the utility of glycosyltransferases in the synthesis of carbohydrates (see, e.g., Wong et al, J. Org. Chem. 47: 5416-5418 (1982)).
  • ⁇ - sialyltransferases to transfer sialic acid from cytidine-5'-monophospho-N-acetylneuraminic acid to the 3-OH or 6-OH of galactose (see, e.g., Kevin et al, Chem. Eur. J. 2: 1359-1362 (1996)).
  • Fucosyltransferases are used in synthetic pathways to transfer a fucose unit from guanosine-5'-diphosphofucose to a specific hydroxyl of a saccharide acceptor.
  • Ichikawa prepared sialyl Lewis-X by a method that involves the fucosylation of sialylated lactosamine with a cloned fucosyltransferase (Ichikawa et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114: 9283- 9298 (1992)).
  • a cloned fucosyltransferase for a discussion of recent advances in glycoconjugate synthesis for therapeutic use see, Koeller et al, Nature Biotechnology 18: 835-841 (2000). See also, U.S. Patent No. 5,876,980; 6,030,815; 5,728,554; 5,922,577; and WO/9831826.
  • Glycosidases can also be used to prepare saccharides. Glycosidases normally catalyze the hydrolysis of a glycosidic bond. Under appropriate conditions, however, they can be used to form this linkage. Most glycosidases used for carbohydrate synthesis are exoglycosidases; the glycosyl transfer occurs at the non-reducing terminus of the substrate. The glycosidase takes up a glycosyl donor in a glycosyl-enzyme intermediate that is either intercepted by water to give the hydrolysis product, or by an acceptor, to give a new glycoside or oligosaccharide.
  • An exemplary pathway using an exoglycosidase is the synthesis of the core trisaccharide of all N-linked glycopeptides, including the difficult ⁇ - mannoside linkage, which was formed by the action of ⁇ -mannosidase (Singh et al, Chem. Commun. 993-994 (1996)).
  • a mutant glycosidase has been prepared in which the normal nucleophilic amino acid within the active site is changed to a non-nucleophilic amino acid.
  • the mutant enzymes do not hydrolyze glycosidic linkages, but can still form them.
  • the mutant glycosidases are used to prepare oligosaccharides using an ⁇ -glycosyl fluoride donor and a glycoside acceptor molecule (Withers et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,716,812).
  • mutant glycosidases are ilstful tor tytlM ⁇ -
  • endoglycosidases are also utilized to prepare carbohydrates. Methods based on the use of endoglycosidases have the advantage that an oligosaccharide, rather than a monosaccharide, is transferred. Oligosaccharide fragments have been added to substrates using en o- ⁇ -N- acetylglucosamines such as endo- ⁇ , endo-M (Wang et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 37: 1975-1978); and Haneda et al, Carbohydr. Res. 292: 61-70 (1996)).
  • the tetrasaccharide sialyl Lewis X was then enzymatically rebuilt on the remaining GlcNAc anchor site on the now homogenous protein by the sequential use of ⁇ -1,4- galactosyltransferase, ⁇ -2,3-sialyltransferase and ⁇ -l,3-fucosyltransferase V. Each enzymatically catalyzed step proceeded in excellent yield.
  • Brossmer et al. (U.S. Patent No. 5,405,753) discloses the formation of a fluorescent-labeled cytidine monophosphate ("CMP") derivative of sialic acid and the use of the fluorescent glycoside in an assay for sialyl transferase activity and for the fluorescent-labeling of cell surfaces, glycoproteins and gangliosides.
  • CMP cytidine monophosphate
  • Gross et al. (Analyt. ⁇ Vkh ⁇ h W6 m ⁇ 9: ⁇ bb a similar assay.
  • Bean et al. (U.S. Patent No.
  • 5,432,059 discloses an assay for glycosylation deficiency disorders utilizing reglycosylation of a deficiently glycosylated protein.
  • the deficient protein is reglycosylated with a fluorescent- labeled CMP glycoside.
  • Each of the fluorescent sialic acid derivatives is substituted with the fluorescent moiety at either the 9-position or at the amine that is normally acetylated in sialic acid.
  • the methods using the fluorescent sialic acid derivatives are assays for the presence of glycosyltransferases or for non-glycosylated or improperly glycosylated glycoproteins.
  • the assays are conducted on small amounts of enzyme or glycoprotein in a sample of biological origin.
  • the enzymatic derivatization of a glycosylated or non-glycosylated peptide on a preparative or industrial scale using a modified sialic acid has not been disclosed or suggested.
  • Enzymatic methods have also been used to activate glycosyl residues on a glycopeptide towards subsequent chemical elaboration.
  • the glycosyl residues are typically activated using galactose oxidase, which converts a terminal galactose residue to the corresponding aldehyde.
  • the aldehyde is subsequently coupled to an amine-containing modifying group.
  • Casares et al. (Nature Biotech. 19: 142 (2001)) have attached doxorubicin to the oxidized galactose residues of a recombinant MHCII-peptide chimera. ;
  • Glycosyl residues have also been modified to bear ketone groups.
  • Mahal and co-workers (Science 276: 1125 (1997)) have prepared N-levulinoyl mannosamine (“ManLev”), which has a ketone functionality at the position normally occupied by the acetyl group in the natural substrate. Cells were treated with the ManLev, thereby incorporating a ketone group onto the cell surface. See, also Saxon et al, Science 287: 2007 (2000); Hang et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 123: 1242 (2001); Yarema et /., J Biol. Chem.
  • Carbohydrates are attached to glycopeptides in several ways of which N-linked to asparagine and mucin-type O-linked to serine and threonine are the most relevant for recombinant glycoprotein therapeuctics.
  • a determining factor for initiation of glycosylation of a protein is the primary sequence context, although clearly other factors including protein region and conformation play roles.
  • N-linked glycosylation occurs at the consensus sequence NXS/T, where X can be any amino acid but proline.
  • the present invention answers these needs by providing hGH mutants that contain newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation sites, providing flexibility in glycosylation and/or glycopegylation of these recombinant hGH mutants.
  • the invention provides an industrially practical method for the modification of N- or O-linked mutant hGH peptides with modifying groups such as water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, biomolecules, and the like.
  • modifying groups such as water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, biomolecules, and the like.
  • the modified mutant hGH has improved properties, which enhance its use as a therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
  • the present invention provides an isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the present invention provides an expression cassette or a cell that comprises a nucleic acid, e.g., an isolated nucleic acid, including a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone.
  • the mutant human growth hormone includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the present invention provides a mutant human growth hormone, that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9. a method for making a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone. This method includes the steps of recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone, and glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone at the new glycosylation site.
  • the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition having a therapeutically effective amount of a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site not present in the wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the present invention provides a method for treating human growth hormone deficiency in a subject.
  • the method includes administering to the subject an amount of a mutant human growth hormone effective to treat or ameliorate the growth hormone deficiency.
  • the mutant human growth hormone used in this method comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the mutant human growth hormone is optionally conjugates to one or more modifying group, preferably via glycoconjugation giving rise to a glycosyl linking group between the glycosylation site and the modifying group.
  • An exemplary modifying group is poly(ethylene glycol).
  • FIG. 1 is the amino acid sequences of GH-N (pituitary derived hGH) and GH-N (placental derived hGH). The arrows indicate the amino acid position for a mutational introduction of (GH- ⁇ ) or a naturally existing (GH-N) ⁇ -linked glycosylation site.
  • FIG. 2 is the crystal structure depiction of a glycosylated GH- ⁇ mutant hGH (Lysl40 to Asnl40) and its receptor polypeptide.
  • FIG. 3 are glycoPEGylation schemes for insect cell and mammalian cell produced hGH ⁇ -linked glycan mutants.
  • FIG. 4 shows the glycoPEGylation of an Escherichia coli produced hGH O-linked glycan mutant.
  • FIG. 5 displays alternate mutants of GH- ⁇ to introduce glycosylation sites.
  • the arrows indicate the protein loop regions of GH- ⁇ into which a glycosylation site may be introduced.
  • FIG. 6 are the amino acid sequences of six (6) different O-linked glycosylation sites that may be introduced into pituitary derived hGH (GH- ⁇ ).
  • GH- ⁇ pituitary derived hGH
  • the wild-type amino acid sequence for GH- ⁇ is also shown for comparison.
  • the arrows indicate the threonine residue of the GH- ⁇ glycan mutant on which O-linked glycosylation will occur.
  • FIG. 7 are the amino acid sequences of hGH O-linked GH- ⁇ mutant 134(rtg) -> ttt and hGH O-linked 5' GH- ⁇ mutant in which amino acids -3 to -1 (ptt) are inserted at the amino terminus, resulting in a 194 amino acid hGH polypeptide.
  • FIG. 8 are the amino acid sequences of hGH O-linked GH- ⁇ mutant 134(rtg) -» ttg and hGH O-linked 5' GH- ⁇ mutant in which amino acids -3 to -1 (mvt) are inserted at the amino terminus, resulting in a 194 amino acid hGH polypeptide.
  • FIG. 9A depicts the amino acid sequence of mature human growth hormone (GH- ⁇ ) (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • FIG. 9B depicts the amino acid sequence of mature human growth hormone (GH-N) (SEQ ID ⁇ ,O:2).
  • FIG. 9C depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:3).
  • FIG. 9D depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:4).
  • FIG. 9E depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 3 (SEQ ID NO: 5).
  • FIG. 9F depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 4 (SEQ ID NO: 6).
  • FIG. 9G depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 5 (SEQ ID NO:7).
  • FIG. 9H depicts the ammo aeid ⁇ feq ⁇ 'eft ' ce ⁇ ol li ⁇ ffia ' n ⁇ fr ⁇ 'wth hormone mutant 6 (SEQ ID NO:8).
  • FIG. 91 depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 7 (SEQ ID NO:9).
  • nucleic acid or “polynucleotide” refers to deoxyribonucleic acids
  • DNA DNA
  • RNA ribonucleic acids
  • DNA DNA
  • RNA ribonucleic acids
  • the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known analogues of natural nucleotides that have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides.
  • a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions), alleles, orthologs, SNPs, and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated.
  • degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed- base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al, Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al, J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 (1985); and Rossolini et al, Mol Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)).
  • nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, and mRNA encoded by a gene.
  • gene means the segment of DNA involved in producing a polypeptide chain. It may include regions preceding and following the coding region (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons).
  • nucleic acid or protein when applied to a nucleic acid or protein, denotes that the nucleic acid or protein is essentially free of other cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state. It is preferably in a homogeneous state although it can be in either a dry or aqueous solution. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. In particular, an isolated gene is separated from open reading frames that flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest. The term "purified" denotes that a nucleic acid or protein gives rise to essentially one band in an electrophoretic gel.
  • nucleic acid or protein is at least 85% pure, more preferably at least 95% pure, and most preferably at least 99% pure.
  • Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, ⁇ - carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine.
  • Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an ⁇ carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid.
  • Amino acid mimetics refers to chemical compounds having a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
  • Amino acids may be referred to herein by either the commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
  • "Conservatively modified variants” applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, “conservatively modified variants” refers to those nucleic acids that encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein.
  • the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine.
  • the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide.
  • Such nucleic acid variations are "silent variations," which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein that encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid.
  • each codon in a nucleic acid can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule.
  • Accordingl 1 ; afeh' l ⁇ nt Jl variIlior ⁇ ''6 , f a" ' nucleic -acid that encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
  • amino acid sequences one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a "conservatively modified variant" where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
  • Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
  • amino acid residues are numbered according to their relative positions from the left most residue, which is numbered 1, in an unmodified wild- type polypeptide sequence.
  • Proximate a proline residue refers to an amino acid that is less than about 10 amino acids removed from a proline residue, preferably, less than about 9, 8, 7, 6 or 5 amino acids removed from a proline residue, more preferably, less than about 4, 3, 2 or FT ⁇ si ⁇ ue's r ⁇ move ⁇ 'irom.a ⁇ iOiine'Tesidue.
  • the amino acid "proximate a proline residue” may be on the C- or N-terminal side of the proline residue.
  • Polypeptide “peptide,” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues. All three terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non- naturally occurring amino acid polymers. As used herein, the terms encompass amino acid chains of any length, including full-length proteins, wherein the amino acid residues are linked by covalent peptide bonds.
  • mutating refers to the deletion, insertion, or substitution of any nucleotide or amino acid residue, by chemical, enzymatic, or any other means, in a polynucleotide sequence encoding a wild-type human growth hormone or the amino acid sequence of a wild-type human growth hormone, respectively, such that the amino acid sequence of the resulting human growth hormone comprises at least one N- or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • both conservative and non-conservative substitutions may be used to create a hGH mutant that contains a new N- or O-linked glycosylation site.
  • the site for a mutation introducing a new N- or O-linked glycosylation site may be located anywhere in the polypeptide.
  • Exemplary amino acid sequences for human growth hormone mutants are depicted in SEQ ID NOs:3-9.
  • a "mutant human growth hormone" of this invention thus comprises at least one mutated amino acid residue.
  • the wild-type human growth hormone whose coding sequence is modified to generate a mutant human growth hormone is referred to in this application as "the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.”
  • SEQ ID NO:l is the amino acid sequence of the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone for mutant human growth hormones having the amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NOs:3-9.
  • the term "effective amount,” as used herein, refers to an amount that produces therapeutic effects for which a substance is administered.
  • the effects include the prevention, correction, or inhibition of progression of the symptoms of a disease/condition and related complications to any detectable extent.
  • the exact amount will depend on the purpose of the ttea ⁇ m ⁇ nt, a ⁇ d «- iii"i'e' asfe a a'b "by one skilled in the art using known techniques (see, e.g., Lieberman, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (vols. 1-3, 1992); Lloyd, The Art, Science and Technology of Pharmaceutical Compounding (1999); and Pickar, Dosage Calculations (1999)).
  • modified sugar refers to a naturally- or non-naturally- occurring carbohydrate that is enzymatically added onto an amino acid or a glycosyl residue of a peptide in a process of the invention.
  • the modified sugar is selected from a number of enzyme substrates including, but not limited to sugar nucleotides (mono-, di-, and tri- phosphates), activated sugars (e.g., glycosyl halides, glycosyl mesylates) and sugars that are neither activated nor nucleotides.
  • the "modified sugar” is covalently fiinctionalized with a "modifying group.”
  • modifying groups include, but are not limited to, water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, biomolecules and the like.
  • the modifying group is preferably not a naturally occurring, or an unmodified carbohydrate.
  • the locus of functionalization with the modifying group is selected such that it does not prevent the "modified sugar” from being added enzymatically to a peptide.
  • water-soluble refers to moieties that have some detectable degree of solubility in water. Methods to detect and/or quantify water solubility are well known in the art.
  • Exemplary water-soluble polymers include peptides, saccharides, poly(ethers), poly(amines), poly(carboxylic acids) and the like. Peptides can have mixed sequences of be composed of a single amino acid, e.g., poly(lysine).
  • An exemplary polysaccharide is poly(sialic acid).
  • An exemplary poly(ether) is poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., m-PEG.
  • Poly(ethylene imine) is an exemplary polyamine
  • poly(acrylic) acid is a representative poly(carboxylic acid).
  • the polymer backbone of the water-soluble polymer can be poly(ethylene glycol) (i.e. PEG).
  • PEG poly(ethylene glycol)
  • other related polymers are also suitable for use in the practice of this invention and that the use of the term PEG or poly(ethylene glycol) is intended to be inclusive and not exclusive in this respect.
  • PEG includes poly(ethylene glycol) in any of its forms, including alkoxy PEG, difunctional PEG, multiarmed PEG, forked PEG, branched PEG, pendent PEG (i.e. PEG or related polymers having one or more functional groups pendent to the polymer backbone), or PEG with degradable linkages therein.
  • ⁇ ynlef bacr ⁇ hiPc n be linear or branched.
  • Branched polymer backbones are generally known in the art.
  • a branched polymer has a central branch core moiety and a plurality of linear polymer chains linked to the central branch core.
  • PEG is commonly used in branched forms that can be prepared by addition of ethylene oxide to various polyols, such as glycerol, pentaerythritol and sorbitol.
  • the central branch moiety can also be derived from several amino acids, such as lysine.
  • the branched poly(ethylene glycol) can be represented in general form as R(-PEG-OH).sub.m in which R represents the core moiety, such as glycerol or pentaerythritol, and m represents the number of arms.
  • R represents the core moiety, such as glycerol or pentaerythritol
  • m represents the number of arms.
  • Multi-armed PEG molecules such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,932,462, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, can also be used as the polymer backbone.
  • polymers are also suitable for the invention.
  • suitable polymers include, but are not limited to, other poly(alkylene glycols), such as poly(propylene glycol) ("PPG"), copolymers of ethylene glycol and propylene glycol and the like, poly(oxyethylated polyol), poly(olefmic alcohol), poly(vinylpyrrolidone), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamide), poly( ⁇ -hydroxy acid), poly(vinyl alcohol), polyphosphazene, polyoxazoline, poly(N-acryloylmorpholine), such as described in U.S.
  • PPG poly(propylene glycol)
  • copolymers of ethylene glycol and propylene glycol and the like poly(oxyethylated polyol), poly(olefmic alcohol), poly(vinylpyrrolidone), poly(hydroxy
  • the "area under the curve” or "AUC”, as used herein in the context of administering a peptide drug to a patient, is defined as total area under the curve that describes the concentration of drug in systemic circulation in the patient as a function of time from zero to infinity.
  • half-life or "Wi" in the context of administering a peptide drug to a patient, is defined as the time required for plasma concentration of a drug in a patient to be reduced by one half. There may be more than one half-life associated with the peptide drug depending on multiple clearance mechanisms, redistribution, and other mechanisms well known in the art. Usually, alpha and beta half-lives are defined such that the alpha phase is associated with redistribution, and the beta phase is associated with clearance. However, with protein drugs that are, for the most part, confined to the bloodstream! th*e "dan be- at'l ⁇ aS ⁇ two clearance half-lives.
  • rapid beta phase clearance may be mediated via receptors on macrophages, or endothelial cells that recognize terminal galactose, N-acetylgalactosamine, N-acetylglucosamine, mannose, or fucose.
  • Slower beta phase clearance may occur via renal glomerular filtration for molecules with an effective radius ⁇ 2 nm (approximately 68 kD) and/or specific or nonspecific uptake and metabolism in tissues.
  • GlycoPEGylation may cap terminal sugars (e.g., galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine) and thereby block rapid alpha phase clearance via receptors that recognize these sugars.
  • glycoconjugation refers to the enzymatically mediated conjugation of a modified sugar species to an amino acid or glycosyl residue of a polypeptide, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention.
  • a subgenus of "glycoconjugation” is "glycol-PEGylation,” in which the modifying group of the modified sugar is poly(ethylene glycol), and alkyl derivative (e.g., m-PEG) or reactive derivative (e.g., H2N-PEG, HOOC-PEG) thereof.
  • glycosyl linking group refers to a glycosyl residue to which a modifying group (e.g., PEG moiety, therapeutic moiety, biomolecule) is covalently attached; the glycosyl linking group joins the modifying group to the remainder of the conjugate.
  • the "glycosyl linking group” becomes covalently attached to a glycosylated or unglycosylated peptide, thereby linking the agent to an amino acid and/or glycosyl residue on the peptide.
  • a “glycosyl linking group” is generally derived from a "modified sugar” by the enzymatic attachment of the "modified sugar” to an amino acid and/or glycosyl residue of the peptide.
  • the glycosyl linking group can be a saccharide- derived structure that is degraded during formation of modifying group-modified sugar d ⁇ assette or the glycosyl linking group may be intact.
  • an “intact glycosyl linking group” refers to a linking group that is derived from a glycosyl moiety in which the saccharide monomer that links the modifying group and to the remainder of the conjugate is not degraded, e.g., oxidized, e.g., by sodium metaperiodate.
  • “Intact glycosyl linking groups” of the invention may be derived from a naturally occurring oligosaccharide by addition of glycosyl unit(s) or removal of one or more glycosyl unit from a parent saccharide structure.
  • targeting moiety refers to species that will selectively localize in a particular tissue or region of the body. The localization is mediated by specific recognition of molecular determinants, molecular size of the targeting agent or conjugate, ionic interactions, hydrophobic interactions and the like. Other mechanisms of targeting an agent to a particular tissue or region are known to those of skill in the art.
  • exemplary targeting moieties include antibodies, antibody fragments, transferrin, HS-glycoprotein, coagulation factors, serum proteins, ⁇ -glycoprotein, G-CSF, GM-CSF, M-CSF, EPO and the like.
  • therapeutic moiety means any agent useful for therapy including, but not limited to, antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-tumor drugs, cytotoxins, and radioactive agents.
  • therapeutic moiety includes prodrugs of bioactive agents, constructs in which more than one therapeutic moiety is bound to a carrier, e.g, multivalent agents.
  • Therapeutic moiety also includes proteins and constructs that include proteins.
  • Exemplary proteins include, but are not limited to, Erythropoietin (EPO), Granulocyte Colony Stimulating Factor (GCSF), Granulocyte Macrophage Colony Stimulating Factor (GMCSF), Interferon (e.g., Interferon- ⁇ , - ⁇ , - ⁇ ), Interleukin (e.g., Interleukin II), serum proteins (e.g., Factors Nil, Vila, VIII, IX, and X), Human Chorionic Gonadotropin (HCG), Follicle Stimulating Hormone (FSH) and Lutenizing Hormone (LH) and antibody fusion proteins (e.g. Tumor Necrosis Factor Receptor ((TNFR)/Fc domain fusion protein)).
  • EPO Erythropoietin
  • GCSF Granulocyte Colony Stimulating Factor
  • GMCSF Granulocyte Macrophage Colony Stimulating Factor
  • Interferon
  • anti-tumor drug means any agent useful to combat cancer including, but not limited to, cytotoxins and agents such as antimetabolites, alkylating agents, anthracyclines, antibiotics, antimitotic agents, procarbazine, hydroxyurea, asparaginase, corticosteroids, interferons and radioactive agents. Also encompassed within the scope of the term “anti-tumor drug,” are conjugates of peptides with anti-rumor activity, e.g. TNF- ⁇ .
  • Conjugates include, but are not limited to those formed between a therapeutic protein and a gtyeoproteitf of h l e ' hveffl , ⁇ 3iri ! ; ' "-A' l rdpresentative conjugate is that formed between PSGL-1 and TNF- ⁇ .
  • a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent means any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracinedione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1- dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof.
  • Other toxins include, for example, ricin, CC- 1065 and analogues, the duocarmycins. Still other toxins include diptheria toxin, and snake venom (e.g. , cobra venom).
  • a radioactive agent includes any radioisotope that is effective in diagnosing or destroying a tumor. Examples include, but are not limited to, indium- 111, cobalt-60. Additionally, naturally occurring radioactive elements such as uranium, radium, and thorium, which typically represent mixtures of radioisotopes, are suitable examples of a radioactive agent. The metal ions are typically chelated with an organic chelating moiety.
  • ⁇ utically acceptable carrier includes any material, which when combined with the conjugate retains the conjugates' activity and is non-reactive with the subject's immune systems.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, emulsions such as oil/water emulsion, and various types of wetting agents.
  • Other carriers may also include sterile solutions, tablets including coated tablets and capsules.
  • Such carriers contain excipients such as starch, milk, sugar, certain types of clay, gelatin, stearic acid or salts thereof, magnesium or calcium stearate, talc, vegetable fats or oils, gums, glycols, or other known excipients.
  • Such carriers may also include flavor and color additives or other ingredients. Compositions comprising such carriers are formulated by well known conventional methods.
  • administering means oral administration, inhalation, administration as a suppository, topical contact, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, intralesional, intranasal or subcutaneous administration, or the implantation of a slow-release device e.g. , a mini-osmotic pump, to the subject.
  • Adminsitration is by any route including parenteral, and transmucosal (e.g., oral, nasal, vaginal, rectal, or transdermal).
  • Parenteral administration includes, e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arteriole, intradermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, and intracranial.
  • injection is to treat a tumor, e.g., induce apoptosis
  • administration may be directly to the tumor and/or into tissues surrounding the tumor.
  • Other modes of delivery include, but are not limited to, the use of liposomal formulations, intravenous infusion, transdermal patches, etc.
  • isolated refers to a material that is substantially or essentially free from components, which are used to produce the material.
  • isolated refers to material that is substantially or essentially free from components, which normally accompany the material in the mixture used to prepare the peptide conjugate.
  • isolated and pure are used interchangeably.
  • isolated peptide conjugates of the invention have a level of purity preferably expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of purity for the peptide conjugates is about 60%, about 70%> or about 80% and the upper end of the range of purity is about 70%, about 80%, about 90%> or more than about 90%.
  • the peptide conjugates are more than about 90% pure, their purities are also preferably expressed as a range.
  • the lower end of the range of purity is about 90%, about 92%), about 94%, about 96% or about 98%.
  • the upper end of the range of purity is about 92%, about 94%, about 96%, about 98% or about 100% purity.
  • [WW2] pMfl Waet ⁇ rmir ⁇ e'd-b i'My art-recognized method of analysis (e.g., band intensity on a silver stained gel, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, HPLC, or a similar means).
  • each member of the population describes a characteristic of a population of peptide conjugates of the invention in which a selected percentage of the modified sugars added to a peptide are added to multiple, identical acceptor sites on the peptide.
  • "Essentially each member of the population” speaks to the "homogeneity" of the sites on the peptide conjugated to a modified sugar and refers to conjugates of the invention, which are at least about 80%, preferably at least about 90% and more preferably at least about 95% homogenous.
  • homogeneity refers to the structural consistency across a population of acceptor moieties to which the modified sugars are conjugated.
  • the peptide conjugate in which each modified sugar moiety is conjugated to an acceptor site having the same structure as the acceptor site to which every other modified sugar is conjugated, the peptide conjugate is said to be about 100% homogeneous.
  • Homogeneity is typically expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of homogeneity for the peptide conjugates is about 60%, about 70%> or about 80% and the upper end of the range of purity is about 70%, about 80%), about 90% or more than about 90%.
  • the peptide conjugates are more than or equal to about 90% homogeneous, their homogeneity is also preferably expressed as a range.
  • the lower end of the range of homogeneity is about 90%>, about 92%, about 94%, about 96%> or about 98%>.
  • the upper end of the range of purity is about 92%, about 94%, about 96%, about 98% or about 100% homogeneity.
  • the purity of the peptide conjugates is typically determined by one or more methods known to those of skill in the art, e.g., liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LC-MS), matrix assisted laser desorption mass time of flight spectrometry (MALDITOF), capillary electrophoresis, and the like.
  • substantially uniform glycoform or a “substantially uniform glycosylation pattern,” when referring to a glycopeptide species, refers to the percentage of acceptor moieties that are glycosylated by the glycosyltransferase of interest (e.g., fucosyltransferase). For example, in the case of a ⁇ 1,2 fucosyltransferase, a substantially uniform fucosylation pattern exists if substantially all (as defined below) of the Gal ⁇ l,4-GlcNAc-R and sialylated analogues thereof are fucosylated in a peptide conjugate of the invention.
  • the starting material may contain glycosylated a'ccfeptbf moietie ' (e.g. ,”f ucosylated ' Gal ⁇ 1 ,4-GlcNAc-R moieties).
  • the calculated percent glycosylation will include acceptor moieties that are glycosylated by the methods of the invention, as well as those acceptor moieties already glycosylated in the starting material.
  • substantially in the above definitions of "substantially uniform” generally means at least about 40%), at least about 70%), at least about 80%), or more preferably at least about 90%>, and still more preferably at least about 95% of the acceptor moieties for a particular glycosyltransferase are glycosylated.
  • PEG poly(ethyleneglycol); m-PEG, methoxy- ⁇ oly(ethylene glycol); PPG, poly(propyleneglycol); m-PPG, methoxy-poly(propylene glycol); Fuc, fucosyl; Gal, galactosyl; GalNAc, N-acetylgalactosaminyl; Glc, glucosyl; GlcNAc, N-acetylglucosaminyl; Man, mannosyl; ManAc, mannosaminyl acetate; Sia, sialic acid; and NeuAc, N- acetylneuraminy 1.
  • the present invention provides genetically engineered mutants of human growth hormone that contain N-linked or O-linked glycosylation sites not present in naturally occurring human growth hormone. While these hGH mutants substantially retain the biological activity of the wild-type hormone, the newly introduced glycosylation sites allow the recombinantly produced hGH mutants to be glycosylated in a large variety of patterns. Moreover, the non-natural glycosylation sites provide loci for conjugating modifying groups to the peptide, e.g., by glycoconjugation.
  • An exemplary modifying group is a water-soluble polymer, such as poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., methoxy-poly(ethylene glycol). Modification of the hGH mutants can improve the stability and retention time of the recombinant hGH in a patient's circulation, reduce their antigenicity, and enhance their ability to target a specific tissue in need of treatment.
  • poly(ethylene glycol) e.g., methoxy-poly(ethylene glycol).
  • the present invention provides mutants of hGH that include one or more O- or N- linked glycosylation sites that are not found in the wild type peptide.
  • the mutants are su ' b'strates l r , 'etizy ' at ⁇ e' li g , l , elosy ! lMon at one or more sites that would not normally be glycosylated, or would be poorly glycosylated, in the wild type peptide.
  • the mutants allow the position of a glycosyl residue or a glycosyl linking group to be engineered to obtain a peptide having selected desirable properties.
  • the present invention provides an isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the present invention provides an expression cassette or a cell that comprises a nucleic acid, e.g., an isolated nucleic acid, including a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone.
  • the mutant human growth hormone includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the present invention provides a mutant human growth hormone, that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the present invention provides a method for making a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
  • This method comprises the steps of recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone, and glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone at the new glycosylation site.
  • the cUrfesp ' ta ⁇ dMg''W ⁇ 'i type l! h ⁇ a ⁇ :: gf ⁇ ' wth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • This invention relies on routine techniques in the field of recombinant genetics. Basic texts disclosing the general methods of use in this invention include Sambrook and Russell, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (3rd ed. 2001); Kriegler, Crene Transfer and Expression: A Laboratory Manual (1990); and Ausubel et al, eds., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology ( 1994).
  • nucleic acids sizes are given in either kilobases (kb) or base pairs (bp). These are estimates derived from agarose or acrylamide gel electrophoresis, from sequenced nucleic acids, or from published DNA sequences.
  • kb kilobases
  • bp base pairs
  • proteins sizes are given in kilodaltons (kDa) or amino acid residue numbers. Proteins sizes are estimated from gel electrophoresis, from sequenced proteins, from derived amino acid sequences, or from published protein sequences.
  • Oligonucleotides that are not commercially available can be chemically synthesized, e.g., according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method first described by Beaucage & Caruthers, Tetrahedron Lett. 22: 1859-1862 (1981), using an automated synthesizer, as described in Van Devanter et. al, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 6159-6168 (1984). Purification of oligonucleotides is performed using any art-recognized strategy, e.g. , native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson & Reanier, J. Chrom. 255: 137-149 (1983).
  • a number of polynucleotide sequences encoding a wild-type human growth hormone e.g., GenBank Accession Nos. NM 000515, NM 002059, NM 022556, NM 022557, NM 022558, NM 022559, NM 022560, NM 022561, and NM 022562, have been determined and can be obtained from a commercial supplier.
  • a human DNA sequence database can be searched for any gene segment that has a certain percentage of sequence homology to a known nucleotide sequence, such as one encoding a previously identified human growth hormone. Any DNA sequence so identified can be subsequently obtained by chemical synthesis and/or a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) technique such as overlap extension method. For a short sequence, completely de novo synthesis may be sufficient; whereas further isolation of full length coding sequence from a human cDNA or genomic library using a synthetic probe may be necessary to obtain a larger gene.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • a nucleic acid sequence encoding a human growth hormone can be isolated from a human cDNA or genomic DNA library using standard cloning techniques such as polymerase chain reaction (PCR), where homology-based primers can often be derived from a known nucleic acid sequence encoding a human growth hormone.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • cDNA libraries suitable for obtaining a coding sequence for a wild-type human growth hormone may be commercially available or can be constructed.
  • the general methods of isolating mRNA, making cDNA by reverse transcription, ligating cDNA into a recombinant vector, transfecting into a recombinant host for propagation, screening, and cloning are well known (see, e.g., Gubler and Hoffman, Gene, 25: 263-269 (1983); Ausubel et al, supra).
  • the segment Upon obtaining an amplified segment of nucleotide sequence by PCR, the segment can be further used as a probe to isolate the full length polynucleotide sequence encoding the wild-type human growth hormone from the cDNA library.
  • a general description of appropriate procedures can be found in Sambrook and Russell, supra.
  • a similar procedure can be followed to obtain a full length sequence encoding a wild-type human growth hormone, e.g., any one of the GenBank Accession Nos. mentioned above, from a human genomic library.
  • Human genomic libraries are commercially available or can be constructed according to various art-recognized methods. In general, to construct a genomic library, the DNA is first extracted from an tissue where a human growth hormone is likely found.
  • the DNA is then either mechanically sheared or enzymatically digested to yield fragments of about 12-20 kb in length.
  • the fragments are subsequently separated by gradient centrifugation from polynucleotide fragments of undesired sizes and are inserted in bacteriophage ⁇ vectors.
  • These vectors and phages are packaged in vitro. Recombinant phages are atialyzed' l by"plaqUe hybridization as described in Benton and Davis, Science, 196: 180-182 (1977). Colony hybridization is carried out as described by Grunstein et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 72: 3961-3965 (1975).
  • degenerate oligonucleotides can be designed as primer sets and PCR can be performed under suitable conditions (see, e.g., White et al, PCR Protocols: Current Methods and Applications, 1993; Griffin and Griffin, PCR Technology, CRC Press Inc. 1994) to amplify a segment of nucleotide sequence from a cDNA or genomic library. Using the amplified segment as a probe, the full length nucleic acid encoding a wild- type human growth hormone is obtained.
  • the coding sequence can be subcloned into a vector, for instance, an expression vector, so that a recombinant wild-type human growth hormone can be produced from the resulting construct. Further modifications to the wild-type human growth hormone coding sequence, e.g., nucleotide substitutions, may be subsequently made to alter the characteristics of the molecule.
  • amino acid sequence of a wild-type human growth hormone e.g., SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2
  • this amino acid sequence may be modified to alter the protein's glycosylation pattern, by introducing additional glycosylation site(s) at various locations in the amino acid sequence.
  • N-linked glycosylation occurs on the asparagine of the consensus sequence Asn-X aa -Ser/Thr, in which X aa is any amino acid except proline (Kornfeld et al., Ann Rev Biochem 54:631-664 (1985); Kukuruzinska et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:2145-2149 (1987); Herscovics et al, FASEB J 7:540-550 (1993); and Orlean, Saccharomyces Vol. 3 (1996)).
  • O-linked glycosylation takes place at serine or threonine residues (Tanner et al, Biochim. Biophys. Ada. 906:81-91 (1987); and Hounsell et al, Glycoconj. J. 13:19-26 (1996)).
  • Other glycosylation patterns are formed by linking glycosylphosphatidylinositol to the carboxyl-terminal carboxyl group of the protein (Takeda et al, Trends Biochem. Sci.
  • kits for mutagenesis, library construction, and other diversity-generating methods are commercially available.
  • Mutational methods of generating diversity include, for example, site-directed mutagenesis (Botstein and Shortle, Science, 229: 1193-1201 (1985)), mutagenesis using uracil-containing templates (Kunkel, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 82: 488-492 (1985)), oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis (Zoller and Smith, Nucl. Acids Res., 10: 6487-6500 (1982)), phosphorothioate-modified DNA mutagenesis (Taylor et al, Nucl.
  • the polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone can be further altered to coincide with the preferred codon usage of a particular host.
  • the preferred codon usage of one strain of bacterial cells can be used to derive a polynucleotide that encodes a mutant human growth hormone of the invention and includes the codons favored by this strain.
  • the frequency of preferred codon usage exhibited by a host cell can be calculated by averaging frequency of preferred codon usage in a large number of genes expressed by the host cell (e.g., calculation service is available from web site of the Kazusa DNA Research Institute, Japan). This analysis is preferably limited to genes that are highly expressed by the host cell.
  • U.S. Patent No. 5,824,864 for example, provides the frequency of codon usage by highly expressed genes exhibited by dicotyledonous plants and monocotyledonous plants.
  • mutant human growth hormone coding sequences are verified by sequencing and are then subcloned into an appropriate expression vector for recombinant production in the same manner as the wild-type human growth hormones.
  • mutant human growth hormone of the present invention can be produced using routine techniques in the field of recombinant genetics, relying on the polynucleotide sequences encoding the polypeptide disclosed herein.
  • a nucleic acid encoding a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention one typically subclones a polynucleotide encoding the mutant human growth hormone into an expression vector that contains a strong promoter to direct transcription, a transcription translation terminator and a ribosome binding site for translational initiation.
  • Suitable bacterial promoters are well known in the art and described, e.g., in Sambrook and Russell, supra, and Ausubel et al, supra.
  • Bacterial expression systems for expressing the wild-type or mutant human growth hormone are available in, e.g., E. coli, Bacillus sp., Salmonella, and Caulobader. Kits for such expression systems are commercially available.
  • Eukaryotic expression systems for mammalian cells, yeast, and insect cells are well known in the art and are also commercially available.
  • one eukaryotic i 'ex fe'ssion vector is an adenoviral vector, an adeno-associated vector, or a retroviral vector.
  • the promoter used to direct expression of a heterologous nucleic acid depends on the particular application.
  • the promoter is optionally positioned about the same distance from the heterologous transcription start site as it is from the transcription start site in its natural setting. As is known in the art, however, some variation in this distance can be accommodated without loss of promoter function.
  • the expression vector typically includes a transcription unit or expression cassette that contains all the additional elements required for the expression of the mutant human growth hormone in host cells.
  • a typical expression cassette thus contains a promoter operably linked to the nucleic acid sequence encoding the mutant human growth hormone and signals required for efficient polyadenylation of the transcript, ribosome binding sites, and translation termination.
  • the nucleic acid sequence encoding the human growth hormone is typically linked to a cleavable signal peptide sequence to promote secretion of the human growth hormone by the transformed cell.
  • signal peptides include, among others, the signal peptides from tissue plasminogen activator, insulin, and neuron growth factor, and juvenile hormone esterase of Heliothis virescens.
  • Additional elements of the cassette may include enhancers and, if genomic DNA is used as the structural gene, introns with functional splice donor and acceptor sites.
  • the expression cassette should also contain a transcription termination region downstream of the structural gene to provide for efficient termination. The termination region may be obtained from the same gene as the promoter sequence or may be obtained from different genes.
  • the particular expression vector used to transport the genetic information into the cell is not particularly critical. Any of the conventional vectors used for expression in eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells may be used. Standard bacterial expression vectors include plasmids such as pBR322 based plasmids, pSKF, pET23D, and fusion expression systems such as GST and LacZ. Epitope tags can also be added to recombinant proteins to provide convenient methods of isolation, e.g., c-myc.
  • Expression vectors containing regulatory elements from eukaryotic viruses are typically used in eukaryotic expression vectors, e.g., SV40 vectors, papilloma virus vectors, and vectors derived from Epstein-Barr virus.
  • exemplary eukaryotic vectors include jpMSO, ⁇ AVtKWA" ,- ' pMTO 0/A7 ' pMAMneo-5, baculovirus pDSVE, and any other vector allowing expression of proteins under the direction of the SV40 early promoter, SV40 later promoter, • metallothionein promoter, murine mammary tumor virus promoter, Rous sarcoma virus promoter, polyhedrin promoter, or other promoters shown effective for expression in eukaryotic cells.
  • Some expression systems have markers that provide gene amplification such as thymidine kinase, hygromycin B phosphotransferase, and dihydrofolate reductase.
  • markers that provide gene amplification such as thymidine kinase, hygromycin B phosphotransferase, and dihydrofolate reductase.
  • high yield expression systems not involving gene amplification are also suitable, such as a baculovirus vector in insect cells, with a polynucleotide sequence encoding the mutant human growth hormone under the direction of the polyhedrin promoter or other strong baculovirus promoters.
  • the elements that are typically included in expression vectors also include a replicon that functions in E. coli, a gene encoding antibiotic resistance to permit selection of bacteria that harbor recombinant plasmids, and unique restriction sites in nonessential regions of the plasmid to allow insertion of eukaryotic sequences.
  • the particular antibiotic resistance gene chosen is not critical, any of the many resistance genes known in the art are suitable.
  • the prokaryotic sequences are optionally chosen such that they do not interfere with the replication of the DNA in eukaryotic cells, if necessary. Similar to antibiotic resistance selection markers, metabolic selection markers based on known metabolic pathways may also be used as a means for selecting transformed host cells.
  • the expression vector further comprises a sequence encoding a secretion signal, such as the E. coli OppA (Periplasmic Oligopeptide Binding Protein) secretion signal or a modified version thereof, which is directly connected to 5' of the coding sequence of the protein to be expressed.
  • a secretion signal such as the E. coli OppA (Periplasmic Oligopeptide Binding Protein) secretion signal or a modified version thereof, which is directly connected to 5' of the coding sequence of the protein to be expressed.
  • This signal sequence directs the recombinant protein produced in cytoplasm through the cell membrane into the periplasmic space.
  • the expression vector may further comprise a coding sequence for signal peptidase 1, which is capable of enzymatically cleaving the signal sequence when the recombinant protein is entering the periplasmic space. More detailed description for periplasmic production of a recombinant protein can be found in, e.g. , Gray et al. , Gene 39: 247-254 (1985), U.S. Patent Nos. 6,160,089 and 6,436,674.
  • Standard transfection methods are used to produce bacterial, mammalian, yeast, insect, or plant cell lines that express large quantities of the mutant human growth hormone, which are then purified using standard techniques (see, e.g., Colley et al, J. Biol. Chem. 264: 17619-17622 (1989); Guide to Protein Purification, in Methods in Enzymology, vol. 182 (Deutscher, ed., 1990)). Transformation of eukaiyotic and prokaryotic cells are performed according to standard techniques (see, e.g., Morrison, J, Bad.
  • Any of the well known procedures for introducing foreign nucleotide sequences into host cells may be used. These include the use of calcium phosphate transfection, polybrene, protoplast fusion, electroporation, liposomes, microinjection, plasma vectors, viral vectors and any of the other well known methods for introducing cloned genomic DNA, cDNA, synthetic DNA, or other foreign genetic material into a host cell (see, e.g., Sambrook and Russell, supra). It is only necessary that the particular genetic engineering procedure used be capable of successfully introducing at least one gene into the host cell capable of expressing the mutant human growth hormone.
  • the transfected cells are cultured under conditions favoring expression of the mutant human growth hormone.
  • the cells are then screened for the expression of the recombinant polypeptide, which is subsequently recovered from the culture using standard techniques (see, e.g., Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (1982); U.S. Patent No. 4,673,641; Ausubel et al, supra; and Sambrook and Russell, supra).
  • standard techniques see, e.g., Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (1982); U.S. Patent No. 4,673,641; Ausubel et al, supra; and Sambrook and Russell, supra.
  • gene expression can be detected at the polypeptide level.
  • Various immunological assays are routinely used by those skilled in the art to measure the level of a gene product, particularly using polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that react specifically with a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention, such as a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, or 5, (e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual, Chapter 14, Cold Spring Harbor, 1988; Kohler and Milstein, Nature, 256: 495-497 (1975)).
  • Such techniques require antibody preparation by selecting antibodies with high specificity against the mutant human growth hormone or an antigenic portion thereof.
  • the mutant human growth hormones of the present invention are produced recombinantly by transformed bacteria in large amounts, typically after promoter induction, although expression can be constitutive, the proteins may form insoluble aggregates.
  • purification of protein inclusion bodies typically involves the extraction, separation and/or purification of inclusion bodies by disruption of bacterial cells, e.g., by incubation in a buffer of about 100-150 ⁇ g/ml lysozyme and"0.'l% N ⁇ ide't 40,'"a' ribh-i ⁇ hie detergent.
  • the cell suspension can be ground using a Polytron grinder (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, NY). Alternatively, the cells can be sonicated on ice. Alternate methods of lysing bacteria are described in Ausubel et al. and Sambrook and Russell, both supra, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. [0123]
  • the cell suspension is generally centrifuged and the pellet containing the inclusion bodies resuspended in buffer which does not dissolve but washes the inclusion bodies, e.g., 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA, 150 mM NaCl and 2% Triton-X 100, a non-ionic detergent.
  • pellet of inclusion bodies may be resuspended in an appropriate buffer (e.g., 20 mM sodium phosphate, pH 6.8, 150 mM NaCl).
  • an appropriate buffer e.g., 20 mM sodium phosphate, pH 6.8, 150 mM NaCl.
  • Other appropriate buffers will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
  • the inclusion bodies are solubilized by the addition of a solvent that is both a strong hydrogen acceptor and a strong hydrogen donor (or a combination of solvents each having one of these properties).
  • a solvent that is both a strong hydrogen acceptor and a strong hydrogen donor or a combination of solvents each having one of these properties.
  • the proteins that formed the inclusion bodies may then be renatured by dilution or dialysis with a compatible buffer.
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, urea (from about 4 M to about 8 M), formamide (at least about 80%>, volume/volume basis), and guanidine hydrochloride (from about 4 M to about 8 M).
  • Some solvents that are capable of solubilizing aggregate-forming proteins may be inappropriate for use in this procedure due to the possibility of irreversible denaturation of the proteins, accompanied by a lack of immunogenicity and/or activity.
  • SDS sodium dodecyl sulfate
  • 70% formic acid may be inappropriate for use in this procedure due to the possibility of irreversible denaturation of the proteins, accompanied by a lack of immunogenicity and/or activity.
  • guanidine hydrochloride and similar agents are denaturants, this denaturation is not irreversible and renaturation may occur upon removal (by dialysis, for example) or dilution of the denaturant, allowing re-formation of the immunologically and/or biologically active protein of interest.
  • the protein can be separated from other bacterial proteins by standard separation techniques.
  • purifying recombinant human growth hormone from bacterial inclusion body see, e.g., Patra et al, Protein Expression and Purification 18: 182-190 (2000).
  • recombinant polypeptides e.g., a mutant human growth hormone
  • the periplasmic fraction of the bacteria can be isolated by cold osmotic shock in addition to other methods known to those of skill in the art (see e.g., Ausubel et al, supra).
  • the eW ⁇ al ' ceils-'are' c'eritrif ⁇ f e :, tb li f ⁇ rm a pellet. The pellet is resuspended in a buffer containing 20%) sucrose.
  • the bacteria are centrifuged and the pellet is resuspended in ice-cold 5 mM MgSO 4 and kept in an ice bath for approximately 10 minutes.
  • the cell suspension is centrifuged and the supernatant decanted and saved.
  • the recombinant proteins present in the supernatant can be separated from the host proteins by standard separation techniques well known to those of skill in the art.
  • a recombinant polypeptide e.g., the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention
  • its purification can follow the standard protein purification procedure described below.
  • an initial salt fractionation can separate many ofthe unwanted host cell proteins (or proteins derived from the cell culture media) from the recombinant protein of interest, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention.
  • the preferred salt is ammonium sulfate. Ammonium sulfate precipitates proteins by effectively reducing the amount of water in the protein mixture. Proteins then precipitate on the basis of their solubility. The more hydrophobic a protein is, the more likely it is to precipitate at lower ammonium sulfate concentrations.
  • a typical protocol is to add saturated ammonium sulfate to a protein solution so that the resultant ammonium sulfate concentration is between 20-30%). This will precipitate the most hydrophobic proteins. The precipitate is discarded (unless the protein of interest is hydrophobic) and ammonium sulfate is added to the supernatant to a concentration known to precipitate the protein of interest. The precipitate is then solubilized in buffer and the excess salt removed if necessary, through either dialysis or diafiltration. Other methods that rely on solubility of proteins, such as cold ethanol precipitation, are well known to those of skill in the art and can be used to fractionate complex protein mixtures.
  • a protein of greater and lesser size can be isolated using ultrafiltration through membranes of different pore sizes (for example, Amicon or Millipore membranes).
  • the protein mixture is ultrafiltered through a membrane with a pore size that has a lower molecular weight cut-off than the molecular weight of a protein of interest, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone.
  • the recombinant protein will pass through the membrane into the filtrate.
  • the filtrate can then be chromatographed as described below.
  • the proteins of interest can also be separated from other proteins on the basis of their size, net surface charge, hydrophobicity, or affinity for ligands.
  • antibodies raised against human growth hormone can be conjugated to column matrices and the human growth hormone immunopurified. All of these methods are well known in the art.
  • chromatographic techniques can be performed at any scale and using equipment from many different manufacturers (e.g., Pharmacia Biotech).
  • immunological assays may be useful to detect in a sample the expression ofthe polypeptide. Immunological assays are also useful for quantifying the expression level ofthe recombinant hormone. Antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone are necessary for carrying out these immunological assays.
  • Such techniques include antibody preparation by selection of antibodies from libraries of recombinant antibodies in phage or similar vectors (see, Huse et al., Science 246: 1275-1281, 1989; and Ward et al, Nature 341: 544-546, 1989).
  • the polypeptide of interest e.g., a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention
  • an aSitrgemc 1 ffagr n't thtrebf 6a'n b ⁇ sed to immunize suitable animals, e.g., mice, rabbits, or primates.
  • a standard adjuvant such as Freund's adjuvant, can be used in accordance with a standard immunization protocol.
  • a synthetic antigenic peptide derived from that particular polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein and subsequently used as an immunogen.
  • the animal's immune response to the immunogen preparation is monitored by taking test bleeds and determining the titer of reactivity to the antigen of interest.
  • blood is collected from the animal and antisera are prepared. Further fractionation ofthe antisera to enrich antibodies specifically reactive to the antigen and purification ofthe antibodies can be performed subsequently, see, Harlow and Lane, supra, and the general descriptions of protein purification provided above.
  • Monoclonal antibodies are obtained using various techniques familiar to those of skill in the art.
  • spleen cells from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519, 1976).
  • Alternative methods of immortalization include, e.g., transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in the art.
  • Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies ofthe desired specificity and affinity for the antigen, and the yield ofthe monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into the peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host.
  • monoclonal antibodies may also be recombinantly produced upon identification of nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody with desired specificity or a binding fragment of such antibody by screening a human B cell cDNA library according to the general protocol outlined by Huse et al, supra.
  • the general principles and methods of recombinant polypeptide production discussed above are applicable for antibody production by recombinant methods.
  • antibodies capable of specifically recognizing a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention can be tested for their cross-reactivity against the wild- type human growth hormone and thus distinguished from the antibodies against the wild-type protein.
  • antisera obtained from an animal immunized with a mutant human growth hormone can be run through a column on which a wild-type human growth ⁇ rmO ⁇ e'is'i' ⁇ tirh'bbilized " he-pbttion ofthe antisera that passes through the column recognizes only the mutant human growth hormone and not the wild-type human growth hormone.
  • monoclonal antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone can also be screened for their exclusivity in recognizing only the mutant but not the wild-type human growth hormone.
  • Polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that specifically recognize only the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention but not the wild-type human growth hormone are useful for isolating the mutant protein from the wild-type protein, for example, by incubating a sample with a mutant human growth hormone-specific polyclonal or monoclonal antibody immobilized on a solid support.
  • the amount ofthe polypeptide in a sample can be measured by a variety of immunoassay methods providing qualitative and quantitative results to a skilled artisan.
  • immunoassay methods providing qualitative and quantitative results to a skilled artisan.
  • Immunoassays often utilize a labeling agent to specifically bind to and label the binding complex formed by the antibody and the target protein.
  • the labeling agent may itself be one ofthe moieties comprising the antibody/target protein complex, or may be a third moiety, such as another antibody, that specifically binds to the antibody/target protein complex.
  • a label may be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, magnetic beads (e.g., DynabeadsTM), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein isothiocyanate, Texas red, rhodamine, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., 3 H, I25 1, 35 S, 14 C, or
  • enzymes e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, and others commonly used in an ELISA
  • colorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads.
  • the labeling agent is a second antibody bearing a detectable label.
  • the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies ofthe species from which the second antibody is def ⁇ vfed.” ' I'he-S eb ⁇ 'i ritibO ' y ii ⁇ drii'rJi' modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
  • proteins capable of specifically binding immunoglobulin constant regions can also be used as the label agents. These proteins are normal constituents ofthe cell walls of streptococcal bacteria. They exhibit a strong non- immunogenic reactivity with immunoglobulin constant regions from a variety of species (see, generally, Kronval, et al. J. Immunol, 111: 1401-1406 (1973); and Akerstrom, et al., J. Immunol, 135: 2589-2542 (1985)).
  • Immunoassays for detecting a target protein of interest may be either competitive or noncompetitive.
  • Noncompetitive immunoassays are assays in which the amount of captured target protein is directly measured.
  • the antibody specific for the target protein can be bound directly to a solid substrate where the antibody is immobilized. It then captures the target protein in test samples.
  • the antibody/target protein complex thus immobilized is then bound by a labeling agent, such as a second or third antibody bearing a label, as described above.
  • the amount of target protein in a sample is measured indirectly by measuring the amount of an added (exogenous) target protein displaced (or competed away) from an antibody specific for the target protein by the target protein present in the sample.
  • the antibody is immobilized and the exogenous target protein is labeled. Since the amount ofthe exogenous target protein bound to the antibody is inversely proportional to the concentration ofthe target protein present in the sample, the target protein level in the sample can thus be determined based on the amount of exogenous target protein bound to the antibody and thus immobilized.
  • western blot analysis is used to detect and quantify the presence of a mutant human growth hormone in the samples.
  • the technique generally comprises separating sample proteins by gel electrophoresis on the basis of molecular weight, transferring the separated proteins to a suitable solid support (such as a nitrocellulose filter, a nylon filter, or a derivatized nylon filter) and incubating the samples with the antibodies that specifically bind the target protein.
  • antibodies may be directly labeled or alternatively niia »b is ⁇ t ⁇ e ⁇ !iMtl .detfe *I"USirif 'labeled antibodies (e.g., labeled sheep anti-mouse antibodies) that specifically bind to the antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone.
  • LOA liposome immunoassays
  • the invention provides methods for preparing conjugates of glycosylated and unglycosylated mutant human growth hormones, which have new glycosylation sites that do not exist in the corresponding wild-type hGH. Such conjugation may take place directly on the appropriate sugar units of a glycosylated mutant hGH, or following the removal (i.e., "trimming back") of any undesired sugar units.
  • the conjugates are formed between peptides and diverse species such as water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, targeting moieties and the like.
  • conjugates that include two or more peptides linked together through a linker arm i.e., multifunctional conjugates.
  • the multi-functional conjugates ofthe invention can include two or more copies ofthe same peptide or a collection of diverse peptides with different structures, and/or properties.
  • the conjugates of the invention are formed by the enzymatic attachment of a modified sugar to the glycosylated or unglycosylated peptide.
  • the modified sugar when interposed between the peptide and the modifying group on the sugar becomes what is referred to herein as "an intact glycosyl linking group.”
  • an intact glycosyl linking group Using the extraordinarivity of eruzyrneS Sufe ⁇ a's'f- iybbs iltfariSfeia ⁇ e-s, the present method provides peptides that bear a desired group at one or more specific locations.
  • a modified sugar is attached directly to a selected locus on the peptide chain or, alternatively, the modified sugar is appended onto a carbohydrate moiety of a glycopeptide.
  • Peptides in which modified sugars are bound to both a glycopeptide carbohydrate and directly to an amino acid residue ofthe peptide backbone are also within the scope ofthe present invention.
  • the methods ofthe invention make it possible to assemble peptides and glycopeptides that have a substantially homogeneous derivatization pattern; the enzymes used in the invention are generally selective for a particular amino acid residue or combination of amino acid residues ofthe peptide.
  • the methods are also practical for large-scale production of modified peptides and glycopeptides.
  • the methods ofthe invention provide a practical means for large- scale preparation of glycopeptides having preselected uniform derivatization patterns.
  • the methods are particularly well suited for modification of therapeutic peptides, including but not limited to, glycopeptides that are incompletely glycosylated during production in cell culture cells (e.g., mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, fungal cells, yeast cells, or prokaryotic cells) or transgenic plants or animals.
  • cell culture cells e.g., mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, fungal cells, yeast cells, or prokaryotic cells
  • transgenic plants or animals e.g., transgenic plants or animals.
  • the methods ofthe invention also provide conjugates of glycosylated and unglycosylated peptides with increased therapeutic half-life due to, for example, reduced clearance rate, or reduced rate of uptake by the immune or reticuloendothelial system (RES). Moreover, the methods ofthe invention provide a means for masking antigenic determinants on peptides, thus reducing or eliminating a host immune response against the peptide. Selective attachment of targeting agents can also be used to target a peptide to a particular tissue or cell surface receptor that is specific for the particular targeting agent.
  • RES reticuloendothelial system
  • the present invention provides a conjugate between a selected modifying group and an hGH mutant peptide having a glycosylation site not present in the wild type peptide.
  • the modifying group may be attached at the mutant glycosylation site or at a site that is present in the wild type peptide.
  • the link between the peptide and the modifying includes a glycosyl linking group interposed between the peptide and the selected moiety.
  • the selected moiety is essentially any species that can be attached to a saccharide unit, resulting in a ⁇ modified M r 8Jtt tti!at s%e b 6grii 'by an appropriate transferase enzyme, which appends the modified sugar onto the peptide.
  • the saccharide component ofthe modified sugar when interposed between the peptide and a selected moiety, becomes a "glycosyl linking group," e.g., an "intact glycosyl linking group.”
  • the glycosyl linking group is formed from any mono- or oligo-saccharide that, after modification with the modifying group, is a substrate for an enzyme that adds the modified sugar to an amino acid or glycosyl residue of a peptide.
  • the glycosyl linking group can be, or can include, a saccharide moiety that is degradatively modified during the addition ofthe modifying group.
  • the glycosyl linking group can be derived from a saccharide residue that is produced by oxidative degradation of an intact saccharide to the corresponding aldehyde, e.g., via the action of metaperiodate, and subsequently converted to a Schiff base with an appropriate amine, which is then reduced to the corresponding amine.
  • the "agent” is a therapeutic agent, a bioactive agent, a detectable label, water-soluble moiety (e.g., PEG, m-PEG, PPG, and m-PPG) or the like.
  • the "agent” can be a peptide, e.g., enzyme, antibody, antigen, etc.
  • the linker can be any of a wide array of linking groups, infra.
  • the linker may be a single bond or a "zero order linker.”
  • the selected modifying group is a water-soluble polymer, e.g., m-PEG.
  • the water-soluble polymer is covalently attached to the peptide via a glycosyl linking group.
  • the glycosyl linking group is covalently attached to an amino acid residue or a glycosyl residue ofthe peptide.
  • the invention also provides conjugates in which an amino acid residue and a glycosyl residue are modified with a glycosyl linking group.
  • An exemplary water-soluble polymer is poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., methoxy- poly(ethylene glycol).
  • the poly(ethylene glycol) used in the present invention is not restricted to any particular form or molecular weight range.
  • the poly(ethylene glycol) molecular weight is preferably between 500 and 100,000.
  • a molecular weight of 500-60,000 is preferably used and preferably of from 1,000-40,000. More preferably, the molecular weight is from about 5,000 to about 40,000.
  • each poly(ethylene glycol) ofthe branched PEG is 5,000-20,000.
  • the present invention provides conjugates that are highly homogenous in their substitution patterns. Using the methods ofthe invention, it is possible to form peptide conjugates in which essentially all ofthe modified sugar moieties across a population of conjugates ofthe invention are attached to multiple copies of a structurally identical amino acid or glycosyl residue.
  • the invention provides a peptide conjugate having a population of water-soluble polymer moieties, which are covalently bound to the peptide through an intact glycosyl linking group.
  • each member ofthe population is bound via the glycosyl linking group to a glycosyl residue ofthe peptide, and each glycosyl residue ofthe peptide to which the glycosyl linking group is attached has the same structure.
  • a peptide conjugate having a population of water-soluble polymer moieties covalently bound thereto through a glycosyl linking group.
  • a glycosyl linking group essentially every member ofthe population of water soluble polymer moieties is bound to an amino acid residue ofthe peptide via a glycosyl linking group, and each amino acid residue having a glycosyl linking group attached thereto has the same structure.
  • the present invention also provides conjugates analogous to those described above in which the peptide is conjugated to a therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, targeting moiety, toxin moiety or the like via an intact glycosyl linking group.
  • the peptide is conjugated to a therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, targeting moiety, toxin moiety or the like via an intact glycosyl linking group.
  • Each ofthe above- recited moieties can be a small molecule, natural polymer (e.g., polypeptide) or synthetic polymer.
  • mutant human growth hormone is conjugated to transferrin via a bifunctional linker that includes an intact glycosyl linking group at each terminus ofthe PEG moiety (Scheme 1).
  • a bifunctional linker that includes an intact glycosyl linking group at each terminus ofthe PEG moiety (Scheme 1).
  • one terminus ofthe PEG linker is fun'bti nalized' i wi l tl ll a ⁇ linker that is attached to transferrin and the other is fiinctionalized with an intact GalNAc linker that is attached to the mutant hGH.
  • the conjugates ofthe invention can include intact glycosyl linking groups that are mono- or multi-valent (e.g., antennary structures).
  • conjugates ofthe invention include both species in which a selected moiety is attached to a peptide via a monovalent glycosyl linking group.
  • conjugates in which more than one selected moiety is attached to a peptide via a multivalent linking group are also included within the invention.
  • the invention provides conjugates that localize selectively in a particular tissue due to the presence of a targeting agent as a component ofthe conjugate.
  • the targeting agent is a protein.
  • Exemplary proteins include transferrin (brain, blood pool), HS-glycoprotein (bone, brain, blood pool), antibodies (brain, tissue with antibody-specific antigen, blood pool), coagulation factors V- XII (damaged tissue, clots, cancer, blood pool), serum proteins, e.g., ⁇ -acid glycoprotein, fetuin, ⁇ -fetal protein (brain, blood pool), ⁇ 2-glycoprotein (liver, atherosclerosis plaques, brain, blood pool), G-CSF, GM-CSF, M-CSF, and EPO (immune stimulation, cancers, blood pool, red blood cell overproduction, neuroprotection), albumin (increase in half-life), and lipoprotein E.
  • the present invention provides methods for preparing these and other conjugates.
  • the invention provides a method of forming a covalent conjugate between a selected moiety and a peptide.
  • the invention provides methods for targeting conjugates ofthe invention to a particular tissue or region ofthe body.
  • the present invention provides a method for preventing, curing, or ameliorating a disease state by administering a conjugate ofthe invention to a subject at risk of developing the disease or a subject that has the disease.
  • the conjugate is formed between a water-soluble polymer, a therapeutic moiety, targeting moiety or a biomolecule, and a glycosylated or non- glycosylated peptide.
  • the polymer, therapeutic moiety or biomolecule is conjugated to the peptide via an intact glycosyl linking group, which is interposed between, and covalently linked to both the peptide and the modifying group (e.g., water-soluble polymer).
  • the method includes contacting the peptide with a mixture containing a modified sugar and a glycosyltransferase for which the modified sugar is a substrate.
  • the reaction is conducted u'hc ⁇ er covalent bond between the modified sugar and the peptide.
  • the sugar moiety ofthe modified sugar is preferably selected from nucleotide sugars, activated sugars, and sugars that are neither nucleotides nor activated.
  • the acceptor peptide (glycosylated or non-glycosylated) is typically synthesized de novo, or recombinantly expressed in a prokaryotic cell (e.g., bacterial cell, such as E. coli) or in a eukaryotic cell such as a mammalian, yeast, insect, fungal or plant cell.
  • a prokaryotic cell e.g., bacterial cell, such as E. coli
  • a eukaryotic cell such as a mammalian, yeast, insect, fungal or plant cell.
  • the peptide can be either a full-length protein or a fragment.
  • the peptide can be a wild type or mutated peptide.
  • the peptide includes a mutation that adds one or more consensus glycosylation sites to the peptide sequence.
  • the method of the invention also provides for modification of incompletely glycosylated peptides that are produced recombinantly. Many recombinantly produced glycoproteins are incompletely glycosylated, exposing carbohydrate residues that may have undesirable properties, e.g., immunogenicity, recognition by the RES.
  • the peptide can be simultaneously further glycosylated and derivatized with, e.g., a water-soluble polymer, therapeutic agent, or the like.
  • the sugar moiety ofthe modified sugar can be the residue that would properly be conjugated to the acceptor in a fully glycosylated peptide, or another sugar moiety with desirable properties.
  • Peptides modified by the methods ofthe invention can be synthetic or wild-type peptides or they can be mutated peptides, produced by methods known in the art, such as site- directed mutagenesis. Glycosylation of peptides is typically either N-linked or O-linked. An exemplary N-linkage is the attachment ofthe modified sugar to the side chain of an asparagine residue.
  • the tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X- threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of a carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain.
  • O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one sugar (e.g., N- aceylgalactosamine, galactose, mannose, GlcNAc, glucose, fucose or xylose) to a the hydroxy side chain of a hydroxyamino acid, preferably serine or threonine, although 5- hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used.
  • one sugar e.g., N- aceylgalactosamine, galactose, mannose, GlcNAc, glucose, fucose or xylose
  • Addition of glycosylation sites to a peptide or other structure is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more glycosylation sites.
  • the addition may also be made by the incorporation of one or more s 6 ⁇ es ll pfes ' dht ⁇ h l g 'i ari' ::L OH '''
  • the addition may be made by mutation or by full chemical synthesis ofthe peptide.
  • the peptide amino acid sequence is preferably altered through changes at the DNA level, particularly by mutating the DNA encoding the peptide at preselected bases such that codons are generated that will translate into the desired amino acids.
  • the DNA mutation(s) are preferably made using methods known in the art.
  • the glycosylation site is added by shuffling polynucleotides.
  • Polynucleotides encoding a candidate peptide can be modulated with DNA shuffling protocols.
  • DNA shuffling is a process of recursive recombination and mutation, performed by random fragmentation of a pool of related genes, followed by reassembly of the fragments by a polymerase chain reaction-like process. See, e.g., Stemmer, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:10747-10751 (1994); Stemmer, Nature 370:389-391 (1994); and U.S. Patent ⁇ os. 5,605,793, 5,837,458, 5,830,721 and 5,811,238.
  • the present invention also provides means of adding (or removing) one or more selected glycosyl residues to a peptide, after which a modified sugar is conjugated to at least one ofthe selected glycosyl residues ofthe peptide.
  • the present embodiment is useful, for example, when it is desired to conjugate the modified sugar to a selected glycosyl residue that is either not present on a peptide or is not present in a desired amount.
  • the selected glycosyl residue prior to coupling a modified sugar to a peptide, the selected glycosyl residue is conjugated to the peptide by enzymatic or chemical coupling.
  • the glycosylation pattern of a glycopeptide is altered prior to the conjugation ofthe modified sugar by the removal of a carbohydrate residue from the glycopeptide. See, for example WO 98/31826.
  • Enzymatic cleavage of carbohydrate moieties on polypeptide variants can be achieved by the use of a variety of endo- and exo-glycosidases as described by Thotakura et al, Meth. Enzymol 138: 350 (1987). [0l ⁇ 4] !1 • ' , Ch niiMr ' fd ' ditlol l'' b ' f ; g 'c'osyl moieties is carried out by any art-recognized method.
  • Enzymatic addition of sugar moieties is preferably achieved using a modification ofthe methods set forth herein, substituting native glycosyl units for the modified sugars used in the invention. Other methods of adding sugar moieties are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,876,980, 6,030,815, 5,728,554, and 5,922,577.
  • Exemplary attachment points for selected glycosyl residue include, but are not limited to: (a) consensus sites for N-linked glycosylation and O-linked glycosylation; (b) terminal glycosyl moieties that are acceptors for a glycosyltransferase; (c) arginine, asparagine and histidine; (d) free carboxyl groups; (e) free sulfhydryl groups such as those of cysteine; (f) free hydroxyl groups such as those of serine, threonine, or hydroxyproline; (g) aromatic residues such as those of phenylalanine, tyrosine, or tryptophan; or (h) the amide group of glutamine.
  • the invention provides a method for linking hGH and one or more peptide through a linking group.
  • the linking group is of any useful structure and may be selected from straight-chain and branched chain structures.
  • each terminus of the linker, which is attached to a peptide includes a modified sugar (i.e., a nascent intact glycosyl linking group).
  • two peptides are linked together via a linker moiety that includes a PEG linker.
  • a PEG moiety is functionalized at a first terminus with a first glycosyl unit and at a second terminus with a second glycosyl unit.
  • the first and second glycosyl units are preferably substrates for different transferases, allowing orthogonal attachment ofthe first and second peptides to the first and second glycosylunits, respectively.
  • the (glycosyl) '-PEG-(glycosyl) 2 linker is contacted with the first peptide and a first transferase for which the first glycosyl unit is a substrate, thereby forming (peptide)'-(glycosyl) 1 -PEG-(glycosyl) 2 .
  • Glycosyltransferase and/or unreacted peptide is then optionally rernoWd frbnAhe react ⁇ B mixture.
  • the second peptide and a second transferase for which the second glycosyl unit is a substrate are added to the (peptide)'-(glycosyl) I -PEG-(glycosyl) 2 conjugate, forming
  • human growth hormone is conjugated to transferrin via a bifunctional linker that includes an intact glycosyl linking group at each terminus ofthe PEG moiety (Scheme 1).
  • the hGH conjugate has an in vivo half-life that is increased over that of hGH alone by virtue ofthe greater molecular sized ofthe conjugate.
  • the conjugation of hGH to transferrin serves to selectively target the conjugate to the brain.
  • one terminus ofthe PEG linker is functionalized with a CMP sialic acid and the other is functionalized with an UDP GalNAc.
  • the linker is combined with hGH in the presence of a GalNAc transferase, resulting in the attachment ofthe GalNAc ofthe linker arm to a serine and/or threonine residue on the hGH.
  • the reactions functionalizing the intact glycosyl linking groups at the termini ofthe PEG (or other) linker with the peptide can occur simultaneously in the same reaction vessel, or they can be carried out in a step-wise fashion.
  • the conjugate produced at each step is optionally purified from one or more reaction components (e.g., enzymes, peptides).
  • reaction components e.g., enzymes, peptides.
  • G is a glycosyl residue on an activated sugar moiety (e.g., sugar nucleotide), which is converted to an intact glycosyl linker group in the conjugate.
  • L is a saccharyl linking group such as GalNAc, or GalNAc-Gal.
  • the invention provides a method for extending the blood-circulation half-life of a selected peptide, in essence targeting the peptide to the blood pool, by conjugating the peptide to a synthetic or natural polymer of a size sufficient to retard the filtration ofthe protein by the glomerulus (e.g., albumin).
  • a synthetic or natural polymer of a size sufficient to retard the filtration ofthe protein by the glomerulus e.g., albumin.
  • This embodiment ofthe invention is illustrated in Scheme 3 in which hGH is conjugated to albumin via a PEG linker using a combination of chemical and enzymatic modification.
  • a residue (e.g., amino acid side chain) of albumin is modified with a reactive PEG derivative, such as X-PEG-(CMP-sialic acid), in which X is an activating group (e.g., active ester, isothiocyanate, etc).
  • X is an activating group (e.g., active ester, isothiocyanate, etc).
  • the PEG derivative and hGH are combined and contacted with a transferase for which CMP-sialic acid is a substrate.
  • an ⁇ -amine of lysine is reacted with the N- hydroxysuccinimide ester ofthe PEG-linker to form the albumin conjugate.
  • the CMP-silaic acid ofthe linker is enzymatically conjugated to an appropriate residue on hGH, e.g., Gal or GalNAc, thereby forming the conjugate.
  • hGH e.g., Gal or GalNAc
  • the above- described method is not limited to the reaction partners set forth.
  • the method can be practiced to form conjugates that include more than two protein moieties by, for example, utilizing a branched linker having more than two termini. Toirfi ' S ars-
  • Modified glycosyl donor species are preferably selected from modified sugar nucleotides, activated modified sugars and modified sugars that are simple saccharides that are neither nucleotides nor activated. Any desired carbohydrate structure can be added to a peptide using the methods ofthe invention. Typically, the structure will be a monosaccharide, but the present invention is not limited to the use of modified monosaccharide sugars; oligosaccharides and polysaccharides are useful as well.
  • the modifying group is attached to a sugar moiety by enzymatic means, chemical means or a combination thereof, thereby producing a modified sugar.
  • the sugars are substituted at any position that allows for the attachment ofthe modifying moiety, yet which still allows the sugar to function as a substrate for the enzyme used to ligate the modified sugar to the peptide.
  • sialic acid when sialic acid is the sugar, the sialic acid is substituted with the modifying group at either the 9-position on the pyruvyl side chain or at the 5-position on the- amine moiety that is normally acetylated in sialic acid.
  • a modified sugar nucleotide is utilized to add the modified sugar to the peptide.
  • exemplary sugar nucleotides that are used in the present invention in their modified form include nucleotide mono-, di- or triphosphates or analogs thereof.
  • the modified sugar nucleotide is selected from a UDP-glycoside, CMP-glycoside, or a GDP-glycoside.
  • the modified sugar nucleotide is selected from an UDP-galactose, UDP-galactosamine, UDP- glucose, UDP-glucosamine, GDP-mannose, GDP-fucose, CMP-sialic acid, or CMP-NeuAc.
  • N-acetylamine derivatives ofthe sugar nucletides are also of use in the method ofthe invention.
  • the invention also provides methods for synthesizing a modified peptide using a modified sugar, e.g., modified-galactose, -fucose, -GalNAc, and -sialic acid.
  • a modified sugar e.g., modified-galactose, -fucose, -GalNAc, and -sialic acid.
  • a modified sialic acid either a sialyltransferase or a trans-sialidase (for ⁇ 2,3 -linked sialic acid only) can be used in these methods.
  • the modified sugar is an activated sugar.
  • Activated modified sugars which are useful in the present invention are typically glycosides which have been synthetically altered to include an activated leaving group.
  • activated leaving group refers to those moieties, which are easily displaced in enzyme- regulated nucleophilic substitution reactions. Many activated sugars are known in the art. Sfeer ⁇ br BIOLOGY, Vol. 2, Ernst et al. Ed., Wiley- VCH Verlag: Weinheim, Germany, 2000; Kodama et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 34: 6419 (1993); Lougheed, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 274: 37717 (1999)).
  • activating groups include fluoro, chloro, bromo, tosylate ester, mesylate ester, triflate ester and the like.
  • Preferred activated leaving groups, for use in the present invention are those that do not significantly sterically encumber the enzymatic transfer ofthe glycoside to the acceptor. Accordingly, preferred embodiments of activated glycoside derivatives include glycosyl fluorides and glycosyl mesylates, with glycosyl fluorides being particularly preferred.
  • glycosyl fluorides ⁇ -galactosyl fluoride, ⁇ -mannosyl fluoride, ⁇ -glucosyl fluoride, ⁇ -fucosyl fluoride, ⁇ -xylosyl fluoride, ⁇ - sialyl fluoride, ⁇ -N-acetylglucosaminyl fluoride, ⁇ -N-acetylgalactosaminyl fluoride, ⁇ - galactosyl fluoride, ⁇ -mannosyl fluoride, ⁇ -glucosyl fluoride, ⁇ -fucosyl fluoride, ⁇ -xylosyl fluoride, ⁇ -sialyl fluoride, ⁇ -N-acetylglucosaminyl fluoride and ⁇ -N-acetylgalactosaminyl fluoride are most preferred.
  • glycosyl fluorides can be prepared from the free sugar by first acetylating the sugar and then treating it with HF/pyridine. This generates the thermodynamically most stable anomer ofthe protected (acetylated) glycosyl fluoride (z'.e., the ⁇ -glycosyl fluoride). If the less stable anomer (i.e., the ⁇ -glycosyl fluoride) is desired, it can be prepared by converting the peracetylated sugar with HBr/HOAc or with HCl to generate the anomeric bromide or chloride. This intermediate is reacted with a fluoride salt such as silver fluoride to generate the glycosyl fluoride.
  • Acetylated glycosyl fluorides may be deprotected by reaction with mild (catalytic) base in methanol (e.g. NaOMe/MeOH). In addition, many glycosyl fluorides are commercially available.
  • glycosyl mesylates can be prepared by treatment ofthe fully benzylated hemiacetal form ofthe sugar with mesyl chloride, followed by catalytic hydrogenation to remove the benzyl groups.
  • the modified sugar is an oligosaccharide having an antennary structure.
  • one or more ofthe termini ofthe antennae bear the modifying moiety.
  • the oligosaccharide is useful to "amplify" the modifying moiety; each oligosaccharide unit conjugated to the peptide attaches multiple copies
  • the general structure of a typical chelate ofthe invention as set forth in the drawing above encompasses multivalent species resulting from preparing a conjugate ofthe invention utilizing an antennary structure. Many antennary saccharide structures are known in the art, and the present method can be practiced with them without limitation.
  • modifying groups are discussed below.
  • the modifying groups can be selected for their ability to impart to a polypeptide one or more desirable properties.
  • Exemplary properties include, but are not limited to, enhaced pharmacokinetics, enhanced pharmacodynamics, improved biodistribution, providing a polyvalent species, improved water solubility, enhanced or diminished lipophilicity, and tissue targeting.
  • hydrophilicity of a selected peptide is enhanced by conjugation with polar molecules such as amine-, ester-, hydroxyl- and polyhydroxyl-containing molecules.
  • polar molecules such as amine-, ester-, hydroxyl- and polyhydroxyl-containing molecules.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, polylysine, polyethyleneimine, and polyethers, e.g., poly(ethylene glycol), m-poly(ethylene glycol), poly(propyleneglycol), m- poly(propylene glycol), and other O-alkyl poly(alkylene glycol) moieties.
  • Preferred water- soluble polymers are essentially non- fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay.
  • polymers that are not naturally occurring sugars are not naturally occurring sugars.
  • An exception to this preference is the use of an otherwise naturally occurring sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity (e.g., poly(ethylene glycol), poly(propylene glycol), biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, etc.).
  • a therapeutic sugar moiety is conjugated to a linker arm and the sugar-linker arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
  • water-soluble polymer encompasses species such as saccharides (e.g., dextran, amylose, hyalouronic acid, poly(sialic acid), heparans, heparins, etc.); poly (amino acids); nucleic acids; synthetic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(ethers), e.g., ⁇ oly(ethylene glycol); peptides, proteins, and the like.
  • saccharides e.g., dextran, amylose, hyalouronic acid, poly(sialic acid), heparans, heparins, etc.
  • poly (amino acids) nucleic acids
  • synthetic polymers e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(ethers), e.g., ⁇ oly(ethylene glycol); peptides, proteins, and the like.
  • the present invention may be practiced with any water-soluble polymer with the sole limitation that the polymer must include a point
  • Preferred water-soluble polymers are those in which a substantial proportion ofthe polymer molecules in a sample ofthe polymer are of approximately the same molecular weight; such polymers are said to be “homodisperse” or “monodisperse.”
  • the present invention is further illustrated by reference to a poly(ethylene glycol) or monomethoxy-poly(ethylene glycol) (m-PEG) conjugate.
  • m-PEG monomethoxy-poly(ethylene glycol)
  • the poly(ethylene glycol) useful in forming the conjugate ofthe invention is either linear or branched.
  • the in vivo half- life or area under the curve (AUC) of therapeutic glycopeptides can also be enhanced with water-soluble polymers such as PEG, m-PEG, PPG, and m-PPG.
  • water-soluble polymers such as PEG, m-PEG, PPG, and m-PPG.
  • PEG PEG-ylation
  • m-PEG m-PEG- ylation
  • the in vivo half-life of a peptide derivatized with a water-soluble polymer by a method ofthe invention is increased relevant to the in vivo half-life or AUC ofthe non- derivatized peptide.
  • the increase in peptide in vivo half-life or AUC is best expressed as a range of percent increase in this quantity.
  • the lower end ofthe range of percent increase is about
  • PEG moieties of any molecular weight e.g., 5 kD, 10 kD, 20 kD, and 30 kD, are of use in the present invention.
  • the modified sugar bears a biomolecule.
  • the biomolecule is a functional protein, enzyme, antigen, antibody, peptide, nucleic acid (e.g., single nucleotides or nucleosides, oligonucleotides, polynucleotides and single- and higher-stranded nucleic acids), lectin, receptor or a combination thereof.
  • biomolecules are essentially non-fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay.
  • biomolecules that are not sugars.
  • An exception to this preference is the use of an otherwise naturally occurring sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity (e.g., PEG, biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, etc.).
  • a sugar moiety, which is a biomolecule is arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
  • Biomolecules useful in practicing the present invention can be derived from any source.
  • the biomolecules can be isolated from natural sources or they can be produced by synthetic methods.
  • Peptides can be natural peptides or mutated peptides. Mutations can be effected by chemical mutagenesis, site-directed mutagenesis or other means of inducing mutations known to those of skill in the art.
  • Peptides useful in practicing the instant invention include, for example, enzymes, antigens, antibodies and receptors.
  • Antibodies can be either polyclonal or monoclonal; either intact or fragments.
  • the peptides are optionally the products of a program of directed evolution.
  • Both naturally derived and synthetic peptides and nucleic acids are of use in conjunction with the present invention; these molecules can be attached to a sugar residue component or a crosslinking agent by any available reactive group.
  • peptides can be attached through a reactive amine, carboxyl, sulfhydryl, or hydroxyl group.
  • the reactive group can reside at a peptide terminus or at a site internal to the peptide chain.
  • Nucleic acids can be attached through a reactive group on a base (e.g., exocyclic amine) or an available hydroxyl group on a sugar moiety (e.g., 3'- or 5 '-hydroxyl).
  • the peptide and nucleic acid chains can be further derivatized at one or more sites to allow for the attachment of appropriate reactive groups onto the chain. See, Chrisey et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 24: 3031-3039 (1996).
  • the biomolecule is selected to direct the peptide modified by the methods ofthe invention to a specific tissue, thereby enhancing the delivery ofthe peptide to that tissue relative to the amount of underivatized peptide that is delivered to the tissue.
  • the amount of derivatized peptide delivered to a specific tissue within a selected time period is enhanced by derivatization by at least about 20%, more preferably, at least about 40%, and more preferably still, at least about 100%.
  • preferred biomolecules for targeting applications include antibodies, hormones and ligands for cell-surface receptors.
  • conjugate with biotin there is provided as conjugate with biotin.
  • a selectively biotinylated peptide is elaborated by the attachment of an avidin or streptavidin moiety bearing one or more modifying groups. ' e a ettt ⁇ 6'-M ⁇ et ⁇ &s"'
  • the modified sugar includes a therapeutic moiety.
  • a therapeutic moiety Those of skill in the art will appreciate that there is overlap between the category of therapeutic moieties and biomolecules; many biomolecules have therapeutic properties or potential.
  • the therapeutic moieties can be agents already accepted for clinical use or they can be drugs whose use is experimental, or whose activity or mechanism of action is under investigation.
  • the therapeutic moieties can have a proven action in a given disease state or can be only hypothesized to show desirable action in a given disease state.
  • the therapeutic moieties are compounds, which are being screened for their ability to interact with a tissue of choice.
  • Therapeutic moieties, which are useful in practicing the instant invention include drugs from a broad range of drug classes having a variety of pharmacological activities.
  • Preferred therapeutic moieties are essentially non-fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay.
  • therapeutic moieties that are not sugars.
  • An exception to this preference is the use of a sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity, such as a PEG, biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety and the like.
  • a therapeutic sugar moiety is conjugated to a linker arm and the sugar-linker arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
  • the therapeutic moiety is attached to the modified sugar via a linkage that is cleaved under selected conditions.
  • exemplary conditions include, but are not limited to, a selected pH (e.g., stomach, intestine, endocytotic vacuole), the presence of an active enzyme (e.g., esterase, reductase, oxidase), light, heat and the like.
  • an active enzyme e.g., esterase, reductase, oxidase
  • light heat and the like.
  • heat and the like cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al, Biochem.
  • Classes of useful therapeutic moieties include, for example, non-steroidal anti- inflammatory drugs (NSAIDS).
  • NSAIDS non-steroidal anti- inflammatory drugs
  • the NSAIDS can, for example, be selected from the following categories: (e.g., propionic acid derivatives, acetic acid derivatives, fenamic acid derivatives, biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives and oxicams); steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs including hydrocortisone and the like; antihistaminic drugs (e.g., chlorpheniramine, triprolidine); antitussive drugs (e.g., dextromethorphan, codeine, caramiphen and carbetapentane); antipruritic drugs (e.g., methdilazine and trimeprazine); anticholinergic drugs (e.g., scopolamine, atropine, homatropine, levodopa); anti-emetic and antinauseant drugs (e.g., cycli
  • vasodilator drugs e.g., diltiazem, amiodarone, isoxsuprine, nylidrin, tolazoline and verapamil
  • vasoconstrictor drugs e.g., dihydroergotamine, ergotamine and methylsergide
  • antiulcer drugs e.g., ranitidine and cimetidine
  • anesthetic drugs e.g., lidocaine, bupivacaine, chloroprocaine, dibucaine
  • antidepressant drugs e.g., imipramine, desipramine, amitryptiline, nortryptiline
  • tranquilizer and sedative drugs e.g., chlordiazepoxide, benacytyzine, benzquinamide, flurazepam, hydroxyzine, loxapine and promazine
  • antipsychotic drugs e.g., chlorprothixen
  • Antimicrobial drugs which are preferred for incorporation into the present composition include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of ⁇ -lactam drugs, quinolone drugs, ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin, tetracycline, erythromycin, amikacin, triclosan, doxycycline, capreomycin, chlorhexidine, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline, clindamycin, ethambutol, hexamidine isothionate, metronidazole, pentamidine, gentamycin, kanamycin, lineomycin, methacycline, methenamine, minocycline, neomycin, netilmycin, paromomycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, miconazole and amantadine.
  • antineoplastic drugs e.g., antiandrogens (e.g., leuprolide or flutamide), cytocidal agents (e.g., adriamycin, doxorubicin, taxol, cyclophosphamide, busulfan, cisplatin, ⁇ -2-interferon) anti-estrogens (e.g., tamoxifen), antimetabolites (e.g., fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopurine, thioguanine).
  • antiandrogens e.g., leuprolide or flutamide
  • cytocidal agents e.g., adriamycin, doxorubicin, taxol, cyclophosphamide, busulfan, cisplatin, ⁇ -2-interferon
  • anti-estrogens e.g., tamoxifen
  • antimetabolites e.g., fluor
  • radioisotope-based agents for both diagnosis and therapy, and conjugated toxins, such as ricin, geldanamycin, mytansin, CC- 1065, the duocarmycins, Chlicheamycin and related structures and analogues thereof.
  • the therapeutic moiety can also be a hormone (e.g., medroxyprogesterone, estradiol, leuprolide, megestrol, octreotide or somatostatin); muscle relaxant drugs (e.g., cinnamedrine, cyclobenzaprine, flavoxate, orphenadrine, papaverine, mebeverine, idaverine, ritodrine, diphenoxylate, dantrolene and azumolen); antispasmodic drugs; bone-active drugs (e.g., diphosphonate and phosphonoalkylphosphinate drug compounds); endocrine modulating drugs (e.g., contraceptives (e.g., ethinodiol, ethinyl estradiol, norethindrone, mestranol, desogestrel, medroxyprogesterone), modulators of diabetes (e.g., glycerin,
  • estrogens e.g., diethylstilbesterol
  • glucocorticoids e.g., triamcinolone, betamethasone, etc.
  • progestogens such as norethindrone, ethynodiol, norethindrone, levonorgestrel
  • thyroid agents e.g., liothyronine or levothyroxine
  • anti-thyroid agents e.g., methimazole
  • antihyperprolactinemic drugs e.g., cabergoline
  • hormone suppressors e.g., danazol or goserelin
  • oxytocics e.g., methylergonovine or oxytocin
  • prostaglandins such as mioprostol, alprostadil or dinoprostone
  • Other useful modifying groups include immunomodulating drugs (e.g., antihistamines, mast cell stabilizers, such as lodoxamide and/or cromolyn, steroids (e.g., triamcinolone, beclomethazone, cortisone, dexamethasone, prednisolone, methylprednisolone, beclomethasone, or clobetasol), histamine H2 antagonists (e.g., famotidine, cimetidine, ranitidine), immunosuppressants (e.g., azathioprine, cyclosporin), etc.
  • immunomodulating drugs e.g., antihistamines, mast cell stabilizers, such as lodoxamide and/or cromolyn
  • steroids e.g., triamcinolone, beclomethazone, cortisone, dexamethasone, prednisolone, methylprednisolone, beclomethasone, or clobe
  • the sugar moiety and the modifying group are linked together through the use of reactive groups, which are typically transformed by the linking process into a new organic functional group or species that is unreactive under physiologically relevant conditions.
  • the sugar reactive functional group(s) is located at any position on the sugar moiety.
  • Reactive groups and classes of reactions useful in practicing the present invention are generally those that are well known in the art of bioconjugate chemistry. Currently favored classes of reactions available with reactive sugar moieties are those, which proceed under relatively mild conditions.
  • nucleophilic substitutions e.g., reactions of amines and alcohols with acyl halides, active esters
  • electrophilic substitutions e.g., enamine reactions
  • additions to carbon-carbon and carbon-heteroatom multiple bonds e.g., Michael reaction, Diels- Alder addition.
  • Useful reactive functional groups pendent from a sugar nucleus or modifying group include, but are not limited to: (a) carboxyl groups and various derivatives thereof including, but not limited to,
  • N-hydroxysuccinimide esters N-hydroxybenztriazole esters, acid halides, acyl imidazoles, thioesters, p-nitrophenyl esters, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and aromatic esters;
  • hydroxyl groups which can be converted to, e.g., esters, ethers, aldehydes, etc.
  • haloalkyl groups wherein the halide can be later displaced with a nucleophilic group such as, for example, an amine, a carboxylate anion, thiol anion, carbanion, or an alkoxide ion, thereby resulting in the covalent attachment of a new group at the functional group ofthe halogen atom;
  • dienophile groups which are capable of participating in Diels- Alder reactions such as, for example, maleimido groups;
  • amine or sulfhydryl groups which can be, for example, acylated, alkylated or oxidized;
  • alkenes which can undergo, for example, cycloadditions, acylation, Michael addition, etc.
  • the reactive functional groups can be chosen such that they do not participate in, or interfere with, the reactions necessary to assemble the reactive sugar nucleus or modifying group.
  • a reactive functional group can be protected from participating in the reaction by the presence of a protecting group.
  • protecting groups see, for example, Greene et al, PROTECTIVE GROUPS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991.
  • sialic acid derivative is utilized as the sugar nucleus to which the modifying group is attached.
  • the focus ofthe discussion on sialic acid derivatives is for clarity of illustration only and should not be construed to limit the scope ofthe invention.
  • Those of skill in the art will appreciate that a variety of other sugar moieties can be activated and derivatized in a manner analogous to that set forth using sialic acid as an example.
  • the peptide that is modified by a method ofthe invention is a glycopeptide that is produced in prokaryotic cells (e.g., E.coli), eukaryotic cells lricludmg'yeast-an ⁇ t rhamfna'lilan-eeH's (e.g., CHO cells), or in a transgenic animal and thus, contains N- and/or O-linked oligosaccharide chains, which are incompletely sialylated.
  • the oligosaccharide chains ofthe glycopeptide lacking a sialic acid and containing a terminal galactose residue can be PEG-ylated, PPG-ylated or otherwise modified with a modified sialic acid.
  • Exemplary PEG-sialic acid derivative include:
  • L is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl linker moiety joining the sialic acid moiety and the PEG moiety, and "n" is 1 or greater;
  • index "s" represents an integer from 0 to 20, and "n" is 1 or greater.
  • the amino glycoside 1 is treated with the active ester of a protected amino acid (e.g., glycine) derivative, converting the sugar amine residue into the corresponding protected amino acid amide adduct.
  • the adduct is treated with an aldolase to form ⁇ -hydroxy carboxylate 2.
  • Compound 2 is converted to the corresponding CMP derivative by the action of CMP-SA synthetase, followed by catalytic hydrogenation ofthe CMP derivative to produce compound 3.
  • the amine introduced via formation ofthe glycine adduct is utilized as a locus of PEG attachment by reacting compound 3 with an activated PEG or PPG derivative (e.g., PEG-C(O)NHS, PEG-OC(O)O-p-nitrophenyl), producing species such as 4 or 5, respectively.
  • an activated PEG or PPG derivative e.g., PEG-C(O)NHS, PEG-OC(O)O-p-nitrophenyl
  • Table 1 sets forth representative examples of sugar monophosphates that are derivatized with a PEG or PPG moiety.
  • Human growth hormone mutants can be modified by the method of Scheme 1.
  • Other derivatives are prepared by art-recognized methods. See, for example, Keppler et al, Glycobiology 11: 11R (2001); and Charter et al., Glycobiology 10: 1049 (2000)).
  • Other amine reactive PEG and PPG analogues are commercially available, or they can be prepared by methods readily accessible to those of skill in the art.
  • modified sugar phosphates of use in practicing the present invention can be substituted in other positions as well as those set forth above.
  • Presently preferred substitutions of sialic acid are set forth in Formula I:
  • X is a linking group, which is preferably selected from -O-, -N(H)-, -S, CH 2 -, and - N(R) 2 , in which each R is a member independently selected from R'-R 5 .
  • the symbols Y, Z, A and B each represent a group that is selected from the group set forth above for the identity of X.
  • X, Y, Z, A and B are each independently selected and, therefore, they can be the same or di ' fferdhf. K » , s ;
  • R 4 and R 5 represent H, a water-soluble polymer, therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or other moiety.
  • moieties attached to the conjugates disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, PEG derivatives (e.g., alkyl-PEG, acyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, alkyl-acyl-PEG carbamoyl-PEG, aryl-PEG), PPG derivatives (e.g., alkyl-PPG, acyl-PPG, acyl-alkyl-PPG, alkyl-acyl-PPG carbamoyl-PPG, aryl-PPG), therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, mannose-6-phosphate, heparin, heparan, SLe x , mannose, mannose-6-phosphate, Sialyl Lewis X, FGF, NFGF, proteins, chondroitin, keratan, dermatan, albumin
  • Preparation ofthe modified sugar for use in the methods ofthe present invention includes attachment of a modifying group to a sugar residue and forming a stable adduct, which is a substrate for a glycosyltransferase.
  • the sugar and modifying group can be coupled by a zero- or higher-order cross-linking agent.
  • Exemplary bifunctional compounds which can be used for attaching modifying groups to carbohydrate moieties include, but are not limited to, bifunctional poly(ethyleneglycols), polyamides, polyethers, polyesters and the like. General approaches for linking carbohydrates to other molecules are known in the literature. See, for example, Lee et al, Biochemistry 28: 1856 (1989); Bhatia et al, Anal. Biochem.
  • SPDP detrimentally affects the ability ofthe modified sugar to act as a glycosyltransferase substrate
  • one of an array of other crosslinkers such as 2-iminothiolane or N-succinimidyl S-acetylthioacetate (SAT A) is used to form a disulfide bond.
  • 2- iminothiolane reacts with primary amines, instantly incorporating an unprotected sulfhydryl onto the amine-containing molecule.
  • SATA also reacts with primary amines, but incorporates a protected sulfhydryl, which is later deacetaylated using hydroxylamine to produce a free sulfhydryl. In each case, the incorporated sulfhydryl is free to react with other sulfhydryls or protected sulfhydryl, like SPDP, forming the required disulfide bond.
  • TPCH(S-(2-thiopyridyl)-L- cysteine hydrazide and TPMPH (S-(2-thiopyridyl) mercapto-propionohydrazide) react with carbohydrate moieties that have been previously oxidized by mild periodate treatment, thus forming a hydrazone bond between the hydrazide portion ofthe crosslinker and the periodate generated aldehydes.
  • TPCH and TPMPH introduce a 2-pyridylthione protected sulfhydryl group onto the sugar, which can be deprotected with DTT and then subsequently used for conjugation, such as forming disulfide bonds between components.
  • crosslinkers may be used that incorporate more stable bonds between components.
  • the heterobifunctional crosslinkers GMBS (N-gama-malimidobutyryloxy)succinim ' ide) and SMCC (succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimido-methyl)cyclohexane) react with primary amines, thus introducing a maleimide group onto the component.
  • the maleimide group can subsequently react with sulfhydryls on the other component, which can be introduced by previously mentioned crosslinkers, thus forming a stable thioether bond between the components.
  • crosslinkers can be used which introduce long spacer arms between components and include derivatives of some ofthe previously mentioned crosslinkers (i.e., SPDP).
  • SPDP some ofthe previously mentioned crosslinkers
  • a variety of reagents are used to modify the components ofthe modified sugar with intramolecular chemical crosslinks (for reviews of crosslinking reagents and crosslinking procedures see: Wold, F., Meth. Enzymol. 25: 623-651, 1972; Weetall, H. H., and Cooney, D. A., In: ENZYMES AS DRUGS. (Holcenberg, and Roberts, eds.) pp. 395-442, Wiley, New York, 1981; Ji, T. H., Meth. Enzymol. 91: 580-609, 1983; Mattson et al, Mol Biol. Rep. 17: 167- 183, 1993, all of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • Preferred crosslinking reagents are derived from various zero-length, homo-bifunctional, and hetero-bifunctional crosslinking reagents.
  • Zero-length crosslinking reagents include direct conjugation of two intrinsic chemical groups with no introduction of extrinsic material. Agents that catalyze formation of a disulfide bond belong to this category.
  • Another example is reagents that induce condensation of a carboxyl and a primary amino group to form an amide bond such as carbodiimides, ethylchloroformate, Woodward's reagent K (2-ethyl-5-phenylisoxazolium-3'- sulfonate), and carbonyldiimidazole.
  • transglutaminase (glutamyl-peptide ⁇ -glutamyltransferase; EC 2.3.2.13) may be used as zero- length crosslinking reagent.
  • This enzyme catalyzes acyl transfer reactions at carboxamide groups of protein-bound glutaminyl residues, usually with a primary amino group as substrate.
  • Preferred homo- and hetero-bifunctional reagents contain two identical or two dissimilar sites, respectively, which may be reactive for amino, sulfhydryl, guanidino, indole, or nonspecific groups.
  • the sites on the cross-linker are amino-reactive groups.
  • amino-reactive groups include carbonate esters, N- hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) esters, imidoesters, isocyanates, acylhalides, arylazides, p- nitrophenyl esters, aldehydes, and sulfonyl chlorides.
  • NHS esters react preferentially with the primary (including aromatic) amino groups of a modified sugar component.
  • the imidazole groups of histidines are known to compete with primary amines for reaction, but the reaction products are unstable and readily hydro lyzed.
  • the reaction involves the nucleophilic attack of an amine on the acid carboxyl of an NHS ester to form an amide, releasing the N-hydroxysuccinimide. Thus, the positive charge ofthe original amino group is lost.
  • [0239-]" •' "I ⁇ i ⁇ ab'eStbfs'ar ' e the ' m'o'st'specific acylating reagents for reaction with the amine groups ofthe modified sugar components.
  • imidoesters react only with primary amines.
  • Primary amines attack imidates nucleophilically to produce an intermediate that breaks down to amidine at high pH or to a new imidate at low pH.
  • the new imidate can react with another primary amine, thus crosslinking two amino groups, a case of a putatively monofunctional imidate reacting bifunctionally.
  • the principal product of reaction with primary amines is an amidine that is a stronger base than the original amine. The positive charge ofthe original amino group is therefore retained.
  • Isocyanates (and isothiocyanates) react with the primary amines ofthe modified sugar components to form stable bonds. Their reactions with sulfhydryl, imidazole, and tyrosyl groups give relatively unstable products.
  • Acylazides are also used as amino-specific reagents in which nucleophilic amines of the affinity component attack acidic carboxyl groups under slightly alkaline conditions, e.g. pH 8.5.
  • Arylhalides such as l,5-difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene react preferentially with the amino groups and tyrosine phenolic groups of modified sugar components, but also with sulfhydryl and imidazole groups.
  • p-Nitrophenyl esters of mono- and dicarboxylic acids are also useful amino-reactive groups. Although the reagent specificity is not very high, ⁇ - and ⁇ -amino groups appear to react most rapidly.
  • Aldehydes such as glutaraldehyde react with primary amines of modified sugar.
  • unstable Schiff bases are formed upon reaction ofthe amino groups with the aldehydes ofthe aldehydes, glutaraldehyde is capable of modifying the modified sugar with stable crosslinks.
  • the cyclic polymers undergo a dehydration to form ⁇ - ⁇ unsaturated aldehyde polymers.
  • Schiff bases are stable, when conjugated to another double bond. The resonant interaction of both double bonds prevents hydrolysis ofthe Schiff linkage.
  • amines at high local concentrations can attack the ethylenic double bond to form a stable Michael addition product.
  • Aromatic sulfonyl chlorides react with a variety of sites ofthe modified sugar components, but reaction with the amino groups is the most important, resulting in a stable sulfonamide linkage.
  • the sites are sulfhydryl-reactive groups.
  • Useful, non-limiting examples of sulfhydryl-reactive groups include maleimides, alkyl halides, pyridyl disulfides, and thiophthalimides.
  • Maleimides react preferentially with the sulfhydryl group ofthe modified sugar components to form stable thioether bonds. They also react at a much slower rate with primary amino groups and the imidazole groups of histidines.
  • the maleimide group can be considered a sulfhydryl-specific group, since at this pH the reaction rate of simple thiols is 1000-fold greater than that ofthe corresponding amine.
  • Alkyl halides react with sulfhydryl groups, sulfides, imidazoles, and amino groups. At neutral to slightly alkaline pH, however, alkyl halides react primarily with sulfhydryl groups to form stable thioether bonds. At higher pH, reaction with amino groups is favored.
  • Carboxyl-Reactive Residue [0251]
  • carbodiimides soluble in both water and organic solvent are used as carboxyl-reactive reagents. These compounds react with free carboxyl groups forming a pseudourea that can then couple to available amines yielding an amide linkage teach how to modify a carboxyl group with carbodiimde (Yamada et al, Biochemistry 20: 4836-4842, 1981).
  • the present invention contemplates the use of non-specific reactive groups to link the sugar to the modifying group.
  • Exemplary non-specific cross-linkers include photoactivatable groups, completely inert in the dark, which are converted to reactive species upon absorption of a photon of appropriate energy.
  • Electron-deficient arylnitrenes rapidly ring- expand to form dehydroazepines, which tend to react with nucleophiles, rather than form C-H miseittiom prdkJirots,!' "li'ae v&el ⁇ Wl ⁇ of 'arylazides can be increased by the presence of electron- withdrawing substituents such as nitro or hydroxyl groups in the ring. Such substituents push the abso ⁇ tion maximum of arylazides to longer wavelength.
  • Unsubstituted arylazides have an absorption maximum in the range of 260-280 nm, while hydroxy and nitroarylazides absorb significant light beyond 305 nm. Therefore, hydroxy and nitroarylazides are most preferable since they allow to employ less harmful photolysis conditions for the affinity component than unsubstituted arylazides.
  • photoactivatable groups are selected from fluorinated arylazides.
  • the photolysis products of fluorinated arylazides are arylnitrenes, all of which undergo the characteristic reactions of this group, including C-H bond insertion, with high efficiency (Keana et al, J. Org. Chem. 55: 3640-3647, 1990).
  • photoactivatable groups are selected from benzophenone residues. Benzophenone reagents generally give higher crosslinking yields than arylazide reagents.
  • photoactivatable groups are selected from diazo compounds, which form an electron-deficient carbene upon photolysis. These carbenes undergo a variety of reactions including insertion into C-H bonds, addition to double bonds (including aromatic systems), hydrogen attraction and coordination to nucleophilic centers to give carbon ions.
  • photoactivatable groups are selected from diazopyruvates.
  • the p-nitrophenyl ester of p-nitrophenyl diazopyruvate reacts with aliphatic amines to give diazopyruvic acid amides that undergo ultraviolet photolysis to form aldehydes.
  • the photolyzed diazopyruvate-modif ⁇ ed affinity component will react like formaldehyde or glutaraldehyde forming crosslinks.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional NHS esters include disuccinimidyl glutarate (DSG), disuccinimidyl suberate (DSS), bis(sulfosuccinimidyl) suberate (BS), disuccinimidyl tartarate (DST), disulfosuccinimidyl tartarate (sulfo-DST), bis- carbonyloxy)ethylsulfone (sulfo-BSOCOES), ethylene glycolbis(succinimidylsuccinate) (EGS), ethylene glycolbis(sulfosuccinimidylsuccinate) (sulfo-EGS), dithiobis(succinimidyl- propionate (DSP), and dithiobis(sulfosuccinimidylpropionate (sulfo-DSP).
  • DSG disuccinimidyl glutarate
  • DST bis(sulfosuccin
  • homobifunctional imidoesters include dimethyl malonimidate (DMM), dimethyl succinimidate (DMSC), dimethyl adipimidate (DMA), dimethyl pimelimidate (DMP), dimethyl suberimidate (DMS), dimethyl-3,3'-oxydipropionimidate (DODP), dimethyl-3 ,3 '-(methylenedioxy)dipropionimidate (DMDP), dimethyl-,3 '- (dimethyl enedioxy)dipropionimidate (DDDP), dimethyl-3 ,3 '-(tetramethylenedioxy)- dipropionimidate (DTDP), and dimethyl-3 ,3'-dithiobispropionimidate (DTBP).
  • DM malonimidate
  • DMSC dimethyl succinimidate
  • DMA dimethyl adipimidate
  • DMP dimethyl pimelimidate
  • DMS dimethyl suberimidate
  • DODP dimethyl-3,3'-oxydipropionimidate
  • DMDP
  • homobifunctional isothiocyanates include: p- phenylenediisothiocyanate (DITC), and 4,4'-diisothiocyano-2,2'-disulfonic acid stilbene (DIDS).
  • DITC p- phenylenediisothiocyanate
  • DIDS 4,4'-diisothiocyano-2,2'-disulfonic acid stilbene
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional isocyanates include xylene- diisocyanate, toluene-2,4-diisocyanate, toluene-2-isocyanate-4-isothiocyanate, 3- methoxydiphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 2,2'-dicarboxy-4,4'-azophenyldiisocyanate, and hexamethylenediisocyanate.
  • homobifunctional arylhalides include 1,5- difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene (DFDNB), and 4,4'-difluoro-3,3'-dinitrophenyl-sulfone.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional aliphatic aldehyde reagents include glyoxal, malondialdehyde, and glutaraldehyde.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional acylating reagents include nitrophenyl esters of dicarboxylic acids.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional aromatic sulfonyl chlorides include phenol-2,4-disulfonyl chloride, and ⁇ -naphthol-2,4-disulfonyl chloride.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of additional amino-reactive homobifunctional reagents include erythritolbiscarbonate which reacts with amines to give biscarbamates.
  • homobifunctional maleimides include bismaleimidohexane (BMH), N,N'-(l,3-phenylene) bismaleimide, N,N'-(1,2- phenylene)bismaleimide, azophenyldimaleimide, and bis(N-maleimidomethyl)ether.
  • Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional pyridyl disulfides include l,4-di-3'-(2'-pyridyldithio)propionamidobutane (DPDPB).
  • Preferred, non- limiting examples of homobifunctional alkyl halides include 2,2'- dicarboxy-4,4'-diiodoacetamidoazobenzene, ⁇ , ⁇ '-diiodo-p-xylenesulfonic acid, ⁇ , ⁇ '-dibromo- p-xylenesulfonic acid, N,N'-bis(b-bromoethyl)benzylamine, N,N'- di(bromoacetyl)phenylthydrazine, and 1 ,2-di(bromoacetyl)amino-3 -phenylpropane.
  • homobifunctional photoactivatable crosslinker examples include bis- ⁇ -(4-azidosalicylamido)ethyldisulfide (BASED), di-N-(2-nitro-4-azidophenyl)- cystamine-S,S-dioxide (DNCO), and 4,4'-dithiobisphenylazide.
  • hetero-bifunctional reagents with a pyridyl disulfide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include N-succinimidyl-3-(2- pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP), succinimidyl 6-3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionamidohexanoate (LC-SPDP), sulfosuccinimidyl 6-3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionamidohexanoate (sulfo- LCSPDP), 4-succinimidyloxycarbonyl- ⁇ -methyl- ⁇ -(2-pyridyldithio)toluene (SMPT), and sulfosuccinimidyl 6- ⁇ -methyl- ⁇ -(2-pyridyldithio)toluamidohexanoate (sulfo-LC-SMPT).
  • SPDP N-succinimid
  • hetero-bifunctional reagents with a maleimide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include succinimidyl maleimidylacetate (AMAS), succinimidyl 3-maleimidylpropionate (BMPS), N- ⁇ -maleimidobutyryloxysuccinimide ester (GMBS)N- ⁇ -maleimidobutyryloxysulfo succinimide ester (sulfo-GMBS) succinimidyl 6- maleimidylhexanoate (EMCS), succinimidyl 3-maleimidylbenzoate (SMB), m- maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), m-maleimidobenzoyl-N-
  • hetero-bifunctional reagents with an alkyl halide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include N-succinimidyl-(4- iodoacetyl)aminobenzoate (SIAB), sulfosuccinimidyl-(4-iodoacetyl)aminobenzoate (sulfo- SIAB), succinimidyl-6-(iodoacetyl)aminohexanoate (SIAX), succinimidyl-6-(6-((iodoacetyl)- amino)hexanoylamino)hexanoate (SIAXX), succinimidyl-6-(((4-(iodoacetyl)-a
  • a preferred example of a hetero-bifunctional reagent with an amino-reactive NHS ester and an alkyl dihalide moiety is N-hydroxysuccinimidyl 2,3-dibromopropionate (SDBP). SDBP introduces intramolecular crosslinks to the affinity component by conjugating its amino groups. The reactivity ofthe dibromopropionyl moiety towards primary amine groups is controlled by the reaction temperature (McKenzie et al, Protein Chem. 7: 581-592 (1988)).
  • hetero-bifunctional reagents with an alkyl halide moiety and an amino-reactive p-nitrophenyl ester moiety include p-nitrophenyl iodoacetate (NPIA).
  • NPIA p-nitrophenyl iodoacetate
  • the linker group is provided with a group that can be cleaved to release the modifying group from the sugar residue.
  • Many cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al, Biochem. Biophys. Ada 761: 152-162 (1983); Joshi et al, J. Biol. Chem. 265: 14518-14525 (1990); Zarling et al, J. Immunol 124: 913-920 (1980); Bouizar et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 155: 141-147 (1986); Park et al, J. Biol. Chem.
  • Exemplary cleaveable moieties can be cleaved using light, heat or reagents such as thiols, hydroxylamine, bases, periodate and the like. Moreover, certain preferred groups are cleaved in vivo in response to being endocytized (e.g., cis-aconityl; see, Shen et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 102: 1048 (1991)). Preferred cleaveable groups comprise a cleaveable moiety which is a member selected from the group consisting of disulfide, ester, imide, carbonate, nitrobenzyl, phenacyl and benzoin groups.
  • the modified sugars are conjugated to a glycosylated or non-glycosylated peptide using an appropriate enzyme to mediate the conjugation.
  • concentrations of the modified donor sugar(s), enzyme(s) and acceptor peptide(s) are selected such that glycosylation proceeds until the acceptor is consumed.
  • glycosyltransferases A number of methods of using glycosyltransferases to synthesize desired oligosaccharide structures are known and are generally applicable to the instant invention. Exemplary methods are described, for instance, WO 96/32491, Ito et al, Pure Appl. Chem. 65: 753 (1993), and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,352,670, 5,374,541, and 5,545,553. [0283] The present invention is practiced using a single glycosyltransferase or a combination of glycosyltransferases.
  • e enzymes ana substrates are preferably combined in an initial reaction mixture, or the enzymes and reagents for a second enzymatic reaction are added to the reaction medium once the first enzymatic reaction is complete or nearly complete.
  • each ofthe first and second enzyme is a glycosyltransferase.
  • one enzyme is an endoglycosidase.
  • more than two enzymes are used to assemble the modified glycoprotein ofthe invention. The enzymes are used to alter a saccharide structure on the peptide at any point either before or after the addition ofthe modified sugar to the peptide.
  • the method makes use of one or more exo- or endoglycosidase.
  • the glycosidase is typically a mutant, which is engineered to form glycosyl bonds rather than cleave them.
  • the mutant glycanase typically includes a substitution of an amino acid residue for an active site acidic amino acid residue.
  • the substituted active site residues will typically be Asp at position 130, Glu at position 132 or a combination thereof.
  • the amino acids are generally replaced with serine, alanine, asparagine, or glutamine.
  • the mutant enzyme catalyzes the reaction, usually by a synthesis step that is analogous to the reverse reaction ofthe endoglycanase hydrolysis step.
  • the glycosyl donor molecule e.g., a desired oligo- or mono-saccharide structure
  • the leaving group can be a halogen, such as fluoride.
  • the leaving group is a Asn, or a Asn- peptide moiety.
  • the GlcNAc residue on the glycosyl donor molecule is modified.
  • the GlcNAc residue may comprise a 1,2 oxazoline moiety.
  • each ofthe enzymes utilized to produce a conjugate of the invention are present in a catalytic amount.
  • the catalytic amount of a particular enzyme varies according to the concentration of that enzyme's substrate as well as to reaction conditions- ⁇ uc>l
  • the temperature at which an above process is carried out can range from just above freezing to the temperature at which the most sensitive enzyme denatures. Preferred temperature ranges are about 0 °C to about 55 °C, and more preferably about 20 ° C to about 30 °C. In another exemplary embodiment, one or more components ofthe present method are conducted at an elevated temperature using a thermophilic enzyme. ⁇
  • the reaction mixture is maintained for a period of time sufficient for the acceptor to , be glycosylated, thereby forming the desired conjugate. Some ofthe conjugate can often be detected after a few hours, with recoverable amounts usually being obtained within 24 hours or less.
  • rate of reaction is dependent on a number of variable factors (e.g, enzyme concentration, donor concentration, acceptor concentration, temperature, solvent volume), which are optimized for a selected system.
  • the present invention also provides for the industrial-scale production of modified peptides.
  • an industrial scale generally produces at least about 250 mg, preferably at least about 500 mg, and more preferably at least about 1 gram of finished, purified conjugate, preferably after a single reaction cycle, i.e., the conjugate is not a combination the reaction products from identical, consecutively iterated synthesis cycles.
  • the invention is exemplified by the conjugation of modified sialic acid moieties to a glycosylated peptide.
  • the exemplary modified sialic acid is labeled with m-PEG.
  • An enzymatic approach can be used for the selective introduction of m-PEG-ylated or m-PPG-ylated carbohydrates onto a peptide or glycopeptide.
  • the method utilizes modified sugars containing PEG, PPG, or a masked reactive functional group, and is combined with the appropriate glycosyltransferase or glycosynthase.
  • the PEG or PPG can be introduced directly onto the peptide backbone, onto existing sugar residues of a glycopeptide or onto sugar residues that have been added to a peptide.
  • acceptor for the sialyltransferase is present on the peptide to be modified by the methods ofthe present invention either as a naturally occurring structure or one placed there recombinantly, enzymatically or chemically.
  • Suitable acceptors include, for example, galactosyl acceptors such as Gal ⁇ l,4GlcNAc, Gal ⁇ l,4GalNAc, Gal ⁇ 1,3 GalNAc, lacto-N- tetraose, Gal ⁇ 1,3 GlcNAc, GalNAc, Gal ⁇ 1,3 GalNAc, Gal ⁇ l,6GlcNAc, Gal ⁇ l,4Glc (lactose), and other acceptors known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Paulson et al, J. Biol. Chem. 253: 5617-5624 (1978)).
  • an acceptor for the sialyltransferase is present on the glycopeptide to be modified upon in vivo synthesis ofthe glycopeptide.
  • Such glycopeptides can be sialylated using the claimed methods without prior modification ofthe glycosylation pattern ofthe glycopeptide.
  • the methods ofthe invention can be used to sialylate a peptide that does not include a suitable acceptor; one first modifies the peptide to include an acceptor by methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • a GalNAc residue is added by the action of a GalNAc transferase.
  • the galactosyl acceptor is assembled by attaching a galactose residue to an appropriate acceptor linked to the peptide, e.g., a GalNAc.
  • the method includes incubating the peptide to be modified with a reaction mixture that contains a suitable amount of a galactosyltransferase (e.g., Gal ⁇ 1,3 or Gal ⁇ 1,4), and a suitable galactosyl donor (e.g., UDP-galactose).
  • a galactosyltransferase e.g., Gal ⁇ 1,3 or Gal ⁇ 1,4
  • a suitable galactosyl donor e.g., UDP-galactose
  • glycopeptide-linked oligosaccharides are first "trimmed," either in whole or in part, to expose either an acceptor for the sialyltransferase or a moiety to which one or more appropriate residues can be added to obtain a suitable , acceptor.
  • Enzymes such as glycosyltransferases and endoglycosidases (see, for example U.S. Patent No. 5,716,812) are useful for the attaching and trimming reactions.
  • an O-linked carbohydrate residue is "trimmed" prior to the addition ofthe modified sugar.
  • a GalNAc-Gal residue is trimmed back to GalNAc.
  • a modified sugar bearing a water-soluble polymer is conjugated to one or more of the sugar residues exposed by the "trimming.”
  • a glycopeptide is "trimmed” and a water-soluble polymer is added to the resulting O-side chain amino acid or glycopeptide glycan via a saccharyl moiety, e.g., Sia, Gal, or GalNAc moiety conjugated to the water-soluble polymer.
  • the modified saccharyl moiety is attached to an acceptor site on the "trimmed" glycopeptide.
  • an unmodified saccharyl moiety e.g., Gal can be added the terminus ofthe O-linked glycan.
  • a water-soluble polymer is added to a GalNAc residue via a modified sugar having a galactose residue.
  • an unmodified Gal can be added to the terminal GalNAc residue.
  • a water-soluble polymer is added onto a Gal residue using a modified sialic acid.
  • an O-linked glycosyl residue is "trimmed back" to the GalNAc attached to the amino acid.
  • a water-soluble polymer is added via a Gal modified with the polymer.
  • an unmodified Gal is added to the GalNAc, followed by a Gal with an attached water-soluble polymer.
  • one or more unmodified Gal residue is added to the GalNAc, followed by a sialic acid moiety modified with a water-soluble polymer.
  • the modified sugar can be added to the termini ofthe carbohydrate moiety as set forth above, or it can be intermediate between the peptide core and the terminus ofthe carbohydrate.
  • the water-soluble polymer is added to a terminal Gal residue using a polymer modified sialic acid.
  • An appropriate sialyltransferase is used to add a modified sialic acid. The approach is summarized in Scheme 5.
  • a masked reactive functionality is present on the sialic acid.
  • the masked reactive group is preferably unaffected by the conditions used to attach the modified sialic acid to the peptide.
  • the mask is removed and the peptide is conjugated with an agent such as PEG, PPG, a therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or other agent.
  • the agent is conjugated to the peptide in a specific manner by its reaction with the unmasked reactive group on the modified sugar residue.
  • Any modified sugar can be used with its appropriate glycosyltransferase, depending on the terminal sugars ofthe oligosaccharide side chains ofthe glycopeptide (Table 2).
  • the terminal sugar ofthe glycopeptide required for introduction ofthe PEG- ylated or PPG-ylated structure can be introduced naturally during expression or it can be produced post expression using the appropriate glycosidase(s), glycosyltransferase(s) or mix of glycosidase(s) and glycosyltransferase(s).
  • Ligand of interest acyl-PEG, acyl-PPG, alkyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, carbamoyl-PEG, carbamoyl-PPG, PEG, PPG,
  • Q H 2 , O, S, NH, N-R. acyl-aryl-PEG, acyl-aryl-PPG, aryl-PEG, aryl-PPG, Mannose-g-phosphate, heparin, heparan, SLex, Mannose, FGF, VFGF,
  • R, R H, Linker-M, M. protein, chondroitin, keratan, dermatan, albumin, integrins, peptides, etc.
  • M Ligand of interest ⁇ ⁇ f .• • lft.'a' ' ⁇ rth' .'ex ⁇ lSry»i bodiment, UDP-galactose-PEG is reacted with bovine milk ⁇ l,4-galactosyltransferase, thereby transferring the modified galactose to the appropriate terminal N-acetylglucosamine structure.
  • the terminal GlcNAc residues on the glycopeptide may be produced during expression, as may occur in such expression systems as mammalian, insect, plant or fungus, but also can be produced by treating the glycopeptide with a sialidase and/or glycosidase and/or glycosyltransferase, as required.
  • a GlcNAc transferase such as GNT1-5, is utilized to transfer PEGylated-GlcN to a terminal mannose residue on a glycopeptide.
  • an the N- and/or O-linked glycan structures are enzymatically removed from a glycopeptide to expose an amino acid or a terminal glycosyl residue that is subsequently conjugated with the modified sugar.
  • an endoglycanase is used to remove the N-linked structures of a glycopeptide to expose a terminal GlcNAc as a GlcNAc-linked-Asn on the glycopeptide.
  • UDP-Gal-PEG and the appropriate galactosyltransferase is used to introduce the PEG- or PPG-galactose functionality onto the exposed GlcNAc.
  • the modified sugar is added directly to the peptide backbone using a glycosyltransferase known to transfer sugar residues to the peptide backbone.
  • a glycosyltransferase known to transfer sugar residues to the peptide backbone.
  • This exemplary embodiment is set forth in Scheme 7.
  • Exemplary glycosyltransferases useful in practicing the present invention include, but are not limited to, GalNAc transferases (GalNAc Tl-20), GlcNAc transferases, fucosyltransferases, glucosyltransferases, xylosylrransferases, mannosyltransferases and the like. Use of this approach allows the direct addition of modified sugars onto peptides that lack any carbohydrates or, alternatively, onto existing glycopeptides.
  • the addition ofthe modified sugar occurs at specific positions on the peptide backbone as defined by the substrate specificity ofthe glycosyltransferase and not in a random manner as occurs during modification of a protein's peptide backbone using chemical methods.
  • An array of agents can be introduced into proteins or glycopeptides that lack the glycosyltransferase substrate peptide sequence by engineering the appropriate amino acid sequence into the polypeptide chain.
  • one or more additional chemical or enzymatic modification steps can be utilized following the conjugation ofthe modified sugar to the peptide.
  • an enzyme e.g., fucosyltransferase
  • a glycosyl unit e.g., fucose
  • an enzymatic reaction is utilized to "cap" (e.g., sialylate) sites to which the modified sugar failed to conjugate.
  • a chemical reaction is utilized to alter the structure ofthe conjugated modified sugar.
  • the conjugated modified sugar is reacted with agents that stabilize or destabilize its linkage with the peptide component to which the modified sugar is attached.
  • a component ofthe modified sugar is deprotected following its conjugation to the peptide.
  • Glycosyltransferases catalyze the addition of activated sugars (donor NDP-sugars), in a step- wise fashion, to a protein, glycopeptide, lipid or glycolipid or to the non-reducing end of a growing oligosaccharide.
  • N-linked glycopeptides are synthesized via a transferase and a lipid-linked oligosaccharide donor Dol-PP-NAG Glc 3 Man 9 in an en block transfer followed by trimming ofthe core. In this case the nature ofthe "core" saccharide is somewhat different from subsequent attachments.
  • a very large number of glycosyltransferases are known in the art.
  • glycosyltransferase to be used in the present invention may be any as long as it can utilize the modified sugar as a sugar donor.
  • examples of such enzymes include Leloir
  • N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase fucosyltransferase, sialyltransferase, mannosyltransferase, xylosyltransferase, glucurononyltransferase and the like.
  • glycosyltransferase For enzymatic saccharide syntheses that involve glycosyltransferase reactions, glycosyltransferase can be cloned, or isolated from any source. Many cloned glycosyltransferases are known, as are their polynucleotide sequences. See, e.g., "The WWW Guide To Cloned Glycosyltransferases," (http://www.vei.co.uk/TGN/gt guide.htm).
  • Glycosyltransferase amino acid sequences and nucleotide sequences encoding glycosyltransferases from which the amino acid sequences can be deduced are also found in various publicly available databases, including GenBank, Swiss-Prot, EMBL, and others.
  • Glycosyltransferases that can be employed in the methods ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, galactosyltransferases, fucosyltransferases, glucosyltransferases, N- acetylgalactosaminyltransferases, N-acetylglucosaminyltransferases, glucuronyltransferases, sialyltransferases, mannosyltransferases, glucuronic acid transferases, galacturonic acid transferases, and oligosaccharyltransferases.
  • Suitable glycosyltransferases include those obtained from eukaryotes, as well as from prokaryotes.
  • DNA encoding the enzyme glycosyltransferases may be obtained by chemical synthesis, by screening reverse transcripts of mRNA from appropriate cells or cell line cultures, by screening genomic libraries from appropriate cells, or by combinations of these procedures. Screening of mRNA or genomic DNA may be carried out with oligonucleotide probes generated from the glycosyltransferases gene sequence. Probes may be labeled with a detectable group such as a fluorescent group, a radioactive atom or a chemiluminescent group in accordance with known procedures and used in conventional hybridization assays.
  • a detectable group such as a fluorescent group, a radioactive atom or a chemiluminescent group in accordance with known procedures and used in conventional hybridization assays.
  • glycosyltransferases gene sequences may be obtained by use ofthe polymerase chain reaction (PCR) procedure, with the PCR oligonucleotide primers being produced from the glycosyltransferases gene sequence.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • the glycosyltransferases enzyme may be synthesized in host cells transformed with vectors containing DNA encoding the glycosyltransferases enzyme.
  • a vector is a replicable DNA construct. Nectors are used either to amplify D ⁇ A encoding the glycosyltransferases enzyme and/or to express D ⁇ A which encodes the glycosyltransferases enzyme.
  • An expression vector is a replicable D ⁇ A construct in which a D ⁇ A sequence encoding the ⁇ iycos ; yitra ⁇ Srer ⁇ 'es.enz riJte:: ⁇ S'''o ⁇ i@rably linked to suitable control sequences capable of effecting the expression ofthe glycosyltransferases enzyme in a suitable host.
  • suitable control sequences capable of effecting the expression ofthe glycosyltransferases enzyme in a suitable host.
  • control sequences include a transcriptional promoter, an optional operator sequence to control transcription, a sequence encoding suitable mRNA ribosomal binding sites, and sequences which control the termination of transcription and translation.
  • Amplification vectors do not require expression control domains. All that is needed is the ability to replicate in a host, usually conferred by an origin of replication, and a selection gene to facilitate recognition of transformants. Fucosyltransferases
  • a glycosyltransferase used in the method ofthe invention is a fucosyltransferase.
  • Fucosyltransferases are known to those of skill in the art.
  • Exemplary fuco.syltransferases include enzymes, which transfer L-fucose from GDP-fucose to a hydroxy position of an acceptor sugar.
  • Fucosyltransferases that transfer non-nucleotide sugars to an acceptor are also of use in the present invention.
  • the acceptor sugar is, for example, the GlcNAc in a Gal ⁇ (l— 3,4)GlcNAc ⁇ - group in an oligosaccharide glycoside.
  • Suitable fucosyltransferases for this reaction include the Gal ⁇ (l ⁇ 3,4)GlcNAc ⁇ l- ⁇ (l ⁇ 3,4)fucosyltransferase (FTIII E.G. No. 2.4.1.65), which was first characterized from human milk (see, Palcic, et al, Carbohydrate Res. 190: 1-11 (1989); Prieels, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 256: 10456-10463 (1981); and Nunez, et al, Can. J. Chem.
  • FTNII a sialyl ⁇ (2-> ⁇ )Gal ⁇ ((l-»3)GlcNAc ⁇ fucosyltransferase
  • FTNIII a sialyl ⁇ (2-> ⁇ )Gal ⁇ ((l-»3)GlcNAc ⁇ fucosyltransferase
  • a recombinant form ofthe Gal ⁇ (l— »3,4) GlcNAc ⁇ - ⁇ (l- 3,4)fucosyltransferase has also been characterized (see, Dumas, et al, Bioorg. Med.
  • fucosyltransferases include, for example, ⁇ l,2 fucosyltransferase (E.C. No. 2.4.1.69). Enzymatic fucosylation can be carried out by the methods described in Mollicone, et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 191: 169-176 (1990) or U.S. Patent No. 5,374,655. Cells that are used to produce a fucosyltransferase will also include an enzymatic system for synthesizing GDP-fucose. C aBsylfa sflr kes ' ,'
  • the glycosyltransferase is a galactosyltransferase.
  • exemplary galactosyltransferases include ⁇ (l,3) galactosyltransferases (E.C. No. 2.4.1.151, see, e.g., Dabkowski et al, Transplant Proc. 25:2921 (1993) and Yamamoto et al Nature 345: 229-233 (1990), bovine (GenBank J04989, Joziasse et al, J. Biol. Chem. 264: 14290- 14297 (1989)), murine (GenBank m26925; Larsen et al, Proc. N t 7. Acad. Sci.
  • porcine GenBank L36152; Strahan et al, Immunogenetics 41: 101-105 (1995)
  • Another suitable ⁇ l,3 galactosyltransferase is that which is involved in synthesis of the blood group B antigen (EC 2.4.1.37, Yamamoto et al, J. Biol. Chem. 265: 1146-1151 (1990) (human)).
  • ⁇ (l,4) galactosyltransferases which include, for example, EC 2.4.1.90 (Lac ⁇ Ac synthetase) and EC 2.4.1.22 (lactose synthetase) (bovine (D'Agostaro et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 183: 211-217 (1989)), human (Masri et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 157: 657-663 (1988)), murine ( ⁇ akazawa et al, J. Biochem. 104: 165-168 (1988)), as well as E.C.
  • GalNAc Ti ⁇ v The production of proteins such as the enzyme GalNAc Ti ⁇ v from cloned genes by genetic engineering is well known. See, eg., U.S. Pat. No. 4,761,371.
  • One method involves collection of sufficient samples, then the amino acid sequence ofthe enzyme is determined by N-terminal sequencing. This information is then used to isolate a cDNA clone encoding a full-length (membrane bound) transferase which upon expression in the insect cell line Sf9 resulted in the synthesis of a fully active enzyme. The acceptor specificity ofthe enzyme is then determined using a semiquantitative analysis ofthe amino acids surrounding known glycosylation sites in 16 different proteins followed by in vitro glycosylation studies of synthetic peptides.
  • Sialyltransferases are another type of glycosyltransferase that is useful in the recombinant cells and reaction mixtures ofthe invention. Cells that produce recombinant sialyltransferases will also produce CMP-sialic acid, which is a sialic acid donor for sialyltransferases.
  • ST3Gal III e.g., a rat or human ST3Gal III
  • ST3Gal IN ST3Gal I, ST6Gal I, ST3Gal N, ST6Gal II, ST6Gal ⁇ Ac I, ST6GalNAc II, and ST6GalNAc III
  • ST3Gal III e.g., a rat or human ST3Gal III
  • ⁇ (2,3)sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.6) transfers sialic acid to the non-reducing terminal Gal of a Gal ⁇ l— 3Glc disaccharide or glycoside.
  • ⁇ (2,3)sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.6) transfers sialic acid to the non-reducing terminal Gal of a Gal ⁇ l— 3Glc disaccharide or glycoside.
  • Another exemplary ⁇ 2,3-sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.4) transfers sialic acid to the non-reducing terminal Gal ofthe disaccharide or glycoside. see, Rearick et al, J. Biol. Chem. 254: 4444 (1979) and Gillespie et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 21004 (1992).
  • Further exemplary enzymes include Gal- ⁇ -l,4-Glc ⁇ Ac ⁇ -2,6 sialyltransferase (See, Kurosawa et al. Eur. J. Biochem. 219: 375-381 (1994)).
  • the sialyltransferase will be able to transfer sialic acid to the sequence Gal ⁇ l,4GlcNAc-, the most common penultimate sequence underlying the terminal sialic acid on fully sialylated carbohydrate structures (see, Table 3).
  • ⁇ iaeBa'SUUSSWft ri.sc use the Gal ⁇ l,4GlcNAc sequence as an acceptor substrate
  • sialyltransferase that is useful in the claimed methods is ST3Gal III, which is also referred to as ⁇ (2,3)sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.6).
  • This enzyme catalyzes the transfer of sialic acid to the Gal of a Gal ⁇ 1,3 GlcNAc or Gal ⁇ l,4GlcNAc glycoside (see, e.g., Wen et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 21011 (1992); Van den Eijnden et al, J. Biol. Chem. 256: 3159 (1991)) and is responsible for sialylation of asparagine-linked oligosaccharides in glycopeptides.
  • the sialic acid is linked to a Gal with the formation of an ⁇ -linkage between the two saccharides. Bonding (linkage) between the saccharides is between the 2-position of NeuAc and the 3-position of Gal.
  • This particular enzyme can be isolated from rat liver
  • sialyltransferases of use in the present invention include those isolated from Campylobacter jejuni, including the ⁇ (2,3). See, e.g, WO99/49051.
  • Sialyltransferases other than those listed in Table 3, are also useful in an economic and efficient large-scale process for sialylation of commercially important glycopeptides.
  • various amounts of each enzyme with asialo- ⁇ i AGP at 1-10 mg/ml to compare the ability ofthe sialyltransferase of interest to sialylate glycopeptides relative to either bovine ST6Gal I, ST3Gal III or both sialyltransferases.
  • glycopeptides or glycopeptides, or N-linked oligosaccharides enzymatically released from the peptide backbone can be used in place of asialo-cti AGP for this evaluation.
  • Sialyltransferases with the ability to sialylate N-linked oligosaccharides of glycopeptides more efficiently than ST6Gal I are useful in a practical large-scale process for peptide sialylation (as illustrated for ST3Gal III in this disclosure).
  • glycosyltransferases can be substituted into similar transferase cycles as have been described in detail for the sialyltransferase.
  • the glycosyltransferase can also be, for instance, glucosyltransferases, e.g., Alg8 (Stagljov et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91: 5977 (1994)) or Alg5 (Heesen et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 224: 71 (1994)).
  • N-acetylgalactosaminylrransferases are also of use in practicing the present invention.
  • Suitable N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferases include, but are not limited to, ⁇ (l,3) N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase, ⁇ (l,4) N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferases (Nagata et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 12082-12089 (1992) and Smith et al, J. Biol Chem.
  • N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase Suitable N-acetylglucosaminyltransferases include GnTI (2.4.1.101, Hull et al, BBRC 176: 608 (1991)), GnTII, GnTIII (Ihara et al, J. Biochem. 113: 692 (1993)), GnTIV, and GnTV (Shoreiban et al, J. Biol. Chem.
  • Mannosyltransferases are of use to transfer modified mannose moieties. Suitable mannosyltransferases include ⁇ (l,2) mannosyltransferase, ⁇ (l,3) mannosyltransferase, ⁇ (l,6) mannosyltransferase, ⁇ (l,4) mannosyltransferase, Dol-P-Man synthase, OChl, and Pmtl (see, Kornfeld et al, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 54: 631-664 (1985)).
  • Xylosyl transferases are also useful in the present invention. See, for example, Rodgers, et al, Biochem.
  • Prokaryotic glycosyltransferases are also useful in practicing the invention.
  • Such glycosyltransferases include enzymes involved in synthesis of lipooligosaccharides (LOS), which are produced by many gram negative bacteria.
  • the LOS typically have terminal glycan sequences that mimic glycoconjugates found on the surface of human epithelial cells or in host secretions (Preston et al, Critical Reviews in Microbiology 23(3): 139-180 (1996)).
  • Such enzymes include, but are not limited to, the proteins ofthe rfa operons of species such as E.
  • Salmonella typhimurium which include a ⁇ l,6 galactosyltransferase and a ⁇ l,3 galactosyltransferase (see, e.g., EMBL Accession Nos. M80599 and M86935 (E. coli); ⁇ MBL Accession No. S56361 (S. typhimurium)), a glucosyltransferase (Swiss-Prot Accession No. P25740 (E. coli), an ⁇ l,2-glucosyltransferase (r/ ⁇ J)(Swiss-Prot Accession No. P27129 (E. coli) and Swiss-Prot Accession No.
  • glycosyltransferases for which amino acid sequences are known include those that are encoded by operons such as rfaB, which have been characterized in organisms such as Klebsiella pneumoniae, E. coli, Salmonella typhimurium, Salmonella enterica, Yersinia enter ocolitica, Mycobaderium leprosum, and the rhl operon of Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
  • glycosyltransferases that are involved in producing structures containing lacto-N-neotetraose, D-galactosyl- ⁇ -l,4-N- acetyl-D-glucosaminyl- ⁇ -l,3-D-galactosyl- ⁇ -l,4-D-glucose, and the P k blood group trisaccharide sequence, D-galactosyl- ⁇ -l,4-D-galactosyl- ⁇ -l,4-D-glucose, which have been identified in the LOS ofthe mucosal pathogens Neisseria gonnorhoeae and N.
  • N. meningitidis (Scholten et al, J. Med. Microbiol 41: 236-243 (1994)).
  • the genes from N. meningitidis and N. gonorrhoeae that encode the glycosyltransferases involved in the biosynthesis of these structures have been identified from N. meningitidis immunotypes L3 and LI (Jennings et al, Mol Microbiol. 18: 729-740 (1995)) and the N. gonorrhoeae mutant F62 (Gotshlich, J. Exp. Med. 180: 2181-2190 (1994)).
  • N. meningitidis immunotypes L3 and LI Jennings et al, Mol Microbiol. 18: 729-740 (1995)
  • N. gonorrhoeae mutant F62 (Gotshlich, J. Exp. Med. 180: 2181-2190 (1994)).
  • meningitidis a locus consisting of three genes, IgtA, IgtB and Ig E, encodes the glycosyltransferase enzymes required for addition ofthe last three ofthe sugars in the lacto-N-neotetraose chain (Wakarchuk et al, J. Biol. Chem. 271: 19166- 73 (1996)). Recently the enzymatic activity ofthe IgtB and IgtA gene product was demonstrated, providing the first direct evidence for their proposed glycosyltransferase 271(45): 28271-276 (1996)). In N.
  • IgtD which adds ⁇ -D-Gal ⁇ Ac to the 3 position ofthe terminal galactose ofthe lacto-N-neotetraose structure
  • IgtC which adds a terminal ⁇ -D-Gal to the lactose element of a truncated LOS, thus creating the P k blood group antigen structure (Gotshlich (1994), supra.).
  • a separate immunotype LI also expresses the P k blood group antigen and has been shown to carry an IgtC gene (Jennings et al, (1995), supra.).
  • Neisseria glycosyltransferases and associated genes are also described in USP ⁇ 5,545,553 (Gotschlich). Genes for ⁇ l,2-fucosyltransferase and ⁇ 1,3 -fucosyltransferase from Helicobader pylori has also been characterized (Martin et al, J. Biol. Chem. 272: 21349- 21356 (1997)). Also of use in the present invention are the glycosyltransferases of
  • Campylobacter jejuni see, for example, http://afrnb.cnrs-rnrs.fr/ ⁇ pedro/CAZY/gtf_42.html).
  • the invention also provides methods for producing peptides that include sulfated molecules, including, for example sulfated polysaccharides such as heparin, heparan sulfate, carragenen, and related compounds.
  • Suitable sulfotransferases include, for example, chondroitin-6-sulphotransferase (chicken cD ⁇ A described by Fukuta et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270: 18575-18580 (1995); GenBank Accession No.
  • glycosaminoglycan N- acetylglucosamine N-deacetylase/N-sulphotransferase 1 (Dixon et ⁇ /., Genomics 26: 239-241 (1995); UL18918), and glycosaminoglycan N-acetylglucosamine N-deacetylase/N- sulphotransferase 2 (murine cDNA described in Orellana et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 2270- 2276 (1994) and Eriksson et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 10438-10443 (1994); human cDNA described in GenBank Accession No. U2304).
  • the enzymes utilized in the method ofthe invention are cell-bound glycosyltransferases. Although many soluble glycosyltransferases are known
  • glycosyltransferases are generally in membrane- bound form when associated with cells. Many ofthe membrane-bound enzymes studied thus far are considered to be intrinsic proteins; that is, they are not released from the membranes by sonication and require detergents for solubilization. Surface glycosyltransferases have been identified on the surfaces of vertebrate and invertebrate cells, and it has also been recognized that these surface transferases maintain catalytic activity under physiological conditions.
  • ⁇ .-D- galactosyl-l,4-N-acetyl-D-glucosaminide ⁇ -l,3-galactosyltransferase was transfected into COS-1 cells. The transfected cells were then cultured and assayed for ⁇ 1-3 galactosyltransferase activity.
  • the methods ofthe invention utilize fusion proteins that have more than one enzymatic activity that is involved in synthesis of a desired glycopeptide conjugate.
  • the fusion polypeptides can be composed of, for example, a catalytically active domain of a glycosyltransferase that is joined to a catalytically active domain of an accessory enzyme.
  • the accessory enzyme catalytic domain can, for example, catalyze a step in the formation of a nucleotide sugar that is a donor for the glycosyltransferase, or catalyze a reaction involved in a glycosyltransferase cycle.
  • a polynucleotide that encodes a glycosyltransferase can be joined, in-frame, to a polynucleotide that encodes an enzyme involved in nucleotide sugar synthesis.
  • the resulting fusion protein can then catalyze not only the synthesis ofthe nucleotide sugar, but also the transfer ofthe sugar moiety to the acceptor molecule.
  • the fusion protein can be two or more cycle enzymes linked into one expressible nucleotide sequence.
  • the fusion protein includes the catalytically active domains of two or more glycosyltransferases. See, for example, 5,641,668.
  • modified glycopeptides ofthe present invention can be ffe ⁇ d ⁇ lf de i ne IWd'nitriyifffifirel' utilizing various suitable fusion proteins (see, for example, PCT Patent Application PCT/CA98/01180, which was published as WO 99/31224 on June 24, 1999.)
  • the present invention also provides for the use of enzymes that are immobilized on a solid and/or soluble support.
  • a glycosyltransferase that is conjugated to a PEG via an intact glycosyl linker according to the methods of the invention.
  • the PEG-linker-enzyme conjugate is optionally attached to solid support.
  • solid supported enzymes in the methods of the invention simplifies the work up ofthe reaction mixture and purification ofthe reaction product, and also enables the facile recovery ofthe enzyme.
  • the glycosyltransferase conjugate is utilized in the methods ofthe invention. Other combinations of enzymes and supports will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
  • Glycosylation of a mutant human growth hormone may also be accomplished intracellularly by recombinant means.
  • a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone, which comprises at least one newly introduced N- or O-linked glycosylation site may be transfected into a suitable host cell line, e.g., a eukaryotic cell line derived from yeast, insect, or mammalian origin.
  • the mutant human growth hormone recombinantly produced from such a cell line is glycosylated by the host cell glycosylation machinery.
  • glycosylated human growth hormone produced by the above processes is preferably purified before use.
  • Standard, well known techniques such as thin or thick layer chromatography, column chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, or membrane filtration can be used. It is preferred to use membrane filtration, more preferably utilizing a reverse osmotic membrane, or one or more column chromatographic techniques for the recovery as is discussed hereinafter and in the literature cited herein.
  • the particulate debris either host cells or lysed fragments
  • the protein may be concentrated with a followed by separating the polypeptide variant from other impurities by one or more steps selected from immunoaffinity chromatography, ion-exchange column fractionation (e.g., on diethylaminoethyl (DEAE) or matrices containing carboxymethyl or sulfopropyl groups), chromatography on Blue- Sepharose, CM Blue-Sepharose, MONO-Q, MONO-S, lentil lectin-Sepharose, WGA- Sepharose, Con A-Sepharose, Ether Toyopearl, Butyl Toyopearl, Phenyl Toyopearl, SP- Sepharose, or protein A Sepharose, SDS-PAGE chromatography, si
  • a glycosylated mutant human growth hormone produced in culture is usually isolated by initial extraction from cells, cell lysate, culture media, etc., followed by one or more concentration, salting-out, aqueous ion-exchange, or size-exclusion chromatography steps. Additionally, the glycoprotein may be purified by affinity chromatography. Finally, HPLC may be employed for final purification steps.
  • a protease inhibitor e.g., methylsulfonylfluoride (PMSF) may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth of adventitious contaminants.
  • PMSF methylsulfonylfluoride
  • supernatants from systems that produce the glycosylated human growth hormone ofthe invention are first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, for example, an Amicon or Millipore Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. Following the concentration step, the concentrate may be applied to a suitable purification matrix.
  • a suitable affinity matrix may comprise a ligand for the peptide, a lectin or antibody molecule bound to a suitable support.
  • an anion-exchange resin may be employed, for example, a matrix or substrate having pendant DEAE groups.
  • Suitable matrices include acrylamide, agarose, dextran, cellulose, or other types commonly employed in protein purification.
  • a cation-exchange step may be employed.
  • Suitable cation exchangers include various insoluble matrices comprising sulfopropyl or carboxymethyl groups. Sulfopropyl groups are particularly preferred.
  • one or more RP-HPLC steps employing hydrophobic RP-HPLC media, e.g., silica gel having pendant methyl or other aliphatic groups, may be employed to further purify ⁇ gtM ' ft ⁇ hormone.
  • hydrophobic RP-HPLC media e.g., silica gel having pendant methyl or other aliphatic groups.
  • glycosylated mutant human growth hormone ofthe invention resulting from a large-scale fermentation may be purified by methods analogous to those disclosed by Urdal et al, J. Chromatog. 296: 171 (1984).
  • This reference describes two sequential, RP-HPLC steps for purification of recombinant human IL-2 on a preparative HPLC column.
  • techniques such as affinity chromatography, may be utilized to purify the glycoprotein.
  • the biological functions ofthe glycoprotein are tested using several methods known in the art.
  • the functional assays are based on various characteristics of human growth hormone, such as its specific binding to human growth hormone receptor, activation ofthe hGH receptor, and its activity in promoting cell growth. In each assay, wild- type human growth hormone is included as a positive control.
  • a radioreceptor binding assay can be carried out to measure the binding between a radio-labeled hGH receptor and a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention. Detailed description for such an assay can be found in the literature, e.g., Tsushima et al, J. Clin.
  • the animals are sacrificed on the sixth day, their foreleg knee bones taken out and the width ofthe epiphyseal plates measured.
  • the weight of these rats at the start ofthe experiment and before being sacrificed is also monitored and compared among different groups receiving daily injections ofthe mutant human growth hormone at different concentrations.
  • a mutant human growth hormone can be demonstrated in its ability to cause hGH-dependent tyrosine phosphorylation in IM-9 cells, which are derived from a clone of human lymphoblastoma and express human growth hormone receptor on the cell surface.
  • MB-2 cells may also be sfittfbli ',, f tl
  • the ' level of tyrosine phosphorylation of cellular proteins upon exposure to the mutant human growth hormone is shown by a monoclonal antibody against phosphorylated tyrosine, as described by Silva et al, Endocrinology, 132: 101 (1993) and U.S. Patent No. 6,238,915.
  • the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone having desired oligosaccharide determinants described above can be used as therapeutics for treating a variety of diseases and conditions related to deficiency in growth hormone.
  • Growth-related conditions that can be treated with the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention include: dwarfism, short-stature in children and adults, cachexia/muscle wasting, general muscular atrophy, and sex chromosome abnormality (e.g., Turner's Syndrome).
  • mutant hGH ofthe present invention Other conditions may be treated using the mutant hGH ofthe present invention include: short-bowel syndrome, lipodystrophy, osteoporosis, uraemaia, burns, female infertility, bone regeneration, general diabetes, type II diabetes, osteo-arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), and insomia.
  • the mutant hGH ofthe invention may also be used to promote various healing processes, e.g., general tissue regeneration, bone regeneration, and wound healing, or as a vaccine adjunct.
  • the present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of glycosylated mutant human growth hormone, which is produced according to the methods described above.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions ofthe invention are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems.
  • compositions for use in the present invention are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985). For a brief review of methods for drug delivery, see, Langer, Science 249: 1527- 1533 (1990).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are intended for parenteral, intranasal, topical, oral, or local administration, such as by subcutaneous injection, aerosol inhalation, or transdermal adsorption, for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment. Commonly, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered parenterally, e.g., subcutaneously or intravenously.
  • compositions for parenteral administration which comprise the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone dissolved or suspended in an acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier, e.g., water, buffered water, saline, PBS and the like.
  • an acceptable carrier preferably an aqueous carrier, e.g., water, buffered water, saline, PBS and the like.
  • the compositions may also contain detergents such as Tween 20 and Tween 80; sM ⁇ ize ''s e ⁇ ; ⁇ «fc ⁇ itii ⁇ ''fe'®r 'M
  • compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents, detergents and the like.
  • auxiliary substances such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents, detergents and the like.
  • These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered.
  • the resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration.
  • the pH ofthe preparations typically will be between 3 and 11, more preferably from 5 to 9, and most preferably from 7 and 8.
  • the compositions containing the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments.
  • compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease or condition related to growth hormone deficiency, in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms ofthe disease and its complications.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as a "therapeutically effective dose.” Amounts effective for this use will depend on the severity ofthe disease or condition and the weight and general state ofthe patient, but generally range from about 0.1 mg to about 2,000 mg of glycosylated mutant human growth hormone per day for a 70 kg patient, with dosages of from about 5 mg to about 200 mg ofthe compounds per day being more commonly used.
  • compositions containing the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone ofthe invention are administered to a patient susceptible to or otherwise at risk of a particular disease.
  • Such an amount is defined to be a “prophylactically effective dose.”
  • the precise amounts again depend on the patient's state of health and weight, but generally range from about 0.1 mg to about 1,000 mg per 70 kilogram patient, more commonly from about 5 mg to about 200 mg per 70 kg of body weight.
  • compositions can be carried out with dose levels and pattern being selected by the treating physician.
  • pharmaceutical formulations should provide a quantity ofthe glycosylated mutant human growth hormone of this invention sufficient to effectively treat the patient.
  • Human growth hormone occurs in a variety of different isoforms and different amino acid sequences.
  • the two best characterized forms include placental derived hGH, which is also known as GH-N (PDB P01242) and pituitary derived hGH, which is also known as somatotropin or GH- ⁇ (P01241); see Figure 1.
  • the pituitary derived hGH is not glycosylated and is produced in Escherichia coli as a therapeutic.
  • the placental derived hGH (GH-N) has one ⁇ -glycosylation site at amino acid 140 (see Table 4 and FIG. 1, see arrow).
  • the pituitary derived hGH (GH-N) can be modified at amino acid position 140 to introduce an N-linked glycosylation site by mutating the nucleotide sequence encoding this polypeptide so that instead of encoding the wild-type lysine (abbreviated as "k” at amino acid 140 ofthe GH-N polypeptide sequence in Table 5 and FIG. 1, see arrow), the nucleotide sequence will encode an asparagine (abbreviated "n") at amino acid position 140 of GH-N (see also FIG. 2).
  • This mutated pituitary derived hGH can then be glycosylated or glycoconjugated (see WO 03/31464, inco ⁇ orated herein by reference).
  • the mutated pituitary derived hGH is glycoPEGylated, wherein a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety is conjugated to the mutated pituitary derived hGH polypeptide via a glycosyl linkage (see WO 03/31464, incorporated herein by reference).
  • FIG.3 describes the GlycoPEGylation of an hGH N-linked glycan mutant produced in either Sf9 insect cells or mammalian cells.
  • GlycoPEGylation ofthe mibtitedi iM idMvedllh ⁇ H-Sfeei ected to result in improved biophysical properties that may include but are not limited to improved half-life, improved area under the curve (AUC) values, reduced clearance, and reduced immunogenicity.
  • Example 2 An alternative approach is to create an O-linked glycosylation site into the pituitary derived hGH polypeptide.
  • This O-linked glycosylation site may then be used as a site on which the mutated hGH polypeptide can be glycoPEGylated using a GalNAcT 2 enzyme or the like.
  • One or more additional transferases may then be used to add glycans or glycoconjugates to that site.
  • the mutated pituitary derived hGH polypeptide is glycoPEGylated.
  • FIG.4 describes the glycoPEGylation of an hGH O-linked glycan mutant produced in Escherichia coli.
  • the protein loop regions on pituitary derived hGH are best suited for mutation to introduce a glycosylation site (FIG. 5).
  • the nucleotide sequence that encodes amino acids 1-6 FPTIPL; SEQ ID NO: 10
  • amino acids 48-52 PQTSL; SEQ ID NO: 11
  • amino acids 59-64 PTPSNR; SEQ ID NO: 12
  • amino acids 133-139 PRTGQIF; SEQ ID NO: 13
  • amino acids 133-145 PRTGQIFKQTYSK
  • SEQ ID NO: 14 amino acids 139-142
  • FKQT SEQ ID NO: 15
  • FIG. 6 illustrates six (6) of these introduced O-linked glycosylation sites.
  • the arrows in Figure 6 each represent the threonine residue on which O-linked glycosylation will occur in the GH-N O-linked glycan hGH mutant.
  • FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 each illustrates two additional GH-N O-linked glycan hGH mutants.
  • This example describes amino acid sequence mutations introducing O-linked glycosylation sites, i.e., serine or threonine residues, into a preferably proline-containing site of a wild- type human growth hormone sequence or any modified version thereof.
  • N-terminus of a wild-type hGH, FP 2 TIP 5 LS; SEQ ID NO: 16 is replaced with either MXnTP 2 TIP 5 LS or MAPTSSXnP 2 TIP 5 LS.
  • Preferred examples include:
  • MQTPTIPLS MQTPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO: 18 MAPTSSPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO: 19 MAPTSSSPTIPLS (IL-2 N-terminus); SEQ ID NO:20 MPTTFPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO:21 MPTSSPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO:22
  • mutants the N-terminus of a wild-type hGH, FP 2 TIP 5 LS; SEQ ID NO:24, is replaced with ZmP 2 T XnBoP 5 LS.
  • Preferred mutations include:
  • MFPTSIPLS SEQ ID NO:26 MFPTSSPLS; SEQ ID NO:27 MTPTQIPLS; SEQ ID NO:28 MFPTTTPLS; SEQ ID NO:29
  • ammo acid sequence surrounding P AYIP KEQKY; SEQ ID NO:30
  • AZmJqP 37 OrXnBo ⁇ pY where at least one of Z, J, O, X, and B is independently selected from either Thr or Ser;
  • may include Lys (K) and
  • X may be Asp (D).
  • Preferred examples include:
  • amino acid sequence surrounding P 48 , LQNP 48 QTSLC; SEQ ID NO:35 is replaced with LZmJqP 48 OrXnBoLC, where at least one of Z, J, O, and X are independently selected from either Thr or Ser.
  • Preferred examples include:
  • amino acid sequence surrounding P 59 SESIP 59 TPNREET; SEQ ID NO:38, is replaced with SZmUsJqP 59 TPOrXnBo ⁇ rT, where at least one of Z, J, O, B, ⁇ , U, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser; B, ⁇ , and Z may include charged amino acids.
  • Preferred examples include:
  • Preferred examples include:
  • SWLEP 89 TQGLRS SEQ ID NO:49 SWLEP 89 TQGATS; SEQ ID NO:50 SSQTP 89 NQFLRS; SEQ ID ⁇ O:51 SWLEP 89 TSSLSS; SEQ ID NO:52 SMVTP 89 VQFLRS; SEQ ID NO:53 7 Intdmal i iMttyibn,Sife»
  • EDGSP 133 TNGQIF EDGSP 133 TNGQIF
  • SEQ ID ⁇ O:58 EDGSP 133 TTTQIF
  • SEQ ID NO:59 EDGSP 133 TNGQIF
  • amino acid sequence surrounding P 140 GQIFK 140 QTYS; SEQ ID NO:65, is replace with GZmUsJq ⁇ r 140 OrXnBoS, where at least one of Z, U, J, O, B, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser.
  • Preferred examples include:
  • GQIFT 140 QTYS; SEQ ID NO:71 GQIST 140 QTYS; SEQ ID NO:72 GQIPT 140 TTYS; SEQ ID NO:73
  • NEGSCGPTTTP SEQ ID ⁇ O:75 VEGSCGPTSSP; SEQ ID NO:76 VEGSCGPTQGAMP; SEQ ID NO:77
  • VEGSCGPTTIP SEQ ID NO:78 NEGSCGPMVTP; SEQ ID ⁇ O:79
  • X, Z, B, ⁇ , J, U, O, and ⁇ are independently selected from E (glutamate), any uncharged amino acid or dipeptide combination including M, F, MF, and the like; m, n, o, p, q, r, s, and t are independently selected from integers from 0 to 3.
  • the N-terminal Met may be present or absent on any hGH mutant.
  • the numbering of the amino acid residues is based on the initial unmodified sequence in which the left most residue is numbered 1. The numbering of unmodified amino acids remains unchanged following the modification. More than one ofthe above described sequence modifications may be present in a hGH mutant ofthe present invention.

Abstract

The present invention relates to mutants of human growth hormone, which contain newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site(s), such that these recombinantly produced polypeptides have glycosylation patterns distinctly different from that of the naturally occurring human growth hormone. The polynucleotide coding sequences for the mutants, expression cassettes comprising the coding sequences, cells expressing the mutants, and methods for producing the mutants are also disclosed. Further disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising the mutants and method for using the mutants.

Description

COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR THE PREPARATION OF HUMAN GROWTH HORMONE GLYCOSYLATION MUTANTS
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0001] Human growth Hormone (hGH) and agonist variants thereof are members of a family of recombinant proteins, described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,658,021 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,352. Their recombinant production and methods of use are detailed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,342,832, 4,601,980; U.S. Pat. No. 4,898,830; U.S. Pat. No. 5,424,199; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,795,745. Human growth hormone participates in various aspects of the regulation of normal human growth and development. Through interaction with its receptors, this 22 kDa pituitary hormone modulates a multitude of biological effects, such as linear growth
(somatogenesis), lactation, activation of macrophages, and insulin-like and diabetogenic effects. Chawla, Annu. Rev. Med., 34: 519 (1983); Edwards et al, Science, 239: 769 (1988); Isaksson et al, Annu. Rev. Physiol, 47: 483 (1985); Thorner and Nance, J. Clin. Invest., 82: 745 (1988); Hughes and Friesen, Annu. Rev. Physiol, 47: 469 (1985). [0002] The administration of glycosylated and non-glycosylated peptides for engendering a particular physiological response is well known in the medicinal arts. Both purified and recombinant hGH have been used for treating conditions and diseases due to hGH deficiency, e.g., dwarfism in children. A principal factor that has limited the use of therapeutic peptides is the immunogenic nature of most peptides. In a patient, an immunogenic response to an administered peptide can neutralize the peptide and/or lead to the development of an allergic response in the patient. Other deficiencies of therapeutic glycopeptides include suboptimal potency and rapid clearance rates. The problems inherent in peptide therapeutics are recognized in the art, and various methods of eliminating the problems have been investigated. For example, to provide soluble peptide therapeutics, synthetic polymers have been attached to the peptide backbone.
[0003] Poly(ethyleneglycol) ("PEG") is an exemplary polymer that has been conjugated to polypeptides. The use of to PEG to derivatize peptide therapeutics has been demonstrated to reduce the immunogenicity of the peptides. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,179,337 (Davis et al.) concerns non-immunogenic polypeptides, such as enzymes and peptide hormones coupled to polyethylene glycol (PEG) or polypropylene glycol. Between 10 and 100 moles of polymer are used per mole polypeptide and at least 15% of the physiological activity is fMfiffined Im EMitiό'ri Au tearatnce time in circulation is prolonged due to the increased size of the PEG-conjugate of the polypeptides in question. The methods disclosed by Davis et al. are chemical PEG-ylation methods.
[0004] The chemical modification of peptides, frequently results in an undesirable loss of peptide activity, which is attributable to the non-selective nature of the chemistries utilized to modify the peptide. For example, when the modifying group is a water-soluble peptide, e.g., PEG, the principal mode of attachment of PEG, and its derivatives, to peptides is a nonspecific bonding through a peptide amino acid residue. Studies of conjugates of water- soluble polymers and interleukin-2 (Fisher et al., Br. J. Haematol, 82: 654 (1992)), granulocyte colony stimulating factor (Satake-Ishikawa et al., Cell Struct. Fund, 17: 157 (1992)), tumor necrosis factor (Tsutsumi et al., Br. J. Cancer, 71: 963 (1996)) and human growth hormone (Clark, et al., J. Biol Chem., 271:21969 (1996)) have revealed that chemical PEGylation of these proteins decreases the in vivo receptor binding activity of the peptides.
[0005] In many chemical PEGylation methods, poly(ethyleneglycol) is added in an essentially random, non-specific manner to reactive residues on a peptide backbone. For the production of therapeutic peptides, it is clearly desirable to utilize a derivitization strategy that results in the formation of a specifically labeled, readily characterizable, essentially homogeneous product. A promising route to preparing specifically labeled peptides is through the use of enzymes, such as glycosyltransferases to append a modified sugar moiety onto a peptide.
[0006] Enzyme-based syntheses have the advantages of regioselectivity and stereoselectivity. Moreover, enzymatic syntheses are performed using unprotected substrates. Three principal classes of enzymes are used in the synthesis of carbohydrates, glycosyltransferases (e.g. , sialyltransferases, oligosaccharyltransferases, N- acetylglucosaminyltransferases), and glycosidases. The glycosidases are further classified as exoglycosidases (e.g., β-mannosidase, β-glucosidase), and endoglycosidases (e.g., Endo-A, Endo-M). Each of these classes of enzymes has been successfully used synthetically to prepare carbohydrates. For a general review, see, Crout et al, Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol 2: 98- 111 (1998).
[0007] Glycosyltransferases modify the oligosaccharide structures on glycopeptides, producing specific products with good stereochemical and regiochemical control. Glycosyltransferases are used to prepare oligosaccharides and to modify terminal N- and O-
Figure imgf000005_0001
on glycopeptides produced in mammalian cells.
For example, the terminal oligosaccharides of glycopeptides have been completely sialylated and/or fucosylated to provide more consistent sugar structures, which improves glycopeptide pharmacodynamics and a variety of other biological properties. For example, β-1,4- galactosyltransferase was used to synthesize lactosamine, an illustration of the utility of glycosyltransferases in the synthesis of carbohydrates (see, e.g., Wong et al, J. Org. Chem. 47: 5416-5418 (1982)). Moreover, numerous synthetic procedures have made use of α- sialyltransferases to transfer sialic acid from cytidine-5'-monophospho-N-acetylneuraminic acid to the 3-OH or 6-OH of galactose (see, e.g., Kevin et al, Chem. Eur. J. 2: 1359-1362 (1996)). Fucosyltransferases are used in synthetic pathways to transfer a fucose unit from guanosine-5'-diphosphofucose to a specific hydroxyl of a saccharide acceptor. For example, Ichikawa prepared sialyl Lewis-X by a method that involves the fucosylation of sialylated lactosamine with a cloned fucosyltransferase (Ichikawa et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114: 9283- 9298 (1992)). For a discussion of recent advances in glycoconjugate synthesis for therapeutic use see, Koeller et al, Nature Biotechnology 18: 835-841 (2000). See also, U.S. Patent No. 5,876,980; 6,030,815; 5,728,554; 5,922,577; and WO/9831826.
[0008] Glycosidases can also be used to prepare saccharides. Glycosidases normally catalyze the hydrolysis of a glycosidic bond. Under appropriate conditions, however, they can be used to form this linkage. Most glycosidases used for carbohydrate synthesis are exoglycosidases; the glycosyl transfer occurs at the non-reducing terminus of the substrate. The glycosidase takes up a glycosyl donor in a glycosyl-enzyme intermediate that is either intercepted by water to give the hydrolysis product, or by an acceptor, to give a new glycoside or oligosaccharide. An exemplary pathway using an exoglycosidase is the synthesis of the core trisaccharide of all N-linked glycopeptides, including the difficult β- mannoside linkage, which was formed by the action of β-mannosidase (Singh et al, Chem. Commun. 993-994 (1996)).
[0009] In another exemplary application of the use of a glycosidase to form a glycosidic linkage, a mutant glycosidase has been prepared in which the normal nucleophilic amino acid within the active site is changed to a non-nucleophilic amino acid. The mutant enzymes do not hydrolyze glycosidic linkages, but can still form them. The mutant glycosidases are used to prepare oligosaccharides using an α-glycosyl fluoride donor and a glycoside acceptor molecule (Withers et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,716,812). Although the mutant glycosidases are ilstful tor tytlMι-|,'-_ree dlfgb'g&OTarides, it has yet to be demonstrated that such enzymes are capable of appending glycosyl donors onto glycosylated or non-glycosylated peptides, nor have these enzymes been used with unactivated glycosyl donors.
[0010] Although their use is less common than that of the exoglycosidases, endoglycosidases are also utilized to prepare carbohydrates. Methods based on the use of endoglycosidases have the advantage that an oligosaccharide, rather than a monosaccharide, is transferred. Oligosaccharide fragments have been added to substrates using en o-β-N- acetylglucosamines such as endo-Ε, endo-M (Wang et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 37: 1975-1978); and Haneda et al, Carbohydr. Res. 292: 61-70 (1996)).
[0011] In addition to their use in preparing carbohydrates, the enzymes discussed above are applied to the synthesis of glycopeptides as well. The synthesis of a homogenous glycoform of ribonuclease B has been published (Witte K. et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 119: 2114-2118 (1997)). The high mannose core of ribonuclease B was cleaved by treating the glycopeptide with endoglycosidase H. The cleavage occurred specifically between the two core GlcNAc residues. The tetrasaccharide sialyl Lewis X was then enzymatically rebuilt on the remaining GlcNAc anchor site on the now homogenous protein by the sequential use of β-1,4- galactosyltransferase, α-2,3-sialyltransferase and α-l,3-fucosyltransferase V. Each enzymatically catalyzed step proceeded in excellent yield.
[0012] Methods combining both chemical and enzymatic synthetic elements are also known. For example, Yamamoto and coworkers (Carbohydr. Res. 305: 415-422 (1998)) reported the chemoenzymatic synthesis of the glycopeptide, glycosylated Peptide T, using an endoglyosidase. The N-acetylglucosaminyl peptide was synthesized by purely chemical means. The peptide was subsequently enzymatically elaborated with the oligosaccharide of human transferrin glycopeptide. The saccharide portion was added to the peptide by treating it with an endo-β-N-acetylglucosaminidase. The resulting glycosylated peptide was highly stable and resistant to proteolysis when compared to the peptide T and N-acetylglucosaminyl peptide T.
[0013] The use of glycosyltransferases to modify peptide structure with, reporter groups has been explored. For example, Brossmer et al. (U.S. Patent No. 5,405,753) discloses the formation of a fluorescent-labeled cytidine monophosphate ("CMP") derivative of sialic acid and the use of the fluorescent glycoside in an assay for sialyl transferase activity and for the fluorescent-labeling of cell surfaces, glycoproteins and gangliosides. Gross et al. (Analyt. ιVkhέh W6 m Θ9: ψά bb a similar assay. Bean et al. (U.S. Patent No. 5,432,059) discloses an assay for glycosylation deficiency disorders utilizing reglycosylation of a deficiently glycosylated protein. The deficient protein is reglycosylated with a fluorescent- labeled CMP glycoside. Each of the fluorescent sialic acid derivatives is substituted with the fluorescent moiety at either the 9-position or at the amine that is normally acetylated in sialic acid. The methods using the fluorescent sialic acid derivatives are assays for the presence of glycosyltransferases or for non-glycosylated or improperly glycosylated glycoproteins. The assays are conducted on small amounts of enzyme or glycoprotein in a sample of biological origin. The enzymatic derivatization of a glycosylated or non-glycosylated peptide on a preparative or industrial scale using a modified sialic acid has not been disclosed or suggested.
[0014] Enzymatic methods have also been used to activate glycosyl residues on a glycopeptide towards subsequent chemical elaboration. The glycosyl residues are typically activated using galactose oxidase, which converts a terminal galactose residue to the corresponding aldehyde. The aldehyde is subsequently coupled to an amine-containing modifying group. For example, Casares et al. (Nature Biotech. 19: 142 (2001)) have attached doxorubicin to the oxidized galactose residues of a recombinant MHCII-peptide chimera. ;
[0015] Glycosyl residues have also been modified to bear ketone groups. For example, Mahal and co-workers (Science 276: 1125 (1997)) have prepared N-levulinoyl mannosamine ("ManLev"), which has a ketone functionality at the position normally occupied by the acetyl group in the natural substrate. Cells were treated with the ManLev, thereby incorporating a ketone group onto the cell surface. See, also Saxon et al, Science 287: 2007 (2000); Hang et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 123: 1242 (2001); Yarema et /., J Biol. Chem. 273: 31168 (1998); and Charter et al, Glycobiology 10: 1049 (2000). [0016] Carbohydrates are attached to glycopeptides in several ways of which N-linked to asparagine and mucin-type O-linked to serine and threonine are the most relevant for recombinant glycoprotein therapeuctics. A determining factor for initiation of glycosylation of a protein is the primary sequence context, although clearly other factors including protein region and conformation play roles. N-linked glycosylation occurs at the consensus sequence NXS/T, where X can be any amino acid but proline.
[0017] The methods discussed above do not provide access to industrially relevant quantities of modified peptides that substantially retain the pharmacological activity of their iM o itre -aia eS'.
Figure imgf000008_0001
methods do not allow for the site-specific conjugation of a modified sugar to a peptide or glycopeptide. Nor do the methods provide a means to prepare modified peptides that are glycosylated or glycoconjugated at non-natural sites.
[0018] The present invention answers these needs by providing hGH mutants that contain newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation sites, providing flexibility in glycosylation and/or glycopegylation of these recombinant hGH mutants. Moreover, the invention provides an industrially practical method for the modification of N- or O-linked mutant hGH peptides with modifying groups such as water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, biomolecules, and the like. Of particular interest are methods in which the modified mutant hGH has improved properties, which enhance its use as a therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0019] In one aspect, the present invention provides an isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone. The mutant human growth hormone comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone includes the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0020] In another aspect, the present invention provides an expression cassette or a cell that comprises a nucleic acid, e.g., an isolated nucleic acid, including a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone. The mutant human growth hormone includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone.
[0021] In another aspect, the present invention provides a mutant human growth hormone, that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Figure imgf000009_0001
a method for making a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that is not present in the wild-type human growth hormone. This method includes the steps of recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone, and glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone at the new glycosylation site. In some embodiments, the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0023] In still a further aspect, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition having a therapeutically effective amount of a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site not present in the wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0024] In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating human growth hormone deficiency in a subject. The method includes administering to the subject an amount of a mutant human growth hormone effective to treat or ameliorate the growth hormone deficiency. The mutant human growth hormone used in this method comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0025] In each of the aspects described above, the mutant human growth hormone is optionally conjugates to one or more modifying group, preferably via glycoconjugation giving rise to a glycosyl linking group between the glycosylation site and the modifying group. An exemplary modifying group is poly(ethylene glycol). BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0026] FIG. 1 is the amino acid sequences of GH-N (pituitary derived hGH) and GH-N (placental derived hGH). The arrows indicate the amino acid position for a mutational introduction of (GH-Ν) or a naturally existing (GH-N) Ν-linked glycosylation site. [0027] FIG. 2 is the crystal structure depiction of a glycosylated GH-Ν mutant hGH (Lysl40 to Asnl40) and its receptor polypeptide.
[0028] FIG. 3 are glycoPEGylation schemes for insect cell and mammalian cell produced hGH Ν-linked glycan mutants.
[0029] FIG. 4 shows the glycoPEGylation of an Escherichia coli produced hGH O-linked glycan mutant.
[0030] FIG. 5 displays alternate mutants of GH-Ν to introduce glycosylation sites. The arrows indicate the protein loop regions of GH-Ν into which a glycosylation site may be introduced.
[0031] FIG. 6 are the amino acid sequences of six (6) different O-linked glycosylation sites that may be introduced into pituitary derived hGH (GH-Ν). The wild-type amino acid sequence for GH-Ν is also shown for comparison. The arrows indicate the threonine residue of the GH-Ν glycan mutant on which O-linked glycosylation will occur.
[0032] FIG. 7 are the amino acid sequences of hGH O-linked GH-Ν mutant 134(rtg) -> ttt and hGH O-linked 5' GH-Ν mutant in which amino acids -3 to -1 (ptt) are inserted at the amino terminus, resulting in a 194 amino acid hGH polypeptide.
[0033] FIG. 8 are the amino acid sequences of hGH O-linked GH-Ν mutant 134(rtg) -» ttg and hGH O-linked 5' GH-Ν mutant in which amino acids -3 to -1 (mvt) are inserted at the amino terminus, resulting in a 194 amino acid hGH polypeptide.
[0034] FIG. 9A depicts the amino acid sequence of mature human growth hormone (GH- Ν) (SEQ ID NO: 1). FIG. 9B depicts the amino acid sequence of mature human growth hormone (GH-N) (SEQ ID Ν,O:2). FIG. 9C depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:3). FIG. 9D depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:4). FIG. 9E depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 3 (SEQ ID NO: 5). FIG. 9F depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 4 (SEQ ID NO: 6). FIG. 9G depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 5 (SEQ ID NO:7). FIG. 9H depicts the ammo aeid^feqϋ'eft'ce^ol liϊffia'n^frδ'wth hormone mutant 6 (SEQ ID NO:8). FIG. 91 depicts the amino acid sequence of human growth hormone mutant 7 (SEQ ID NO:9).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Definitions [0035] The term "nucleic acid" or "polynucleotide" refers to deoxyribonucleic acids
(DNA) or ribonucleic acids (RNA) and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form. Unless specifically limited, the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known analogues of natural nucleotides that have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides. Unless otherwise indicated, a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions), alleles, orthologs, SNPs, and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed- base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al, Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al, J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 (1985); and Rossolini et al, Mol Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)). The term nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, and mRNA encoded by a gene.
[0036] The term "gene" means the segment of DNA involved in producing a polypeptide chain. It may include regions preceding and following the coding region (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons).
[0037] The term "isolated," when applied to a nucleic acid or protein, denotes that the nucleic acid or protein is essentially free of other cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state. It is preferably in a homogeneous state although it can be in either a dry or aqueous solution. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. In particular, an isolated gene is separated from open reading frames that flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest. The term "purified" denotes that a nucleic acid or protein gives rise to essentially one band in an electrophoretic gel. Particularly, it means that the nucleic acid or protein is at least 85% pure, more preferably at least 95% pure, and most preferably at least 99% pure. [U0i38p The' eM'''s'an i 'l#ϊd"?'!τ'e ers to naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids. Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, γ- carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine. Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an α carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid. "Amino acid mimetics" refers to chemical compounds having a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but that functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
[0039] There are various known methods in the art that permit the incorporation of an unnatural amino acid derivative or analog into a polypeptide chain in a site-specific manner, see, e.g., WO 02/086075.
[0040] Amino acids may be referred to herein by either the commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes. [0041] "Conservatively modified variants" applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, "conservatively modified variants" refers to those nucleic acids that encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For instance, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide. Such nucleic acid variations are "silent variations," which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein that encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid. One of skill will recognize that each codon in a nucleic acid (except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan) can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule. Accordingl 1; afeh' lέntJlvariIliorι''6,f a"' nucleic -acid that encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
[0042] As to amino acid sequences, one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a "conservatively modified variant" where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
[0043] The following eight groups each contain amino acids that are conservative substitutions for one another:
1) Alanine (A), Glycine (G);
2) Aspartic acid (D), Glutamic acid (E); 3) Asparagine (N), Glutamine (Q);
4) Arginine (R), Lysine (K);
5) Isoleucine (I), Leucine (L), Methionine (M), Valine (N);
6) Phenylalanine (F), Tyrosine (Y), Tryptophan (W);
7) Serine (S), Threonine (T); and 8) Cysteine (C), Methionine (M)
(see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins (1984)).
[0044] Amino acids may be referred to herein by either their commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
[0045] In the present application, amino acid residues are numbered according to their relative positions from the left most residue, which is numbered 1, in an unmodified wild- type polypeptide sequence.
[0046] "Proximate a proline residue," as used herein refers to an amino acid that is less than about 10 amino acids removed from a proline residue, preferably, less than about 9, 8, 7, 6 or 5 amino acids removed from a proline residue, more preferably, less than about 4, 3, 2 or FTβsiαue's rβmoveα'irom.a ϊiOiine'Tesidue. The amino acid "proximate a proline residue" may be on the C- or N-terminal side of the proline residue.
[0047] "Polypeptide," "peptide," and "protein" are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues. All three terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non- naturally occurring amino acid polymers. As used herein, the terms encompass amino acid chains of any length, including full-length proteins, wherein the amino acid residues are linked by covalent peptide bonds. [0048] The term "mutating" or "mutation," as used in the context of introducing additional N- or O-linked glycosylation site(s) into a wild-type human growth hormone, refers to the deletion, insertion, or substitution of any nucleotide or amino acid residue, by chemical, enzymatic, or any other means, in a polynucleotide sequence encoding a wild-type human growth hormone or the amino acid sequence of a wild-type human growth hormone, respectively, such that the amino acid sequence of the resulting human growth hormone comprises at least one N- or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone. In the case of amino acid substitution, both conservative and non-conservative substitutions may be used to create a hGH mutant that contains a new N- or O-linked glycosylation site. [0049] The site for a mutation introducing a new N- or O-linked glycosylation site may be located anywhere in the polypeptide. Exemplary amino acid sequences for human growth hormone mutants are depicted in SEQ ID NOs:3-9. A "mutant human growth hormone" of this invention thus comprises at least one mutated amino acid residue. On the other hand, the wild-type human growth hormone whose coding sequence is modified to generate a mutant human growth hormone is referred to in this application as "the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone." For example, SEQ ID NO:l is the amino acid sequence of the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone for mutant human growth hormones having the amino acid sequences of SEQ ID NOs:3-9.
[0050] The term "effective amount," as used herein, refers to an amount that produces therapeutic effects for which a substance is administered. The effects include the prevention, correction, or inhibition of progression of the symptoms of a disease/condition and related complications to any detectable extent. The exact amount will depend on the purpose of the tteaϊmβnt, aιϊd«- iii"i'e' asfe a a'b "by one skilled in the art using known techniques (see, e.g., Lieberman, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms (vols. 1-3, 1992); Lloyd, The Art, Science and Technology of Pharmaceutical Compounding (1999); and Pickar, Dosage Calculations (1999)). [0051] As used herein, the term "modified sugar," refers to a naturally- or non-naturally- occurring carbohydrate that is enzymatically added onto an amino acid or a glycosyl residue of a peptide in a process of the invention. The modified sugar is selected from a number of enzyme substrates including, but not limited to sugar nucleotides (mono-, di-, and tri- phosphates), activated sugars (e.g., glycosyl halides, glycosyl mesylates) and sugars that are neither activated nor nucleotides. The "modified sugar" is covalently fiinctionalized with a "modifying group." Useful modifying groups include, but are not limited to, water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, biomolecules and the like. The modifying group is preferably not a naturally occurring, or an unmodified carbohydrate. The locus of functionalization with the modifying group is selected such that it does not prevent the "modified sugar" from being added enzymatically to a peptide.
[0052] The term "water-soluble" refers to moieties that have some detectable degree of solubility in water. Methods to detect and/or quantify water solubility are well known in the art. Exemplary water-soluble polymers include peptides, saccharides, poly(ethers), poly(amines), poly(carboxylic acids) and the like. Peptides can have mixed sequences of be composed of a single amino acid, e.g., poly(lysine). An exemplary polysaccharide is poly(sialic acid). An exemplary poly(ether) is poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., m-PEG. Poly(ethylene imine) is an exemplary polyamine, and poly(acrylic) acid is a representative poly(carboxylic acid).
[0053] The polymer backbone of the water-soluble polymer can be poly(ethylene glycol) (i.e. PEG). However, it should be understood that other related polymers are also suitable for use in the practice of this invention and that the use of the term PEG or poly(ethylene glycol) is intended to be inclusive and not exclusive in this respect. The term PEG includes poly(ethylene glycol) in any of its forms, including alkoxy PEG, difunctional PEG, multiarmed PEG, forked PEG, branched PEG, pendent PEG (i.e. PEG or related polymers having one or more functional groups pendent to the polymer backbone), or PEG with degradable linkages therein. [O0S4]!' --'The Λynlef bacrøθhiPc n be linear or branched. Branched polymer backbones are generally known in the art. Typically, a branched polymer has a central branch core moiety and a plurality of linear polymer chains linked to the central branch core. PEG is commonly used in branched forms that can be prepared by addition of ethylene oxide to various polyols, such as glycerol, pentaerythritol and sorbitol. The central branch moiety can also be derived from several amino acids, such as lysine. The branched poly(ethylene glycol) can be represented in general form as R(-PEG-OH).sub.m in which R represents the core moiety, such as glycerol or pentaerythritol, and m represents the number of arms. Multi-armed PEG molecules, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,932,462, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, can also be used as the polymer backbone.
[0055] Many other polymers are also suitable for the invention. Polymer backbones that are non-peptidic and water-soluble, with from 2 to about 300 termini, are particularly useful in the invention. Examples of suitable polymers include, but are not limited to, other poly(alkylene glycols), such as poly(propylene glycol) ("PPG"), copolymers of ethylene glycol and propylene glycol and the like, poly(oxyethylated polyol), poly(olefmic alcohol), poly(vinylpyrrolidone), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamide), poly(α-hydroxy acid), poly(vinyl alcohol), polyphosphazene, polyoxazoline, poly(N-acryloylmorpholine), such as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,629,384, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety, and copolymers, terpolymers, and mixtures thereof. Although the molecular weight of each chain of the polymer backbone can vary, it is typically in the range of from about 100 Da to about 100,000 Da, often from about 6,000 Da to about 80,000 Da.
[0056] The "area under the curve" or "AUC", as used herein in the context of administering a peptide drug to a patient, is defined as total area under the curve that describes the concentration of drug in systemic circulation in the patient as a function of time from zero to infinity.
[0057] The term "half-life" or "Wi", as used herein in the context of administering a peptide drug to a patient, is defined as the time required for plasma concentration of a drug in a patient to be reduced by one half. There may be more than one half-life associated with the peptide drug depending on multiple clearance mechanisms, redistribution, and other mechanisms well known in the art. Usually, alpha and beta half-lives are defined such that the alpha phase is associated with redistribution, and the beta phase is associated with clearance. However, with protein drugs that are, for the most part, confined to the bloodstream! th*e "dan be- at'l^aSϊ two clearance half-lives. For some glycosylated peptides, rapid beta phase clearance may be mediated via receptors on macrophages, or endothelial cells that recognize terminal galactose, N-acetylgalactosamine, N-acetylglucosamine, mannose, or fucose. Slower beta phase clearance may occur via renal glomerular filtration for molecules with an effective radius < 2 nm (approximately 68 kD) and/or specific or nonspecific uptake and metabolism in tissues. GlycoPEGylation may cap terminal sugars (e.g., galactose or N-acetylgalactosamine) and thereby block rapid alpha phase clearance via receptors that recognize these sugars. It may also confer a larger effective radius and thereby decrease the volume of distribution and tissue uptake, thereby prolonging the late beta phase. Thus, the precise impact of glycoPEGylation on alpha phase and beta phase half-lives will vary depending upon the size, state of glycosylation, and other parameters, as is well known in the art. Further explanation of "half- life" is found in Pharmaceutical Biotechnology (1997, DFA Crommelin and RD Sindelar, eds., Harwood Publishers, Amsterdam, pp 101 - 120). [0058] The term "glycoconjugation," as used herein, refers to the enzymatically mediated conjugation of a modified sugar species to an amino acid or glycosyl residue of a polypeptide, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention. A subgenus of "glycoconjugation" is "glycol-PEGylation," in which the modifying group of the modified sugar is poly(ethylene glycol), and alkyl derivative (e.g., m-PEG) or reactive derivative (e.g., H2N-PEG, HOOC-PEG) thereof.
[0059] The terms "large-scale" and "industrial-scale" are used interchangeably and refer to a reaction cycle that produces at least about 250 mg, preferably at least about 500 mg, and more preferably at least about 1 gram of glycoconjugate at the completion of a single reaction cycle. [0060] The term, "glycosyl linking group," as used herein refers to a glycosyl residue to which a modifying group (e.g., PEG moiety, therapeutic moiety, biomolecule) is covalently attached; the glycosyl linking group joins the modifying group to the remainder of the conjugate. In the methods of the invention, the "glycosyl linking group" becomes covalently attached to a glycosylated or unglycosylated peptide, thereby linking the agent to an amino acid and/or glycosyl residue on the peptide. A "glycosyl linking group" is generally derived from a "modified sugar" by the enzymatic attachment of the "modified sugar" to an amino acid and/or glycosyl residue of the peptide. The glycosyl linking group can be a saccharide- derived structure that is degraded during formation of modifying group-modified sugar dϊassette
Figure imgf000018_0001
or the glycosyl linking group may be intact. An "intact glycosyl linking group" refers to a linking group that is derived from a glycosyl moiety in which the saccharide monomer that links the modifying group and to the remainder of the conjugate is not degraded, e.g., oxidized, e.g., by sodium metaperiodate. "Intact glycosyl linking groups" of the invention may be derived from a naturally occurring oligosaccharide by addition of glycosyl unit(s) or removal of one or more glycosyl unit from a parent saccharide structure.
[0061] The term "targeting moiety," as used herein, refers to species that will selectively localize in a particular tissue or region of the body. The localization is mediated by specific recognition of molecular determinants, molecular size of the targeting agent or conjugate, ionic interactions, hydrophobic interactions and the like. Other mechanisms of targeting an agent to a particular tissue or region are known to those of skill in the art. Exemplary targeting moieties include antibodies, antibody fragments, transferrin, HS-glycoprotein, coagulation factors, serum proteins, β-glycoprotein, G-CSF, GM-CSF, M-CSF, EPO and the like.
[0062] As used herein, "therapeutic moiety" means any agent useful for therapy including, but not limited to, antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-tumor drugs, cytotoxins, and radioactive agents. "Therapeutic moiety" includes prodrugs of bioactive agents, constructs in which more than one therapeutic moiety is bound to a carrier, e.g, multivalent agents. Therapeutic moiety also includes proteins and constructs that include proteins. Exemplary proteins include, but are not limited to, Erythropoietin (EPO), Granulocyte Colony Stimulating Factor (GCSF), Granulocyte Macrophage Colony Stimulating Factor (GMCSF), Interferon (e.g., Interferon-α, -β, -γ), Interleukin (e.g., Interleukin II), serum proteins (e.g., Factors Nil, Vila, VIII, IX, and X), Human Chorionic Gonadotropin (HCG), Follicle Stimulating Hormone (FSH) and Lutenizing Hormone (LH) and antibody fusion proteins (e.g. Tumor Necrosis Factor Receptor ((TNFR)/Fc domain fusion protein)).
[0063] As used herein, "anti-tumor drug" means any agent useful to combat cancer including, but not limited to, cytotoxins and agents such as antimetabolites, alkylating agents, anthracyclines, antibiotics, antimitotic agents, procarbazine, hydroxyurea, asparaginase, corticosteroids, interferons and radioactive agents. Also encompassed within the scope of the term "anti-tumor drug," are conjugates of peptides with anti-rumor activity, e.g. TNF-α. Conjugates include, but are not limited to those formed between a therapeutic protein and a gtyeoproteitf of hle 'hveffl,<3iri!;'"-A'lrdpresentative conjugate is that formed between PSGL-1 and TNF-α.
[0064] As used herein, "a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent" means any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracinedione, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, actinomycin D, 1- dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Other toxins include, for example, ricin, CC- 1065 and analogues, the duocarmycins. Still other toxins include diptheria toxin, and snake venom (e.g. , cobra venom).
[0065] As used herein, "a radioactive agent" includes any radioisotope that is effective in diagnosing or destroying a tumor. Examples include, but are not limited to, indium- 111, cobalt-60. Additionally, naturally occurring radioactive elements such as uranium, radium, and thorium, which typically represent mixtures of radioisotopes, are suitable examples of a radioactive agent. The metal ions are typically chelated with an organic chelating moiety.
[0066] Many useful chelating groups, crown ethers, cryptands and the like are known in the art and can be incorporated into the compounds of the invention (e.g., EDTA, DTP A, DOT A, NT A, HDTA, etc. and their phosphonate analogs such as DTPP, EDTP, HDTP, NTP, etc). See, for example, Pitt et al, "The Design of Chelating Agents for the Treatment of Iron Overload," In, INORGANIC CHEMISTRY IN BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE; Martell, Ed.; American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C., 1980, pp. 279-312; Lindoy, THE CHEMISTRY OF MACROCYCLIC LIGAND COMPLEXES; Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1989; Dugas, BIOORGANIC CHEMISTRY; Springer-Nerlag, New York, 1989, and references contained therein.
[0067] Additionally, a manifold of routes allowing the attachment of chelating agents, crown ethers and cyclodextrins to other molecules is available to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Meares et al, "Properties of In Vivo Chelate-Tagged Proteins and Polypeptides." In, MODIFICATION OF PROTEINS: FOOD, NUTRITIONAL, AND PHARMACOLOGICAL ASPECTS;" Feeney, et al, Eds., American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C., 1982, pp. 370-387; Kasina et al, Bioconjugate Chem., 9: 108-117 (1998); Song et al, Bioconjugate Chem., 8: 249-255 (1997). |f Uβ8J« ■■•'AS9i,ugfe'tti,he'r^m.»..''ϊiffirffl'a,ϋεutically acceptable carrier" includes any material, which when combined with the conjugate retains the conjugates' activity and is non-reactive with the subject's immune systems. Examples include, but are not limited to, any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers such as a phosphate buffered saline solution, water, emulsions such as oil/water emulsion, and various types of wetting agents. Other carriers may also include sterile solutions, tablets including coated tablets and capsules. Typically such carriers contain excipients such as starch, milk, sugar, certain types of clay, gelatin, stearic acid or salts thereof, magnesium or calcium stearate, talc, vegetable fats or oils, gums, glycols, or other known excipients. Such carriers may also include flavor and color additives or other ingredients. Compositions comprising such carriers are formulated by well known conventional methods.
[0069] As used herein, "administering," means oral administration, inhalation, administration as a suppository, topical contact, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, intralesional, intranasal or subcutaneous administration, or the implantation of a slow-release device e.g. , a mini-osmotic pump, to the subject. Adminsitration is by any route including parenteral, and transmucosal (e.g., oral, nasal, vaginal, rectal, or transdermal). Parenteral administration includes, e.g., intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arteriole, intradermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraventricular, and intracranial. Moreover, where injection is to treat a tumor, e.g., induce apoptosis, administration may be directly to the tumor and/or into tissues surrounding the tumor. Other modes of delivery include, but are not limited to, the use of liposomal formulations, intravenous infusion, transdermal patches, etc.
[0070] The term "isolated" refers to a material that is substantially or essentially free from components, which are used to produce the material. For peptide conjugates of the invention, the term "isolated" refers to material that is substantially or essentially free from components, which normally accompany the material in the mixture used to prepare the peptide conjugate. "Isolated" and "pure" are used interchangeably. Typically, isolated peptide conjugates of the invention have a level of purity preferably expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of purity for the peptide conjugates is about 60%, about 70%> or about 80% and the upper end of the range of purity is about 70%, about 80%, about 90%> or more than about 90%. [0071] When the peptide conjugates are more than about 90% pure, their purities are also preferably expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of purity is about 90%, about 92%), about 94%, about 96% or about 98%. The upper end of the range of purity is about 92%, about 94%, about 96%, about 98% or about 100% purity. [WW2]» pMfl Waetέrmirϊe'd-b i'My art-recognized method of analysis (e.g., band intensity on a silver stained gel, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, HPLC, or a similar means).
[0073] "Essentially each member of the population," as used herein, describes a characteristic of a population of peptide conjugates of the invention in which a selected percentage of the modified sugars added to a peptide are added to multiple, identical acceptor sites on the peptide. "Essentially each member of the population" speaks to the "homogeneity" of the sites on the peptide conjugated to a modified sugar and refers to conjugates of the invention, which are at least about 80%, preferably at least about 90% and more preferably at least about 95% homogenous. [0074] "Homogeneity," refers to the structural consistency across a population of acceptor moieties to which the modified sugars are conjugated. Thus, in a peptide conjugate of the invention in which each modified sugar moiety is conjugated to an acceptor site having the same structure as the acceptor site to which every other modified sugar is conjugated, the peptide conjugate is said to be about 100% homogeneous. Homogeneity is typically expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of homogeneity for the peptide conjugates is about 60%, about 70%> or about 80% and the upper end of the range of purity is about 70%, about 80%), about 90% or more than about 90%.
[0075] When the peptide conjugates are more than or equal to about 90% homogeneous, their homogeneity is also preferably expressed as a range. The lower end of the range of homogeneity is about 90%>, about 92%, about 94%, about 96%> or about 98%>. The upper end of the range of purity is about 92%, about 94%, about 96%, about 98% or about 100% homogeneity. The purity of the peptide conjugates is typically determined by one or more methods known to those of skill in the art, e.g., liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LC-MS), matrix assisted laser desorption mass time of flight spectrometry (MALDITOF), capillary electrophoresis, and the like.
[0076] "Substantially uniform glycoform" or a "substantially uniform glycosylation pattern," when referring to a glycopeptide species, refers to the percentage of acceptor moieties that are glycosylated by the glycosyltransferase of interest (e.g., fucosyltransferase). For example, in the case of a α 1,2 fucosyltransferase, a substantially uniform fucosylation pattern exists if substantially all (as defined below) of the Galβl,4-GlcNAc-R and sialylated analogues thereof are fucosylated in a peptide conjugate of the invention. It will be understood by one of skill in the art, that the starting material may contain glycosylated a'ccfeptbf moietie ' (e.g. ,"f ucosylated' Galβ 1 ,4-GlcNAc-R moieties). Thus, the calculated percent glycosylation will include acceptor moieties that are glycosylated by the methods of the invention, as well as those acceptor moieties already glycosylated in the starting material.
[0077] The term "substantially" in the above definitions of "substantially uniform" generally means at least about 40%), at least about 70%), at least about 80%), or more preferably at least about 90%>, and still more preferably at least about 95% of the acceptor moieties for a particular glycosyltransferase are glycosylated.
[0078] Other objects, aspects and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the detailed description that follows.
Abbreviations
[0079] PEG, poly(ethyleneglycol); m-PEG, methoxy-ρoly(ethylene glycol); PPG, poly(propyleneglycol); m-PPG, methoxy-poly(propylene glycol); Fuc, fucosyl; Gal, galactosyl; GalNAc, N-acetylgalactosaminyl; Glc, glucosyl; GlcNAc, N-acetylglucosaminyl; Man, mannosyl; ManAc, mannosaminyl acetate; Sia, sialic acid; and NeuAc, N- acetylneuraminy 1.
Introduction
[0080] To improve the effectiveness of recombinant human growth hormone used for therapeutic purposes, the present invention provides genetically engineered mutants of human growth hormone that contain N-linked or O-linked glycosylation sites not present in naturally occurring human growth hormone. While these hGH mutants substantially retain the biological activity of the wild-type hormone, the newly introduced glycosylation sites allow the recombinantly produced hGH mutants to be glycosylated in a large variety of patterns. Moreover, the non-natural glycosylation sites provide loci for conjugating modifying groups to the peptide, e.g., by glycoconjugation. An exemplary modifying group is a water-soluble polymer, such as poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., methoxy-poly(ethylene glycol). Modification of the hGH mutants can improve the stability and retention time of the recombinant hGH in a patient's circulation, reduce their antigenicity, and enhance their ability to target a specific tissue in need of treatment.
The Mutants [0081] The present invention provides mutants of hGH that include one or more O- or N- linked glycosylation sites that are not found in the wild type peptide. The mutants are su'b'strates l r,'etizy 'atιe'lig,l, elosy!lMon at one or more sites that would not normally be glycosylated, or would be poorly glycosylated, in the wild type peptide. Thus, the mutants allow the position of a glycosyl residue or a glycosyl linking group to be engineered to obtain a peptide having selected desirable properties. In addition to the position and number of glycosyl residues or glycosyl linking groups, other properties that can be varied using the mutants and methods of the invention include pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, resistance to proteolysis, immunogenicity, recognition by the reticuloendothelial system, tissue distribution and the like. [0082] Accordingly, in one aspect, the present invention provides an isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone. The mutant human growth hormone comprises an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0083] In another aspect, the present invention provides an expression cassette or a cell that comprises a nucleic acid, e.g., an isolated nucleic acid, including a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone. The mutant human growth hormone includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
[0084] In another aspect, the present invention provides a mutant human growth hormone, that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone. In some embodiments, the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
[0085] In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for making a mutant human growth hormone that includes an N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone. This method comprises the steps of recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone, and glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone at the new glycosylation site. In some embodiments, the cUrfesp'taήdMg''Wι 'itypel!hιϊ aή::gfδ'wth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2. In some preferred embodiments, the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Acquisition of hGH Coding Sequences General Recombinant Technology
[0086] This invention relies on routine techniques in the field of recombinant genetics. Basic texts disclosing the general methods of use in this invention include Sambrook and Russell, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (3rd ed. 2001); Kriegler, Crene Transfer and Expression: A Laboratory Manual (1990); and Ausubel et al, eds., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology ( 1994).
[0087] For nucleic acids, sizes are given in either kilobases (kb) or base pairs (bp). These are estimates derived from agarose or acrylamide gel electrophoresis, from sequenced nucleic acids, or from published DNA sequences. For proteins, sizes are given in kilodaltons (kDa) or amino acid residue numbers. Proteins sizes are estimated from gel electrophoresis, from sequenced proteins, from derived amino acid sequences, or from published protein sequences.
[0088] Oligonucleotides that are not commercially available can be chemically synthesized, e.g., according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method first described by Beaucage & Caruthers, Tetrahedron Lett. 22: 1859-1862 (1981), using an automated synthesizer, as described in Van Devanter et. al, Nucleic Acids Res. 12: 6159-6168 (1984). Purification of oligonucleotides is performed using any art-recognized strategy, e.g. , native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson & Reanier, J. Chrom. 255: 137-149 (1983).
[0089] The sequence of the cloned wild-type human growth hormone genes, polynucleotide encoding mutant human growth hormones, and synthetic oligonucleotides can be verified after cloning using, e.g., the chain termination method for sequencing double-stranded templates of Wallace et al, Gene 16: 21-26 (1981).
Cloning and Subcloning of a Wild-Type hGH Coding Sequence [0090] A number of polynucleotide sequences encoding a wild-type human growth hormone, e.g., GenBank Accession Nos. NM 000515, NM 002059, NM 022556, NM 022557, NM 022558, NM 022559, NM 022560, NM 022561, and NM 022562, have been determined and can be obtained from a commercial supplier.
Figure imgf000025_0001
Ir 'Studies of human genome has made possible a cloning approach where a human DNA sequence database can be searched for any gene segment that has a certain percentage of sequence homology to a known nucleotide sequence, such as one encoding a previously identified human growth hormone. Any DNA sequence so identified can be subsequently obtained by chemical synthesis and/or a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) technique such as overlap extension method. For a short sequence, completely de novo synthesis may be sufficient; whereas further isolation of full length coding sequence from a human cDNA or genomic library using a synthetic probe may be necessary to obtain a larger gene. [0092] Alternatively, a nucleic acid sequence encoding a human growth hormone can be isolated from a human cDNA or genomic DNA library using standard cloning techniques such as polymerase chain reaction (PCR), where homology-based primers can often be derived from a known nucleic acid sequence encoding a human growth hormone. Most commonly used techniques for this purpose are described in standard texts, e.g., Sambrook and Russell, supra.
[0093] cDNA libraries suitable for obtaining a coding sequence for a wild-type human growth hormone may be commercially available or can be constructed. The general methods of isolating mRNA, making cDNA by reverse transcription, ligating cDNA into a recombinant vector, transfecting into a recombinant host for propagation, screening, and cloning are well known (see, e.g., Gubler and Hoffman, Gene, 25: 263-269 (1983); Ausubel et al, supra). Upon obtaining an amplified segment of nucleotide sequence by PCR, the segment can be further used as a probe to isolate the full length polynucleotide sequence encoding the wild-type human growth hormone from the cDNA library. A general description of appropriate procedures can be found in Sambrook and Russell, supra. [0094] A similar procedure can be followed to obtain a full length sequence encoding a wild-type human growth hormone, e.g., any one of the GenBank Accession Nos. mentioned above, from a human genomic library. Human genomic libraries are commercially available or can be constructed according to various art-recognized methods. In general, to construct a genomic library, the DNA is first extracted from an tissue where a human growth hormone is likely found. The DNA is then either mechanically sheared or enzymatically digested to yield fragments of about 12-20 kb in length. The fragments are subsequently separated by gradient centrifugation from polynucleotide fragments of undesired sizes and are inserted in bacteriophage λ vectors. These vectors and phages are packaged in vitro. Recombinant phages are atialyzed'lby"plaqUe hybridization as described in Benton and Davis, Science, 196: 180-182 (1977). Colony hybridization is carried out as described by Grunstein et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 72: 3961-3965 (1975).
[0095] Based on sequence homology, degenerate oligonucleotides can be designed as primer sets and PCR can be performed under suitable conditions (see, e.g., White et al, PCR Protocols: Current Methods and Applications, 1993; Griffin and Griffin, PCR Technology, CRC Press Inc. 1994) to amplify a segment of nucleotide sequence from a cDNA or genomic library. Using the amplified segment as a probe, the full length nucleic acid encoding a wild- type human growth hormone is obtained. [0096] Upon acquiring a nucleic acid sequence encoding a wild- type human growth hormone, the coding sequence can be subcloned into a vector, for instance, an expression vector, so that a recombinant wild-type human growth hormone can be produced from the resulting construct. Further modifications to the wild-type human growth hormone coding sequence, e.g., nucleotide substitutions, may be subsequently made to alter the characteristics of the molecule.
Introducing Mutations into an hGH Sequence
[0097] From an encoding polynucleotide sequence, the amino acid sequence of a wild-type human growth hormone, e.g., SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2, can be determined. Subsequently, this amino acid sequence may be modified to alter the protein's glycosylation pattern, by introducing additional glycosylation site(s) at various locations in the amino acid sequence.
[0098] Several types of protein glycosylation sites are well known in the art. For instance, in eukaryotes, N-linked glycosylation occurs on the asparagine of the consensus sequence Asn-Xaa-Ser/Thr, in which Xaa is any amino acid except proline (Kornfeld et al., Ann Rev Biochem 54:631-664 (1985); Kukuruzinska et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:2145-2149 (1987); Herscovics et al, FASEB J 7:540-550 (1993); and Orlean, Saccharomyces Vol. 3 (1996)). O-linked glycosylation takes place at serine or threonine residues (Tanner et al, Biochim. Biophys. Ada. 906:81-91 (1987); and Hounsell et al, Glycoconj. J. 13:19-26 (1996)). Other glycosylation patterns are formed by linking glycosylphosphatidylinositol to the carboxyl-terminal carboxyl group of the protein (Takeda et al, Trends Biochem. Sci.
20:367-371 (1995); and Udenfriend et al, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 64:593-591 (1995). Based on t s ιowle ϊge" 'sMSbl ^Malons'can thus be introduced into a wild-type human growth hormone sequence to form new glycosylation sites.
[0099] Although direct modification of an amino acid residue within a human growth hormone polypeptide sequence may be suitable to introduce a new N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site, more frequently, introduction of a new glycosylation site is accomplished by mutating the polynucleotide sequence encoding a human growth hormone. This can be achieved by using any of known mutagenesis methods, some of which are discussed below. Exemplary modifications to human growth hormone include those illustrated in SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:4. [0100] A variety of mutation-generating protocols are established and described in the art. See, e.g., Zhang et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 94: 4504-4509 (1997); and Stemmer, Nature, 370: 389-391 (1994). The procedures can be used separately or in combination to produce variants of a set of nucleic acids, and hence variants of encoded polypeptides. Kits for mutagenesis, library construction, and other diversity-generating methods are commercially available.
[0101] Mutational methods of generating diversity include, for example, site-directed mutagenesis (Botstein and Shortle, Science, 229: 1193-1201 (1985)), mutagenesis using uracil-containing templates (Kunkel, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 82: 488-492 (1985)), oligonucleotide-directed mutagenesis (Zoller and Smith, Nucl. Acids Res., 10: 6487-6500 (1982)), phosphorothioate-modified DNA mutagenesis (Taylor et al, Nucl. Acids Res., 13: 8749-8764 and 8765-8787 (1985)), and mutagenesis using gapped duplex DNA (Kramer et al, Nucl. Acids Res., 12: 9441-9456 (1984)).
[0102] Other possible methods for generating mutations include point mismatch repair (Kramer et al, Cell, 38: 879-887 (1984)), mutagenesis using repair-deficient host strains (Carter et al. , Nucl. Acids Res. , 13 : 4431 -4443 ( 1985)), deletion mutagenesis (Eghtedarzadeh and Henikoff, Nucl. Acids Res., 14: 5115 (1986)), restriction-selection and restriction- purification (Wells et al, Phil. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. A, 317: 415-423 (1986)), mutagenesis by total gene synthesis (Nambiar et al, Science, 223: 1299-1301 (1984)), double-strand break repair (Mandecki, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 83: 7177-7181 (1986)), mutagenesis by polynucleotide chain termination methods (U.S. Patent No. 5,965,408), and error-prone PCR (Leung et al, Biotechniques, 1: 11-15 (1989)). Md'di'ficatioiτl'of1' uclei'c Acld fό'r Preferred Codon Usage in a Host Organism [0103] The polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone can be further altered to coincide with the preferred codon usage of a particular host. For example, the preferred codon usage of one strain of bacterial cells can be used to derive a polynucleotide that encodes a mutant human growth hormone of the invention and includes the codons favored by this strain. The frequency of preferred codon usage exhibited by a host cell can be calculated by averaging frequency of preferred codon usage in a large number of genes expressed by the host cell (e.g., calculation service is available from web site of the Kazusa DNA Research Institute, Japan). This analysis is preferably limited to genes that are highly expressed by the host cell. U.S. Patent No. 5,824,864, for example, provides the frequency of codon usage by highly expressed genes exhibited by dicotyledonous plants and monocotyledonous plants.
[0104] At the completion of modification, the mutant human growth hormone coding sequences are verified by sequencing and are then subcloned into an appropriate expression vector for recombinant production in the same manner as the wild-type human growth hormones.
Expression and Purification of the Mutant hGH
[0105] Following sequence verification, the mutant human growth hormone of the present invention can be produced using routine techniques in the field of recombinant genetics, relying on the polynucleotide sequences encoding the polypeptide disclosed herein.
Expression Systems
[0106] To obtain high level expression of a nucleic acid encoding a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention, one typically subclones a polynucleotide encoding the mutant human growth hormone into an expression vector that contains a strong promoter to direct transcription, a transcription translation terminator and a ribosome binding site for translational initiation. Suitable bacterial promoters are well known in the art and described, e.g., in Sambrook and Russell, supra, and Ausubel et al, supra. Bacterial expression systems for expressing the wild-type or mutant human growth hormone are available in, e.g., E. coli, Bacillus sp., Salmonella, and Caulobader. Kits for such expression systems are commercially available. Eukaryotic expression systems for mammalian cells, yeast, and insect cells are well known in the art and are also commercially available. In one
Figure imgf000029_0001
eukaryotici'ex fe'ssion vector is an adenoviral vector, an adeno-associated vector, or a retroviral vector.
[0107] The promoter used to direct expression of a heterologous nucleic acid depends on the particular application. The promoter is optionally positioned about the same distance from the heterologous transcription start site as it is from the transcription start site in its natural setting. As is known in the art, however, some variation in this distance can be accommodated without loss of promoter function.
[0108] In addition to the promoter, the expression vector typically includes a transcription unit or expression cassette that contains all the additional elements required for the expression of the mutant human growth hormone in host cells. A typical expression cassette thus contains a promoter operably linked to the nucleic acid sequence encoding the mutant human growth hormone and signals required for efficient polyadenylation of the transcript, ribosome binding sites, and translation termination. The nucleic acid sequence encoding the human growth hormone is typically linked to a cleavable signal peptide sequence to promote secretion of the human growth hormone by the transformed cell. Such signal peptides include, among others, the signal peptides from tissue plasminogen activator, insulin, and neuron growth factor, and juvenile hormone esterase of Heliothis virescens. Additional elements of the cassette may include enhancers and, if genomic DNA is used as the structural gene, introns with functional splice donor and acceptor sites. [0109] In addition to a promoter sequence, the expression cassette should also contain a transcription termination region downstream of the structural gene to provide for efficient termination. The termination region may be obtained from the same gene as the promoter sequence or may be obtained from different genes.
[0110] The particular expression vector used to transport the genetic information into the cell is not particularly critical. Any of the conventional vectors used for expression in eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells may be used. Standard bacterial expression vectors include plasmids such as pBR322 based plasmids, pSKF, pET23D, and fusion expression systems such as GST and LacZ. Epitope tags can also be added to recombinant proteins to provide convenient methods of isolation, e.g., c-myc. [0111] Expression vectors containing regulatory elements from eukaryotic viruses are typically used in eukaryotic expression vectors, e.g., SV40 vectors, papilloma virus vectors, and vectors derived from Epstein-Barr virus. Other exemplary eukaryotic vectors include jpMSO, φAVtKWA" ,-'pMTO 0/A7'pMAMneo-5, baculovirus pDSVE, and any other vector allowing expression of proteins under the direction of the SV40 early promoter, SV40 later promoter, metallothionein promoter, murine mammary tumor virus promoter, Rous sarcoma virus promoter, polyhedrin promoter, or other promoters shown effective for expression in eukaryotic cells.
[0112] Some expression systems have markers that provide gene amplification such as thymidine kinase, hygromycin B phosphotransferase, and dihydrofolate reductase. Alternatively, high yield expression systems not involving gene amplification are also suitable, such as a baculovirus vector in insect cells, with a polynucleotide sequence encoding the mutant human growth hormone under the direction of the polyhedrin promoter or other strong baculovirus promoters.
[0113] The elements that are typically included in expression vectors also include a replicon that functions in E. coli, a gene encoding antibiotic resistance to permit selection of bacteria that harbor recombinant plasmids, and unique restriction sites in nonessential regions of the plasmid to allow insertion of eukaryotic sequences. The particular antibiotic resistance gene chosen is not critical, any of the many resistance genes known in the art are suitable. The prokaryotic sequences are optionally chosen such that they do not interfere with the replication of the DNA in eukaryotic cells, if necessary. Similar to antibiotic resistance selection markers, metabolic selection markers based on known metabolic pathways may also be used as a means for selecting transformed host cells.
[0114] When periplasmic expression of a recombinant protein (e.g. , a hGH mutant of the present invention) is desired, the expression vector further comprises a sequence encoding a secretion signal, such as the E. coli OppA (Periplasmic Oligopeptide Binding Protein) secretion signal or a modified version thereof, which is directly connected to 5' of the coding sequence of the protein to be expressed. This signal sequence directs the recombinant protein produced in cytoplasm through the cell membrane into the periplasmic space. The expression vector may further comprise a coding sequence for signal peptidase 1, which is capable of enzymatically cleaving the signal sequence when the recombinant protein is entering the periplasmic space. More detailed description for periplasmic production of a recombinant protein can be found in, e.g. , Gray et al. , Gene 39: 247-254 (1985), U.S. Patent Nos. 6,160,089 and 6,436,674. [θl'15] l[ Αs-dϊs'dulsse'd above a fief son- skilled in the art will recognize that various conservative substitutions can be made to any wild-type or mutant human growth hormone or its coding sequence while still retaining the biological activity of the human growth hormone. Moreover, modifications of a polynucleotide coding sequence may also be made to accommodate preferred codon usage in a particular expression host without altering the resulting amino acid sequence.
Transfection Methods
[0116] Standard transfection methods are used to produce bacterial, mammalian, yeast, insect, or plant cell lines that express large quantities of the mutant human growth hormone, which are then purified using standard techniques (see, e.g., Colley et al, J. Biol. Chem. 264: 17619-17622 (1989); Guide to Protein Purification, in Methods in Enzymology, vol. 182 (Deutscher, ed., 1990)). Transformation of eukaiyotic and prokaryotic cells are performed according to standard techniques (see, e.g., Morrison, J, Bad. 132: 349-351 (1977); Clark- Curtiss & Curtiss, Methods in Enzymology 101: 347-362 (Wu et al, eds, 1983). [0117] Any of the well known procedures for introducing foreign nucleotide sequences into host cells may be used. These include the use of calcium phosphate transfection, polybrene, protoplast fusion, electroporation, liposomes, microinjection, plasma vectors, viral vectors and any of the other well known methods for introducing cloned genomic DNA, cDNA, synthetic DNA, or other foreign genetic material into a host cell (see, e.g., Sambrook and Russell, supra). It is only necessary that the particular genetic engineering procedure used be capable of successfully introducing at least one gene into the host cell capable of expressing the mutant human growth hormone.
Detection of Expression of Mutant hGH in Host Cells
[0118] After the expression vector is introduced into appropriate host cells, the transfected cells are cultured under conditions favoring expression of the mutant human growth hormone. The cells are then screened for the expression of the recombinant polypeptide, which is subsequently recovered from the culture using standard techniques (see, e.g., Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (1982); U.S. Patent No. 4,673,641; Ausubel et al, supra; and Sambrook and Russell, supra). [0119] Several general methods for screening gene expression are well known among those skilled in the art. First, gene expression can be detected at the nucleic acid level. A variety of methods of specific DNA and RNA measurement using nucleic acid hybridization t 'chnιqufes"a're"ci,oirnrnbn'Iy Used '('e.g., Sambrook and Russell, supra). Some methods involve an electrophoretic separation (e.g., Southern blot for detecting DNA and Northern blot for detecting RNA), but detection of DNA or RNA can be carried out without electrophoresis as well (such as by dot blot). The presence of nucleic acid encoding a mutant human growth hormone in transfected cells can also be detected by PCR or RT-PCR using sequence-specific primers.
[0120] Second, gene expression can be detected at the polypeptide level. Various immunological assays are routinely used by those skilled in the art to measure the level of a gene product, particularly using polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that react specifically with a mutant human growth hormone of the present invention, such as a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, or 5, (e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual, Chapter 14, Cold Spring Harbor, 1988; Kohler and Milstein, Nature, 256: 495-497 (1975)). Such techniques require antibody preparation by selecting antibodies with high specificity against the mutant human growth hormone or an antigenic portion thereof. The methods of raising polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies are well established and their descriptions can be found in the literature, see, e.g., Harlow and Lane, supra; Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol, 6: 511-519 (1976). More detailed descriptions of preparing antibody against the mutant human growth hormone of the present invention and conducting immunological assays detecting the mutant human growth hormone are provided in a later section.
Purification of Recombinantly Produced Mutant hGH
[0121] Once the expression of a recombinant mutant human growthchormone in transfected host cells is confirmed, the host cells are then cultured in an appropriate scale for the purpose of purifying the recombinant polypeptide.
Purification of Recombinantly Produced Mutant hGH from Bacteria
[0122] When the mutant human growth hormones of the present invention are produced recombinantly by transformed bacteria in large amounts, typically after promoter induction, although expression can be constitutive, the proteins may form insoluble aggregates. There are several protocols that are suitable for purification of protein inclusion bodies. For example, purification of aggregate proteins (hereinafter referred to as inclusion bodies) typically involves the extraction, separation and/or purification of inclusion bodies by disruption of bacterial cells, e.g., by incubation in a buffer of about 100-150 μg/ml lysozyme and"0.'l% N ϊιide't 40,'"a' ribh-iσhie detergent. The cell suspension can be ground using a Polytron grinder (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, NY). Alternatively, the cells can be sonicated on ice. Alternate methods of lysing bacteria are described in Ausubel et al. and Sambrook and Russell, both supra, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art. [0123] The cell suspension is generally centrifuged and the pellet containing the inclusion bodies resuspended in buffer which does not dissolve but washes the inclusion bodies, e.g., 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 7.2), 1 mM EDTA, 150 mM NaCl and 2% Triton-X 100, a non-ionic detergent. It may be necessary to repeat the wash step to remove as much cellular debris as possible. The remaining pellet of inclusion bodies may be resuspended in an appropriate buffer (e.g., 20 mM sodium phosphate, pH 6.8, 150 mM NaCl). Other appropriate buffers will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
[0124] Following the washing step, the inclusion bodies are solubilized by the addition of a solvent that is both a strong hydrogen acceptor and a strong hydrogen donor (or a combination of solvents each having one of these properties). The proteins that formed the inclusion bodies may then be renatured by dilution or dialysis with a compatible buffer. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, urea (from about 4 M to about 8 M), formamide (at least about 80%>, volume/volume basis), and guanidine hydrochloride (from about 4 M to about 8 M). Some solvents that are capable of solubilizing aggregate-forming proteins, such as SDS (sodium dodecyl sulfate) and 70% formic acid, may be inappropriate for use in this procedure due to the possibility of irreversible denaturation of the proteins, accompanied by a lack of immunogenicity and/or activity. Although guanidine hydrochloride and similar agents are denaturants, this denaturation is not irreversible and renaturation may occur upon removal (by dialysis, for example) or dilution of the denaturant, allowing re-formation of the immunologically and/or biologically active protein of interest. After solubilization, the protein can be separated from other bacterial proteins by standard separation techniques. For further description of purifying recombinant human growth hormone from bacterial inclusion body, see, e.g., Patra et al, Protein Expression and Purification 18: 182-190 (2000).
[0125] Alternatively, it is possible to purify recombinant polypeptides, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone, from bacterial periplasm. Where the recombinant protein is exported into the periplasm of the bacteria, the periplasmic fraction of the bacteria can be isolated by cold osmotic shock in addition to other methods known to those of skill in the art (see e.g., Ausubel et al, supra). To isolate recombinant proteins from the periplasm, the eWϊal'ceils-'are' c'eritrifύf e :,tblifόrm a pellet. The pellet is resuspended in a buffer containing 20%) sucrose. To lyse the cells, the bacteria are centrifuged and the pellet is resuspended in ice-cold 5 mM MgSO4 and kept in an ice bath for approximately 10 minutes. The cell suspension is centrifuged and the supernatant decanted and saved. The recombinant proteins present in the supernatant can be separated from the host proteins by standard separation techniques well known to those of skill in the art.
Standard Protein Separation Techniques for Purification
[0126] When a recombinant polypeptide, e.g., the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention, is expressed in host cells in a soluble form, its purification can follow the standard protein purification procedure described below.
Solubility Fractionation
[0127] Often as an initial step, and if the protein mixture is complex, an initial salt fractionation can separate many ofthe unwanted host cell proteins (or proteins derived from the cell culture media) from the recombinant protein of interest, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention. The preferred salt is ammonium sulfate. Ammonium sulfate precipitates proteins by effectively reducing the amount of water in the protein mixture. Proteins then precipitate on the basis of their solubility. The more hydrophobic a protein is, the more likely it is to precipitate at lower ammonium sulfate concentrations. A typical protocol is to add saturated ammonium sulfate to a protein solution so that the resultant ammonium sulfate concentration is between 20-30%). This will precipitate the most hydrophobic proteins. The precipitate is discarded (unless the protein of interest is hydrophobic) and ammonium sulfate is added to the supernatant to a concentration known to precipitate the protein of interest. The precipitate is then solubilized in buffer and the excess salt removed if necessary, through either dialysis or diafiltration. Other methods that rely on solubility of proteins, such as cold ethanol precipitation, are well known to those of skill in the art and can be used to fractionate complex protein mixtures.
Size Differential Filtration
[0128] Based on a calculated molecular weight, a protein of greater and lesser size can be isolated using ultrafiltration through membranes of different pore sizes (for example, Amicon or Millipore membranes). As a first step, the protein mixture is ultrafiltered through a membrane with a pore size that has a lower molecular weight cut-off than the molecular weight of a protein of interest, e.g., a mutant human growth hormone. The retentate ofthe tilt afi{Mti h fe,|then-ύltfafiTtefed against" a membrane with a molecular cut off greater than the molecular weight ofthe protein of interest. The recombinant protein will pass through the membrane into the filtrate. The filtrate can then be chromatographed as described below.
Column Chromatography [0129] The proteins of interest (such as the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention) can also be separated from other proteins on the basis of their size, net surface charge, hydrophobicity, or affinity for ligands. In addition, antibodies raised against human growth hormone can be conjugated to column matrices and the human growth hormone immunopurified. All of these methods are well known in the art. [0130] It will be apparent to one of skill that chromatographic techniques can be performed at any scale and using equipment from many different manufacturers (e.g., Pharmacia Biotech).
Immunoassays for Detection of Mutant hGH Expression
[0131] To confirm the production of a recombinant mutant human growth hormone, immunological assays may be useful to detect in a sample the expression ofthe polypeptide. Immunological assays are also useful for quantifying the expression level ofthe recombinant hormone. Antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone are necessary for carrying out these immunological assays.
Figure imgf000035_0001
[0132] Methods for producing polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that react specifically with an immunogen of interest are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Coligan, Current Protocols in Immunology Wiley/Greene, NY, 1991; Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual Cold Spring Harbor Press, NY, 1989; Stites et al. (eds.) Basic and Clinical Immunology (4th ed.) Lange Medical Publications, Los Altos, CA, and references cited therein; Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice (2d ed.) Academic Press, New York, NY, 1986; and Kohler and Milstein Nature 256: 495-497, 1975). Such techniques include antibody preparation by selection of antibodies from libraries of recombinant antibodies in phage or similar vectors (see, Huse et al., Science 246: 1275-1281, 1989; and Ward et al, Nature 341: 544-546, 1989). [0133] In order to produce antisera containing antibodies with desired specificity, the polypeptide of interest (e.g., a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention) or an aSitrgemc1 ffagr n't thtrebf 6a'n b ϊϊsed to immunize suitable animals, e.g., mice, rabbits, or primates. A standard adjuvant, such as Freund's adjuvant, can be used in accordance with a standard immunization protocol. Alternatively, a synthetic antigenic peptide derived from that particular polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein and subsequently used as an immunogen.
[0134] The animal's immune response to the immunogen preparation is monitored by taking test bleeds and determining the titer of reactivity to the antigen of interest. When appropriately high titers of antibody to the antigen are obtained, blood is collected from the animal and antisera are prepared. Further fractionation ofthe antisera to enrich antibodies specifically reactive to the antigen and purification ofthe antibodies can be performed subsequently, see, Harlow and Lane, supra, and the general descriptions of protein purification provided above.
[0135] Monoclonal antibodies are obtained using various techniques familiar to those of skill in the art. Typically, spleen cells from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519, 1976). Alternative methods of immortalization include, e.g., transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in the art. Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies ofthe desired specificity and affinity for the antigen, and the yield ofthe monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into the peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host.
[0136] Additionally, monoclonal antibodies may also be recombinantly produced upon identification of nucleic acid sequences encoding an antibody with desired specificity or a binding fragment of such antibody by screening a human B cell cDNA library according to the general protocol outlined by Huse et al, supra. The general principles and methods of recombinant polypeptide production discussed above are applicable for antibody production by recombinant methods.
[0137] When desired, antibodies capable of specifically recognizing a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention can be tested for their cross-reactivity against the wild- type human growth hormone and thus distinguished from the antibodies against the wild-type protein. For instance, antisera obtained from an animal immunized with a mutant human growth hormone can be run through a column on which a wild-type human growth ήϋrmOήe'is'i'ϊtirh'bbilized " he-pbttion ofthe antisera that passes through the column recognizes only the mutant human growth hormone and not the wild-type human growth hormone. Similarly, monoclonal antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone can also be screened for their exclusivity in recognizing only the mutant but not the wild-type human growth hormone.
[0138] Polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies that specifically recognize only the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention but not the wild-type human growth hormone are useful for isolating the mutant protein from the wild-type protein, for example, by incubating a sample with a mutant human growth hormone-specific polyclonal or monoclonal antibody immobilized on a solid support.
Immunoassays for Detecting Mutant hGH Expression
[0139] Once antibodies specific for a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention are available, the amount ofthe polypeptide in a sample, e.g., a cell lysate, can be measured by a variety of immunoassay methods providing qualitative and quantitative results to a skilled artisan. For a review of immunological and immunoassay procedures in general see, e.g., Stites, supra; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,366,241; 4,376,110; 4,517,288; and 4,837,168.
Labeling in Immunoassays
[0140] Immunoassays often utilize a labeling agent to specifically bind to and label the binding complex formed by the antibody and the target protein. The labeling agent may itself be one ofthe moieties comprising the antibody/target protein complex, or may be a third moiety, such as another antibody, that specifically binds to the antibody/target protein complex. A label may be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means. Examples include, but are not limited to, magnetic beads (e.g., Dynabeads™), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein isothiocyanate, Texas red, rhodamine, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., 3H, I251, 35S, 14C, or
32P), enzymes (e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, and others commonly used in an ELISA), and colorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads.
[0141] In some cases, the labeling agent is a second antibody bearing a detectable label. Alternatively, the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies ofthe species from which the second antibody is defϊvfed." 'I'he-S ebϊϊα'i ritibO' yiiΘdrii'rJi' modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
[0142] Other proteins capable of specifically binding immunoglobulin constant regions, such as protein A or protein G, can also be used as the label agents. These proteins are normal constituents ofthe cell walls of streptococcal bacteria. They exhibit a strong non- immunogenic reactivity with immunoglobulin constant regions from a variety of species (see, generally, Kronval, et al. J. Immunol, 111: 1401-1406 (1973); and Akerstrom, et al., J. Immunol, 135: 2589-2542 (1985)).
Immunoassay Formats [0143] Immunoassays for detecting a target protein of interest (e.g. , a mutant human growth hormone) from samples may be either competitive or noncompetitive.
Noncompetitive immunoassays are assays in which the amount of captured target protein is directly measured. In one preferred "sandwich" assay, for example, the antibody specific for the target protein can be bound directly to a solid substrate where the antibody is immobilized. It then captures the target protein in test samples. The antibody/target protein complex thus immobilized is then bound by a labeling agent, such as a second or third antibody bearing a label, as described above.
[0144] In competitive assays, the amount of target protein in a sample is measured indirectly by measuring the amount of an added (exogenous) target protein displaced (or competed away) from an antibody specific for the target protein by the target protein present in the sample. In a typical example of such an assay, the antibody is immobilized and the exogenous target protein is labeled. Since the amount ofthe exogenous target protein bound to the antibody is inversely proportional to the concentration ofthe target protein present in the sample, the target protein level in the sample can thus be determined based on the amount of exogenous target protein bound to the antibody and thus immobilized.
[0145] In some cases, western blot (immunoblot) analysis is used to detect and quantify the presence of a mutant human growth hormone in the samples. The technique generally comprises separating sample proteins by gel electrophoresis on the basis of molecular weight, transferring the separated proteins to a suitable solid support (such as a nitrocellulose filter, a nylon filter, or a derivatized nylon filter) and incubating the samples with the antibodies that specifically bind the target protein. These antibodies may be directly labeled or alternatively niia »b isύtøe ϊ!iMtl .detfe *I"USirif 'labeled antibodies (e.g., labeled sheep anti-mouse antibodies) that specifically bind to the antibodies against a mutant human growth hormone.
[0146] Other assay formats include liposome immunoassays (LIA), which use liposomes designed to bind specific molecules (e.g., antibodies) and release encapsulated reagents or markers. The released chemicals are then detected according to standard techniques (see, Monroe et al, Amer. Clin. Prod. Rev., 5: 34-41 (1986)).
Glycosylation and Glycoconjugation of the Mutant hGH
Glycosylation and Glycoconjugation by Enzymatic Methods
[0147] Post-expression in vitro modification of peptides is an attractive strategy to remedy the deficiencies of methods that rely on controlling glycosylation by engineering expression systems; including both modification of glycan structures or introduction of glycans at novel sites. A comprehensive arsenal of enzymes that transfer saccharide donor moieties is becoming available, making in vitro enzymatic synthesis of glycoconjugates with custom designed glycosylation patterns and glycosyl structures possible. See, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,876,980; 6,030,815; 5,728,554; 5,922,577; and published patent applications WO 98/31826;- WO 01/88117; WO 03/031464; WO 03/046150; WO 03/045980; WO 03/093448; WO 04/009838; US2002/142370; US2003/040037; US2003/180835; US2004/063911; US2003/207406; and US2003/124645.
[0148] The invention provides methods for preparing conjugates of glycosylated and unglycosylated mutant human growth hormones, which have new glycosylation sites that do not exist in the corresponding wild-type hGH. Such conjugation may take place directly on the appropriate sugar units of a glycosylated mutant hGH, or following the removal (i.e., "trimming back") of any undesired sugar units. The conjugates are formed between peptides and diverse species such as water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, targeting moieties and the like. Also provided are conjugates that include two or more peptides linked together through a linker arm, i.e., multifunctional conjugates. The multi-functional conjugates ofthe invention can include two or more copies ofthe same peptide or a collection of diverse peptides with different structures, and/or properties.
[0149] The conjugates of the invention are formed by the enzymatic attachment of a modified sugar to the glycosylated or unglycosylated peptide. The modified sugar, when interposed between the peptide and the modifying group on the sugar becomes what is referred to herein as "an intact glycosyl linking group." Using the exquisite selectivity of eruzyrneS Sufe ^a's'f- iybbs iltfariSfeia^e-s, the present method provides peptides that bear a desired group at one or more specific locations. Thus, according to the present invention, a modified sugar is attached directly to a selected locus on the peptide chain or, alternatively, the modified sugar is appended onto a carbohydrate moiety of a glycopeptide. Peptides in which modified sugars are bound to both a glycopeptide carbohydrate and directly to an amino acid residue ofthe peptide backbone are also within the scope ofthe present invention.
[0150] In contrast to known chemical and enzymatic peptide elaboration strategies, the methods ofthe invention, make it possible to assemble peptides and glycopeptides that have a substantially homogeneous derivatization pattern; the enzymes used in the invention are generally selective for a particular amino acid residue or combination of amino acid residues ofthe peptide. The methods are also practical for large-scale production of modified peptides and glycopeptides. Thus, the methods ofthe invention provide a practical means for large- scale preparation of glycopeptides having preselected uniform derivatization patterns. The methods are particularly well suited for modification of therapeutic peptides, including but not limited to, glycopeptides that are incompletely glycosylated during production in cell culture cells (e.g., mammalian cells, insect cells, plant cells, fungal cells, yeast cells, or prokaryotic cells) or transgenic plants or animals.
[0151] The methods ofthe invention also provide conjugates of glycosylated and unglycosylated peptides with increased therapeutic half-life due to, for example, reduced clearance rate, or reduced rate of uptake by the immune or reticuloendothelial system (RES). Moreover, the methods ofthe invention provide a means for masking antigenic determinants on peptides, thus reducing or eliminating a host immune response against the peptide. Selective attachment of targeting agents can also be used to target a peptide to a particular tissue or cell surface receptor that is specific for the particular targeting agent.
The Conjugates
[0152] In a first aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate between a selected modifying group and an hGH mutant peptide having a glycosylation site not present in the wild type peptide. The modifying group may be attached at the mutant glycosylation site or at a site that is present in the wild type peptide. [0153] The link between the peptide and the modifying includes a glycosyl linking group interposed between the peptide and the selected moiety. As discussed herein, the selected moiety is essentially any species that can be attached to a saccharide unit, resulting in a ^modified M r8Jtttti!at s%eb 6grii 'by an appropriate transferase enzyme, which appends the modified sugar onto the peptide. The saccharide component ofthe modified sugar, when interposed between the peptide and a selected moiety, becomes a "glycosyl linking group," e.g., an "intact glycosyl linking group." The glycosyl linking group is formed from any mono- or oligo-saccharide that, after modification with the modifying group, is a substrate for an enzyme that adds the modified sugar to an amino acid or glycosyl residue of a peptide. [0154] The glycosyl linking group can be, or can include, a saccharide moiety that is degradatively modified during the addition ofthe modifying group. For example, the glycosyl linking group can be derived from a saccharide residue that is produced by oxidative degradation of an intact saccharide to the corresponding aldehyde, e.g., via the action of metaperiodate, and subsequently converted to a Schiff base with an appropriate amine, which is then reduced to the corresponding amine.
[0155] The conjugates ofthe invention will typically correspond to the general structure:
Figure imgf000041_0001
in which the symbols a, b, c, d and s represent a positive, non-zero integer; and t is either 0 or a positive integer. The "agent" is a therapeutic agent, a bioactive agent, a detectable label, water-soluble moiety (e.g., PEG, m-PEG, PPG, and m-PPG) or the like. The "agent" can be a peptide, e.g., enzyme, antibody, antigen, etc. The linker can be any of a wide array of linking groups, infra. Alternatively, the linker may be a single bond or a "zero order linker." [0156] In an exemplary embodiment, the selected modifying group is a water-soluble polymer, e.g., m-PEG. The water-soluble polymer is covalently attached to the peptide via a glycosyl linking group. The glycosyl linking group is covalently attached to an amino acid residue or a glycosyl residue ofthe peptide. The invention also provides conjugates in which an amino acid residue and a glycosyl residue are modified with a glycosyl linking group. [0157] An exemplary water-soluble polymer is poly(ethylene glycol), e.g., methoxy- poly(ethylene glycol). The poly(ethylene glycol) used in the present invention is not restricted to any particular form or molecular weight range. The poly(ethylene glycol) molecular weight is preferably between 500 and 100,000. A molecular weight of 500-60,000 is preferably used and preferably of from 1,000-40,000. More preferably, the molecular weight is from about 5,000 to about 40,000. [0T58]1 "' Ifr'a'rib'fcher em bdϊ'n 'ent the poly(ethylene glycol) is a branched PEG having more than one PEG moiety attached. Examples of branched PEGs are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,932,462; U.S. Pat. No. 5,342,940; U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,575; U.S. Pat. No. 5,919,455; U.S. Pat. No. 6,113,906; U.S. Pat. No. 5,183,660; WO 02/09766; Kodera Y., Bioconjugate Chemistry 5: 283-288 (1994); and Yamasaki et al., Agric. Biol. Chem., 52: 2125-2127, 1998. In a preferred embodiment the molecular weight of each poly(ethylene glycol) ofthe branched PEG is 5,000-20,000.
[0159] In addition to providing conjugates that are formed through an enzymatically added glycosyl linking group, the present invention provides conjugates that are highly homogenous in their substitution patterns. Using the methods ofthe invention, it is possible to form peptide conjugates in which essentially all ofthe modified sugar moieties across a population of conjugates ofthe invention are attached to multiple copies of a structurally identical amino acid or glycosyl residue. Thus, in a second aspect, the invention provides a peptide conjugate having a population of water-soluble polymer moieties, which are covalently bound to the peptide through an intact glycosyl linking group. In a preferred conjugate ofthe invention, essentially each member ofthe population is bound via the glycosyl linking group to a glycosyl residue ofthe peptide, and each glycosyl residue ofthe peptide to which the glycosyl linking group is attached has the same structure.
[0160] Also provided is a peptide conjugate having a population of water-soluble polymer moieties covalently bound thereto through a glycosyl linking group. In a preferred embodiment, essentially every member ofthe population of water soluble polymer moieties is bound to an amino acid residue ofthe peptide via a glycosyl linking group, and each amino acid residue having a glycosyl linking group attached thereto has the same structure.
[0161] The present invention also provides conjugates analogous to those described above in which the peptide is conjugated to a therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, targeting moiety, toxin moiety or the like via an intact glycosyl linking group. Each ofthe above- recited moieties can be a small molecule, natural polymer (e.g., polypeptide) or synthetic polymer.
[0162] In an exemplary embodiment, mutant human growth hormone is conjugated to transferrin via a bifunctional linker that includes an intact glycosyl linking group at each terminus ofthe PEG moiety (Scheme 1). For example, one terminus ofthe PEG linker is fun'bti nalized'iwiltlll
Figure imgf000043_0001
linker that is attached to transferrin and the other is fiinctionalized with an intact GalNAc linker that is attached to the mutant hGH.
[0163] The conjugates ofthe invention can include intact glycosyl linking groups that are mono- or multi-valent (e.g., antennary structures). Thus, conjugates ofthe invention include both species in which a selected moiety is attached to a peptide via a monovalent glycosyl linking group. Also included within the invention are conjugates in which more than one selected moiety is attached to a peptide via a multivalent linking group.
[0164] In a still further embodiment, the invention provides conjugates that localize selectively in a particular tissue due to the presence of a targeting agent as a component ofthe conjugate. In an exemplary embodiment, the targeting agent is a protein. Exemplary proteins include transferrin (brain, blood pool), HS-glycoprotein (bone, brain, blood pool), antibodies (brain, tissue with antibody-specific antigen, blood pool), coagulation factors V- XII (damaged tissue, clots, cancer, blood pool), serum proteins, e.g., α-acid glycoprotein, fetuin, α-fetal protein (brain, blood pool), β2-glycoprotein (liver, atherosclerosis plaques, brain, blood pool), G-CSF, GM-CSF, M-CSF, and EPO (immune stimulation, cancers, blood pool, red blood cell overproduction, neuroprotection), albumin (increase in half-life), and lipoprotein E.
The Methods
[0165] In addition to the conjugates discussed above, the present invention provides methods for preparing these and other conjugates. Thus, in a further aspect, the invention provides a method of forming a covalent conjugate between a selected moiety and a peptide. Additionally, the invention provides methods for targeting conjugates ofthe invention to a particular tissue or region ofthe body. Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for preventing, curing, or ameliorating a disease state by administering a conjugate ofthe invention to a subject at risk of developing the disease or a subject that has the disease.
[0166] In exemplary embodiments, the conjugate is formed between a water-soluble polymer, a therapeutic moiety, targeting moiety or a biomolecule, and a glycosylated or non- glycosylated peptide. The polymer, therapeutic moiety or biomolecule is conjugated to the peptide via an intact glycosyl linking group, which is interposed between, and covalently linked to both the peptide and the modifying group (e.g., water-soluble polymer). The method includes contacting the peptide with a mixture containing a modified sugar and a glycosyltransferase for which the modified sugar is a substrate. The reaction is conducted u'hcϊer
Figure imgf000044_0001
covalent bond between the modified sugar and the peptide. The sugar moiety ofthe modified sugar is preferably selected from nucleotide sugars, activated sugars, and sugars that are neither nucleotides nor activated.
[0167] The acceptor peptide (glycosylated or non-glycosylated) is typically synthesized de novo, or recombinantly expressed in a prokaryotic cell (e.g., bacterial cell, such as E. coli) or in a eukaryotic cell such as a mammalian, yeast, insect, fungal or plant cell. The peptide can be either a full-length protein or a fragment. Moreover, the peptide can be a wild type or mutated peptide. In an exemplary embodiment, the peptide includes a mutation that adds one or more consensus glycosylation sites to the peptide sequence. [0168] The method of the invention also provides for modification of incompletely glycosylated peptides that are produced recombinantly. Many recombinantly produced glycoproteins are incompletely glycosylated, exposing carbohydrate residues that may have undesirable properties, e.g., immunogenicity, recognition by the RES. Employing a modified sugar in a method ofthe invention, the peptide can be simultaneously further glycosylated and derivatized with, e.g., a water-soluble polymer, therapeutic agent, or the like. The sugar moiety ofthe modified sugar can be the residue that would properly be conjugated to the acceptor in a fully glycosylated peptide, or another sugar moiety with desirable properties.
[0169] Peptides modified by the methods ofthe invention can be synthetic or wild-type peptides or they can be mutated peptides, produced by methods known in the art, such as site- directed mutagenesis. Glycosylation of peptides is typically either N-linked or O-linked. An exemplary N-linkage is the attachment ofthe modified sugar to the side chain of an asparagine residue. The tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X- threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of a carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain. Thus, the presence of either of these tripeptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site. O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one sugar (e.g., N- aceylgalactosamine, galactose, mannose, GlcNAc, glucose, fucose or xylose) to a the hydroxy side chain of a hydroxyamino acid, preferably serine or threonine, although 5- hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used. [0170] Addition of glycosylation sites to a peptide or other structure is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more glycosylation sites. The addition may also be made by the incorporation of one or more s 6όϊesllpfes'dhtϊhlg'iari'::LOH'''|iiΘup^ 'preferably serine or threonine residues, within the sequence ofthe peptide (for O-linked glycosylation sites). The addition may be made by mutation or by full chemical synthesis ofthe peptide. The peptide amino acid sequence is preferably altered through changes at the DNA level, particularly by mutating the DNA encoding the peptide at preselected bases such that codons are generated that will translate into the desired amino acids. The DNA mutation(s) are preferably made using methods known in the art.
[0171] In an exemplary embodiment, the glycosylation site is added by shuffling polynucleotides. Polynucleotides encoding a candidate peptide can be modulated with DNA shuffling protocols. DNA shuffling is a process of recursive recombination and mutation, performed by random fragmentation of a pool of related genes, followed by reassembly of the fragments by a polymerase chain reaction-like process. See, e.g., Stemmer, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:10747-10751 (1994); Stemmer, Nature 370:389-391 (1994); and U.S. Patent Νos. 5,605,793, 5,837,458, 5,830,721 and 5,811,238.
[0172] The present invention also provides means of adding (or removing) one or more selected glycosyl residues to a peptide, after which a modified sugar is conjugated to at least one ofthe selected glycosyl residues ofthe peptide. The present embodiment is useful, for example, when it is desired to conjugate the modified sugar to a selected glycosyl residue that is either not present on a peptide or is not present in a desired amount. Thus, prior to coupling a modified sugar to a peptide, the selected glycosyl residue is conjugated to the peptide by enzymatic or chemical coupling. In another embodiment, the glycosylation pattern of a glycopeptide is altered prior to the conjugation ofthe modified sugar by the removal of a carbohydrate residue from the glycopeptide. See, for example WO 98/31826.
[0173] Addition or removal of any carbohydrate moieties present on the glycopeptide is accomplished either chemically or enzymatically. Chemical deglycosylation is preferably brought about by exposure of the polypeptide variant to the compound trifluoromethanesulfonic acid, or an equivalent compound. This treatment results in the cleavage of most or all sugars except the linking sugar (Ν-acetylglucosamine or Ν- acetylgalactosamine), while leaving the peptide intact. Chemical deglycosylation is described by Hakimuddin et al, Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 259: 52 (1987) and by Edge et al, Anal. Biochem. 118: 131 (1981). Enzymatic cleavage of carbohydrate moieties on polypeptide variants can be achieved by the use of a variety of endo- and exo-glycosidases as described by Thotakura et al, Meth. Enzymol 138: 350 (1987). [0l¥4]!1 •',Ch niiMr'fd'ditloll''b'f;g 'c'osyl moieties is carried out by any art-recognized method. Enzymatic addition of sugar moieties is preferably achieved using a modification ofthe methods set forth herein, substituting native glycosyl units for the modified sugars used in the invention. Other methods of adding sugar moieties are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,876,980, 6,030,815, 5,728,554, and 5,922,577.
[0175] Exemplary attachment points for selected glycosyl residue include, but are not limited to: (a) consensus sites for N-linked glycosylation and O-linked glycosylation; (b) terminal glycosyl moieties that are acceptors for a glycosyltransferase; (c) arginine, asparagine and histidine; (d) free carboxyl groups; (e) free sulfhydryl groups such as those of cysteine; (f) free hydroxyl groups such as those of serine, threonine, or hydroxyproline; (g) aromatic residues such as those of phenylalanine, tyrosine, or tryptophan; or (h) the amide group of glutamine. Exemplary methods of use in the present invention are described in WO 87/05330 published Sep. 11, 1987, and in Aplin and Wriston, CRC CRIT. REV. BIOCHEM., pp. 259-306 (1981). [0176] In one embodiment, the invention provides a method for linking hGH and one or more peptide through a linking group. The linking group is of any useful structure and may be selected from straight-chain and branched chain structures. Preferably, each terminus of the linker, which is attached to a peptide, includes a modified sugar (i.e., a nascent intact glycosyl linking group). [0177] In an exemplary method ofthe invention, two peptides are linked together via a linker moiety that includes a PEG linker. The construct conforms to the general structure set forth in the cartoon above. As described herein, the construct ofthe invention includes two intact glycosyl linking groups (i.e., s + 1 = 1). The focus on a PEG linker that includes two glycosyl groups is for purposes of clarity and should not be interpreted as limiting the identity of linker arms of use in this embodiment ofthe invention.
[0178] Thus, a PEG moiety is functionalized at a first terminus with a first glycosyl unit and at a second terminus with a second glycosyl unit. The first and second glycosyl units are preferably substrates for different transferases, allowing orthogonal attachment ofthe first and second peptides to the first and second glycosylunits, respectively. In practice, the (glycosyl) '-PEG-(glycosyl)2 linker is contacted with the first peptide and a first transferase for which the first glycosyl unit is a substrate, thereby forming (peptide)'-(glycosyl)1-PEG-(glycosyl)2. Glycosyltransferase and/or unreacted peptide is then optionally rernoWd frbnAhe reactϊB mixture. The second peptide and a second transferase for which the second glycosyl unit is a substrate are added to the (peptide)'-(glycosyl)I-PEG-(glycosyl)2 conjugate, forming
(peptide)'-(glycosyl)1-PEG-(glycosyl)2-(peptide)2 . Those of skill in the art will appreciate that the method outlined above is also applicable to forming conjugates between more than two peptides by, for example, the use of a branched PEG, dendrimer, poly(amino acid), polsaccharide or the like.
[0179] In an exemplary embodiment, human growth hormone is conjugated to transferrin via a bifunctional linker that includes an intact glycosyl linking group at each terminus ofthe PEG moiety (Scheme 1). The hGH conjugate has an in vivo half-life that is increased over that of hGH alone by virtue ofthe greater molecular sized ofthe conjugate. Moreover, the conjugation of hGH to transferrin serves to selectively target the conjugate to the brain. For example, one terminus ofthe PEG linker is functionalized with a CMP sialic acid and the other is functionalized with an UDP GalNAc. The linker is combined with hGH in the presence of a GalNAc transferase, resulting in the attachment ofthe GalNAc ofthe linker arm to a serine and/or threonine residue on the hGH.
Scheme 1 sialidase
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000047_0002
1. sialyltransferase CMP-SA-PEG-GalNAc-UDP
2. GalNAc transferase hGH
Figure imgf000047_0003
[0180] The processes described above can be carried through as many cycles as desired, and is not limited to forming a conjugate between two peptides with a single linker.
Moreover, those of skill in the art will appreciate that the reactions functionalizing the intact glycosyl linking groups at the termini ofthe PEG (or other) linker with the peptide can occur simultaneously in the same reaction vessel, or they can be carried out in a step-wise fashion. When the reactions are carried out in a step-wise manner, the conjugate produced at each step is optionally purified from one or more reaction components (e.g., enzymes, peptides). [0181] « >A iff further e empaiyϋn bodiment is set forth in Scheme 2. Scheme 2 shows a method of preparing a conjugate that targets a selected protein, e.g., human growth hormone, to bone and increases the circulatory half-life ofthe selected protein.
Scheme 2 "\ i — Gal CMP-SA-PEO-Gal-UDP "N Gal-SA-PEG-Gal-UDP
( HSGP ) ( •" ( HSGP ) ( ZA ^-Qal sia,*Usferase _ ^Cal-SA-PEG-Ga.-UDP hGH galactosyUransferase \ / Gal-SA-PEG-Gal-hGH
( HSGP )
\^ <Gal-SA-PEG-Gal-hGH in which G is a glycosyl residue on an activated sugar moiety (e.g., sugar nucleotide), which is converted to an intact glycosyl linker group in the conjugate. When s is greater than 0, L is a saccharyl linking group such as GalNAc, or GalNAc-Gal.
[0182] The use of reactive derivatives of PEG (or other linkers) to attach one or more peptide moieties to the linker is within the scope ofthe present invention. The invention is not limited by the identity ofthe reactive PEG analogue. Many activated derivatives of poly(ethyleneglycol) are available commercially and in the literature. It is well within the abilities of one of skill to choose, and synthesize if necessary, an appropriate activated PEG derivative with which to prepare a substrate useful in the present invention. See, Abuchowski et al Cancer Biochem. Biophys., 7: 175-186 (1984); Abuchowski et al, J. Biol. Chem., 252: 3582-3586 (1977); Jackson et al, Anal Biochem., 165: 114-127 (1987); Koide et al, Biochem Biophys. Res. Commun., Ill: 659-667 (1983)), rresylate (Nilsson et al, Methods Enzymol, 104: 56-69 (1984); Delgado et al, Biotechnol. Appl. Biochem., 12: 119-128 (1990)); N-hydroxysuccinimide derived active esters (Buckmann et al, Makromol Chem., 182: 1379-1384 (1981); Joppich et al, Makromol. Chem., 180: 1381-1384 (1979);
Abuchowski et al, Cancer Biochem. Biophys., 7: 175-186 (1984); Katreet al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 84: 1487-1491 (1987); Kitamura et /., Cancer Res., 51: 4310-4315 (1991); Boccu et al, Z. Naturforsck, 38C: 94-99 (1983), carbonates (Zalipsky et al,
PθLY(ETHYLENE GLYCOL) CHEMISTRY: BlOTECHNICAL AND BlOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS, Harris, Ed., Plenum Press, New York, 1992, pp. 347-370; Zalipsky et al, Biotechnol. Appl. Biochem., 15: 100-114 (1992); Veronese et al, Appl. Biochem. Biotech., 11: 141-152 (1985)), imidazolyl formates (Beauchamp et al, Anal. Biochem., 131: 25-33 (1983); Berger et al, Blood, 71: 1641-1647 (1988)), 4-dithiopyridines (Woghiren et al, Bioconjugate CMm.f 3Wm& $9tyJ*m89 ates (Byun et al, ASAIO Journal, M649-M-653 (1992)) and epoxides (U.S. Pat. No. 4,806,595, issued to Noishiki et al, (1989). Other linking groups include the urethane linkage between amino groups and activated PEG. See, Veronese, et al, Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol, 11: 141-152 (1985). [0183] In another exemplary embodiment, the invention provides a method for extending the blood-circulation half-life of a selected peptide, in essence targeting the peptide to the blood pool, by conjugating the peptide to a synthetic or natural polymer of a size sufficient to retard the filtration ofthe protein by the glomerulus (e.g., albumin). See, Scheme 3. This embodiment ofthe invention is illustrated in Scheme 3 in which hGH is conjugated to albumin via a PEG linker using a combination of chemical and enzymatic modification.
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000049_0001
X = Activating group
Figure imgf000049_0002
( albumin ] — PEG— SA f hGH j
[0184] Thus, as shown in Scheme 3, a residue (e.g., amino acid side chain) of albumin is modified with a reactive PEG derivative, such as X-PEG-(CMP-sialic acid), in which X is an activating group (e.g., active ester, isothiocyanate, etc). The PEG derivative and hGH are combined and contacted with a transferase for which CMP-sialic acid is a substrate. In a further illustrative embodiment, an ε-amine of lysine is reacted with the N- hydroxysuccinimide ester ofthe PEG-linker to form the albumin conjugate. The CMP-silaic acid ofthe linker is enzymatically conjugated to an appropriate residue on hGH, e.g., Gal or GalNAc, thereby forming the conjugate. Those of skill will appreciate that the above- described method is not limited to the reaction partners set forth. Moreover, the method can be practiced to form conjugates that include more than two protein moieties by, for example, utilizing a branched linker having more than two termini. Toirfi ' S ars-
[0185] Modified glycosyl donor species ("modified sugars") are preferably selected from modified sugar nucleotides, activated modified sugars and modified sugars that are simple saccharides that are neither nucleotides nor activated. Any desired carbohydrate structure can be added to a peptide using the methods ofthe invention. Typically, the structure will be a monosaccharide, but the present invention is not limited to the use of modified monosaccharide sugars; oligosaccharides and polysaccharides are useful as well.
[0186] The modifying group is attached to a sugar moiety by enzymatic means, chemical means or a combination thereof, thereby producing a modified sugar. The sugars are substituted at any position that allows for the attachment ofthe modifying moiety, yet which still allows the sugar to function as a substrate for the enzyme used to ligate the modified sugar to the peptide. In a preferred embodiment, when sialic acid is the sugar, the sialic acid is substituted with the modifying group at either the 9-position on the pyruvyl side chain or at the 5-position on the- amine moiety that is normally acetylated in sialic acid. [0187] In certain embodiments ofthe present invention, a modified sugar nucleotide is utilized to add the modified sugar to the peptide. Exemplary sugar nucleotides that are used in the present invention in their modified form include nucleotide mono-, di- or triphosphates or analogs thereof. In a preferred embodiment, the modified sugar nucleotide is selected from a UDP-glycoside, CMP-glycoside, or a GDP-glycoside. Even more preferably, the modified sugar nucleotide is selected from an UDP-galactose, UDP-galactosamine, UDP- glucose, UDP-glucosamine, GDP-mannose, GDP-fucose, CMP-sialic acid, or CMP-NeuAc. N-acetylamine derivatives ofthe sugar nucletides are also of use in the method ofthe invention.
[0188] The invention also provides methods for synthesizing a modified peptide using a modified sugar, e.g., modified-galactose, -fucose, -GalNAc, and -sialic acid. When a modified sialic acid is used, either a sialyltransferase or a trans-sialidase (for α2,3 -linked sialic acid only) can be used in these methods.
[0189] In other embodiments, the modified sugar is an activated sugar. Activated modified sugars, which are useful in the present invention are typically glycosides which have been synthetically altered to include an activated leaving group. As used herein, the term
"activated leaving group" refers to those moieties, which are easily displaced in enzyme- regulated nucleophilic substitution reactions. Many activated sugars are known in the art. Sfeerϊbr
Figure imgf000051_0001
BIOLOGY, Vol. 2, Ernst et al. Ed., Wiley- VCH Verlag: Weinheim, Germany, 2000; Kodama et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 34: 6419 (1993); Lougheed, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 274: 37717 (1999)).
[0190] Examples of activating groups (leaving groups) include fluoro, chloro, bromo, tosylate ester, mesylate ester, triflate ester and the like. Preferred activated leaving groups, for use in the present invention, are those that do not significantly sterically encumber the enzymatic transfer ofthe glycoside to the acceptor. Accordingly, preferred embodiments of activated glycoside derivatives include glycosyl fluorides and glycosyl mesylates, with glycosyl fluorides being particularly preferred. Among the glycosyl fluorides, α-galactosyl fluoride, α-mannosyl fluoride, α-glucosyl fluoride, α-fucosyl fluoride, α-xylosyl fluoride, α- sialyl fluoride, α-N-acetylglucosaminyl fluoride, α-N-acetylgalactosaminyl fluoride, β- galactosyl fluoride, β-mannosyl fluoride, β-glucosyl fluoride, β-fucosyl fluoride, β-xylosyl fluoride, β-sialyl fluoride, β-N-acetylglucosaminyl fluoride and β-N-acetylgalactosaminyl fluoride are most preferred. [0191] By way of illustration, glycosyl fluorides can be prepared from the free sugar by first acetylating the sugar and then treating it with HF/pyridine. This generates the thermodynamically most stable anomer ofthe protected (acetylated) glycosyl fluoride (z'.e., the α-glycosyl fluoride). If the less stable anomer (i.e., the β-glycosyl fluoride) is desired, it can be prepared by converting the peracetylated sugar with HBr/HOAc or with HCl to generate the anomeric bromide or chloride. This intermediate is reacted with a fluoride salt such as silver fluoride to generate the glycosyl fluoride. Acetylated glycosyl fluorides may be deprotected by reaction with mild (catalytic) base in methanol (e.g. NaOMe/MeOH). In addition, many glycosyl fluorides are commercially available.
[0192] Other activated glycosyl derivatives can be prepared using conventional methods known to those of skill in the art. For example, glycosyl mesylates can be prepared by treatment ofthe fully benzylated hemiacetal form ofthe sugar with mesyl chloride, followed by catalytic hydrogenation to remove the benzyl groups.
[0193] In a further exemplary embodiment, the modified sugar is an oligosaccharide having an antennary structure. In a preferred embodiment, one or more ofthe termini ofthe antennae bear the modifying moiety. When more than one modifying moiety is attached to an oligosaccharide having an antennary structure, the oligosaccharide is useful to "amplify" the modifying moiety; each oligosaccharide unit conjugated to the peptide attaches multiple copies
Figure imgf000052_0001
The general structure of a typical chelate ofthe invention as set forth in the drawing above, encompasses multivalent species resulting from preparing a conjugate ofthe invention utilizing an antennary structure. Many antennary saccharide structures are known in the art, and the present method can be practiced with them without limitation.
[0194] Exemplary modifying groups are discussed below. The modifying groups can be selected for their ability to impart to a polypeptide one or more desirable properties. Exemplary properties include, but are not limited to, enhaced pharmacokinetics, enhanced pharmacodynamics, improved biodistribution, providing a polyvalent species, improved water solubility, enhanced or diminished lipophilicity, and tissue targeting.
Water-Soluble Polymers
[0195] The hydrophilicity of a selected peptide is enhanced by conjugation with polar molecules such as amine-, ester-, hydroxyl- and polyhydroxyl-containing molecules. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, polylysine, polyethyleneimine, and polyethers, e.g., poly(ethylene glycol), m-poly(ethylene glycol), poly(propyleneglycol), m- poly(propylene glycol), and other O-alkyl poly(alkylene glycol) moieties. Preferred water- soluble polymers are essentially non- fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay. Moreover, it is generally preferred to use polymers that are not naturally occurring sugars. An exception to this preference is the use of an otherwise naturally occurring sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity (e.g., poly(ethylene glycol), poly(propylene glycol), biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, etc.). In another exemplary embodiment, a therapeutic sugar moiety is conjugated to a linker arm and the sugar-linker arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
[0196] Methods and chemistry for activation of water-soluble polymers and saccharides as well as methods for conjugating saccharides and polymers to various species are described in the literature. Commonly used methods for activation of polymers include activation of functional groups with cyanogen bromide, periodate, glutaraldehyde, biepoxides, epichlorohydrin, divinylsulfone, carbodiimide, sulfonyl halides, trichlorotriazine, etc. (see, R. F. Taylor, (1991), PROTEIN IMMOBILISATION. FUNDAMENTALS AND APPLICATIONS, Marcel Deklcer, N.Y.; S. S. Wong, (1992), CHEMISTRY OF PROTEIN CONJUGATION AND 0 ^S ln<fκM©|lCR'(E relbs?Bo©iMaton; G. T. Hermanson et al, (1993), IMMOBILIZED AFFINITY LIGAND TECHNIQUES, Academic Press, N.Y.; Dunn, R.L., et al, Eds. POLYMERIC DRUGS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, ACS Symposium Series Vol. 469, American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. 1991). [0197] Many water-soluble polymers are known to those of skill in the art and are useful in practicing the present invention. The term water-soluble polymer encompasses species such as saccharides (e.g., dextran, amylose, hyalouronic acid, poly(sialic acid), heparans, heparins, etc.); poly (amino acids); nucleic acids; synthetic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(ethers), e.g., ρoly(ethylene glycol); peptides, proteins, and the like. The present invention may be practiced with any water-soluble polymer with the sole limitation that the polymer must include a point at which the remainder ofthe conjugate can be attached.
[0198] Methods for activation of polymers can also be found in WO 94/17039, U.S. Pat. No. 5,324,844, WO 94/18247, WO 94/04193, U.S. Pat. No. 5,219,564, U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,614, WO 90/13540, U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,698, and more WO 93/15189, and for conjugation between activated polymers and peptides, e.g. Coagulation Factor VIII (WO 94/15625), haemoglobin (WO 94/09027), oxygen carrying molecule (U.S. Pat. No. 4,412,989), ribonuclease and superoxide dismutase (Veronese at al, App. Biochem. Biotech. 11: 141-45 (1985)).
[0199] Preferred water-soluble polymers are those in which a substantial proportion ofthe polymer molecules in a sample ofthe polymer are of approximately the same molecular weight; such polymers are said to be "homodisperse" or "monodisperse."
[0200] The present invention is further illustrated by reference to a poly(ethylene glycol) or monomethoxy-poly(ethylene glycol) (m-PEG) conjugate. Several reviews and monographs on the functionalization and conjugation of PEG are available. See, for example, Harris, Macronol. Chem. Phys. C25: 325-373 (1985); Scouten, Methods in Enzymology 135: 30-65 (1987); Wong et al, Enzyme Microb. Technol 14: 866-874 (1992); Delgado et al, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems 9: 249-304 (1992); Zalipsky, Bioconjugate Chem. 6: 150-165 (1995); and Bhadra, et al, Pharmazie, 57:5-29 (2002).
[0201] The poly(ethylene glycol) useful in forming the conjugate ofthe invention is either linear or branched.
[0202] The in vivo half- life or area under the curve (AUC) of therapeutic glycopeptides can also be enhanced with water-soluble polymers such as PEG, m-PEG, PPG, and m-PPG. For hhφlefcMml6ύr όdi MMW τote s with PEG (PEG-ylation) or m-PEG (m-PEG- ylation) increases their molecular size and decreases their surface- and functional group- accessibility, each of which are dependent on the size ofthe PEG attached to the protein. This results in an improvement of plasma half-lives or AUCs and in proteolytic-stability, and a decrease in immunogenicity and hepatic uptake (Chaffee et al. J. Clin. Invest. 89: 1643- 1651 (1992); Pyatak et α/. Res. Commun. Chem. Pathol Pharmacol. 29: 113-127 (1980)). PEGylation of interleukin-2 has been reported to increase its antitumor potency in vivo (Katre et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 84: 1487-1491 (1987)) and PEG-ylation of a F(ab')2 derived from the monoclonal antibody A7 has improved its tumor localization (Kitamura et al. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 28: 1387-1394 (1990)). Thus, in another preferred embodiment, the in vivo half-life of a peptide derivatized with a water-soluble polymer by a method ofthe invention is increased relevant to the in vivo half-life or AUC ofthe non- derivatized peptide.
[0203] The increase in peptide in vivo half-life or AUC is best expressed as a range of percent increase in this quantity. The lower end ofthe range of percent increase is about
40%, about 60%, about 80%, about 100%, about 150% or about 200%. The upper end ofthe range is about 60%, about 80%, about 100%, about 150%, or more than about 250%.
[0204] PEG moieties of any molecular weight, e.g., 5 kD, 10 kD, 20 kD, and 30 kD, are of use in the present invention.
Biomolecules
[0205] In another preferred embodiment, the modified sugar bears a biomolecule. In still further preferred embodiments, the biomolecule is a functional protein, enzyme, antigen, antibody, peptide, nucleic acid (e.g., single nucleotides or nucleosides, oligonucleotides, polynucleotides and single- and higher-stranded nucleic acids), lectin, receptor or a combination thereof.
[0206] Preferred biomolecules are essentially non-fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay. Moreover, it is generally preferred to use biomolecules that are not sugars. An exception to this preference is the use of an otherwise naturally occurring sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity (e.g., PEG, biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety, etc.). In an exemplary embodiment, a sugar moiety, which is a biomolecule, is
Figure imgf000055_0001
arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
[0207] Biomolecules useful in practicing the present invention can be derived from any source. The biomolecules can be isolated from natural sources or they can be produced by synthetic methods. Peptides can be natural peptides or mutated peptides. Mutations can be effected by chemical mutagenesis, site-directed mutagenesis or other means of inducing mutations known to those of skill in the art. Peptides useful in practicing the instant invention include, for example, enzymes, antigens, antibodies and receptors. Antibodies can be either polyclonal or monoclonal; either intact or fragments. The peptides are optionally the products of a program of directed evolution.
[0208] Both naturally derived and synthetic peptides and nucleic acids are of use in conjunction with the present invention; these molecules can be attached to a sugar residue component or a crosslinking agent by any available reactive group. For example, peptides can be attached through a reactive amine, carboxyl, sulfhydryl, or hydroxyl group. The reactive group can reside at a peptide terminus or at a site internal to the peptide chain.
Nucleic acids can be attached through a reactive group on a base (e.g., exocyclic amine) or an available hydroxyl group on a sugar moiety (e.g., 3'- or 5 '-hydroxyl). The peptide and nucleic acid chains can be further derivatized at one or more sites to allow for the attachment of appropriate reactive groups onto the chain. See, Chrisey et al. Nucleic Acids Res. 24: 3031-3039 (1996).
[0209] Iri a further preferred embodiment, the biomolecule is selected to direct the peptide modified by the methods ofthe invention to a specific tissue, thereby enhancing the delivery ofthe peptide to that tissue relative to the amount of underivatized peptide that is delivered to the tissue. In a still further preferred embodiment, the amount of derivatized peptide delivered to a specific tissue within a selected time period is enhanced by derivatization by at least about 20%, more preferably, at least about 40%, and more preferably still, at least about 100%. Presently, preferred biomolecules for targeting applications include antibodies, hormones and ligands for cell-surface receptors.
[0210] In still a further exemplary embodiment, there is provided as conjugate with biotin. Thus, for example, a selectively biotinylated peptide is elaborated by the attachment of an avidin or streptavidin moiety bearing one or more modifying groups. 'e a etttι6'-Mϋϊetι&s"'
[0211] In another preferred embodiment, the modified sugar includes a therapeutic moiety. Those of skill in the art will appreciate that there is overlap between the category of therapeutic moieties and biomolecules; many biomolecules have therapeutic properties or potential.
[0212] The therapeutic moieties can be agents already accepted for clinical use or they can be drugs whose use is experimental, or whose activity or mechanism of action is under investigation. The therapeutic moieties can have a proven action in a given disease state or can be only hypothesized to show desirable action in a given disease state. In a preferred embodiment, the therapeutic moieties are compounds, which are being screened for their ability to interact with a tissue of choice. Therapeutic moieties, which are useful in practicing the instant invention include drugs from a broad range of drug classes having a variety of pharmacological activities. Preferred therapeutic moieties are essentially non-fluorescent, or emit such a minimal amount of fluorescence that they are inappropriate for use as a fluorescent marker in an assay. Moreover, it is generally preferred to use therapeutic moieties that are not sugars. An exception to this preference is the use of a sugar that is modified by covalent attachment of another entity, such as a PEG, biomolecule, therapeutic moiety, diagnostic moiety and the like. In another exemplary embodiment, a therapeutic sugar moiety is conjugated to a linker arm and the sugar-linker arm cassette is subsequently conjugated to a peptide via a method ofthe invention.
[0213] Methods of conjugating therapeutic and diagnostic agents to various other species are well known to those of skill in the art. See, for example Hermanson, BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press, San Diego, 1996; and Dunn et al, Eds. POLYMERIC DRUGS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, ACS Symposium Series Vol. 469, American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. 1991.
[0214] In an exemplary embodiment, the therapeutic moiety is attached to the modified sugar via a linkage that is cleaved under selected conditions. Exemplary conditions include, but are not limited to, a selected pH (e.g., stomach, intestine, endocytotic vacuole), the presence of an active enzyme (e.g., esterase, reductase, oxidase), light, heat and the like. Many cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al, Biochem.
Biophys. Ada, 761: 152-162 (1983); Joshi et al., . Biol. Chem., 265: 14518-14525 (1990); Zarling et al, J. Immunol, 124: 913-920 (1980); Bouizar et al, Eur. J. Biochem., 155: 141- 1 7li i 8'6);-Pa l«t 7', frB &f n. 261: 205-210 (1986); Browning et al, J. Immunol, 143: 1859-1867 (1989).
[0215] Classes of useful therapeutic moieties include, for example, non-steroidal anti- inflammatory drugs (NSAIDS). The NSAIDS can, for example, be selected from the following categories: (e.g., propionic acid derivatives, acetic acid derivatives, fenamic acid derivatives, biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives and oxicams); steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs including hydrocortisone and the like; antihistaminic drugs (e.g., chlorpheniramine, triprolidine); antitussive drugs (e.g., dextromethorphan, codeine, caramiphen and carbetapentane); antipruritic drugs (e.g., methdilazine and trimeprazine); anticholinergic drugs (e.g., scopolamine, atropine, homatropine, levodopa); anti-emetic and antinauseant drugs (e.g., cyclizine, meclizine, chlorpromazine, buclizine); anorexic drugs (e.g., benzphetamine, phentermine, chlorphentermine, fenfluramine); central stimulant drugs (e.g., amphetamine, methamphetamine, dextroamphetamine and methylphenidate); antiarrhythmic drugs (e.g., propanolol, procainamide, disopyramide, quinidine, encainide); β-adrenergic blocker drugs (e.g., metoprolol, acebutolol, betaxolol, labetalol and timolol); cardiotonic drugs (e.g., milrinone, amrinone and dobutamine); antihypertensive drugs (e.g., enalapril, clonidine, hydralazine, minoxidil, guanadrel, guanethidine); diuretic drugs (e.g., amiloride and
# hydrochlorothiazide); vasodilator drugs (e.g., diltiazem, amiodarone, isoxsuprine, nylidrin, tolazoline and verapamil); vasoconstrictor drugs (e.g., dihydroergotamine, ergotamine and methylsergide); antiulcer drugs (e.g., ranitidine and cimetidine); anesthetic drugs (e.g., lidocaine, bupivacaine, chloroprocaine, dibucaine); antidepressant drugs (e.g., imipramine, desipramine, amitryptiline, nortryptiline); tranquilizer and sedative drugs (e.g., chlordiazepoxide, benacytyzine, benzquinamide, flurazepam, hydroxyzine, loxapine and promazine); antipsychotic drugs (e.g., chlorprothixene, fluphenazine, haloperidol, molindone, thioridazine and trifluoperazine); antimicrobial drugs (antibacterial, antifungal, antiprotozoal and antiviral drugs).
[0216] Antimicrobial drugs which are preferred for incorporation into the present composition include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of β-lactam drugs, quinolone drugs, ciprofloxacin, norfloxacin, tetracycline, erythromycin, amikacin, triclosan, doxycycline, capreomycin, chlorhexidine, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline, clindamycin, ethambutol, hexamidine isothionate, metronidazole, pentamidine, gentamycin, kanamycin, lineomycin, methacycline, methenamine, minocycline, neomycin, netilmycin, paromomycin, streptomycin, tobramycin, miconazole and amantadine. [θSτ J » dther riϊgirribιd!tie'Sl!bt; s, i'in practicing the present invention include antineoplastic drugs (e.g., antiandrogens (e.g., leuprolide or flutamide), cytocidal agents (e.g., adriamycin, doxorubicin, taxol, cyclophosphamide, busulfan, cisplatin, β-2-interferon) anti-estrogens (e.g., tamoxifen), antimetabolites (e.g., fluorouracil, methotrexate, mercaptopurine, thioguanine). Also included within this class are radioisotope-based agents for both diagnosis and therapy, and conjugated toxins, such as ricin, geldanamycin, mytansin, CC- 1065, the duocarmycins, Chlicheamycin and related structures and analogues thereof.
[0218] The therapeutic moiety can also be a hormone (e.g., medroxyprogesterone, estradiol, leuprolide, megestrol, octreotide or somatostatin); muscle relaxant drugs (e.g., cinnamedrine, cyclobenzaprine, flavoxate, orphenadrine, papaverine, mebeverine, idaverine, ritodrine, diphenoxylate, dantrolene and azumolen); antispasmodic drugs; bone-active drugs (e.g., diphosphonate and phosphonoalkylphosphinate drug compounds); endocrine modulating drugs (e.g., contraceptives (e.g., ethinodiol, ethinyl estradiol, norethindrone, mestranol, desogestrel, medroxyprogesterone), modulators of diabetes (e.g., glyburide or chlorpropamide), anabolics, such as testolactone or stanozolol, androgens (e.g., methyltestosterone, testosterone or fluoxymesterone), antidiuretics (e.g., desmopressin) and calcitonins).
[0219] Also of use in the present invention are estrogens (e.g., diethylstilbesterol), glucocorticoids (e.g., triamcinolone, betamethasone, etc.) and progestogens, such as norethindrone, ethynodiol, norethindrone, levonorgestrel; thyroid agents (e.g., liothyronine or levothyroxine) or anti-thyroid agents (e.g., methimazole); antihyperprolactinemic drugs (e.g., cabergoline); hormone suppressors (e.g., danazol or goserelin), oxytocics (e.g., methylergonovine or oxytocin) and prostaglandins, such as mioprostol, alprostadil or dinoprostone, can also be employed. [0220] Other useful modifying groups include immunomodulating drugs (e.g., antihistamines, mast cell stabilizers, such as lodoxamide and/or cromolyn, steroids (e.g., triamcinolone, beclomethazone, cortisone, dexamethasone, prednisolone, methylprednisolone, beclomethasone, or clobetasol), histamine H2 antagonists (e.g., famotidine, cimetidine, ranitidine), immunosuppressants (e.g., azathioprine, cyclosporin), etc. Groups with anti-inflammatory activity, such as sulindac, etodolac, ketoprofen and ketorolac, are also of use. Other drugs of use in conjunction with the present invention will be apparent to those of skill in the art. P arMohWWbmfύd m *
[0221] In general, the sugar moiety and the modifying group are linked together through the use of reactive groups, which are typically transformed by the linking process into a new organic functional group or species that is unreactive under physiologically relevant conditions. The sugar reactive functional group(s), is located at any position on the sugar moiety. Reactive groups and classes of reactions useful in practicing the present invention are generally those that are well known in the art of bioconjugate chemistry. Currently favored classes of reactions available with reactive sugar moieties are those, which proceed under relatively mild conditions. These include, but are not limited to nucleophilic substitutions (e.g., reactions of amines and alcohols with acyl halides, active esters), electrophilic substitutions (e.g., enamine reactions) and additions to carbon-carbon and carbon-heteroatom multiple bonds (e.g., Michael reaction, Diels- Alder addition). These and other useful reactions are discussed in, for example, March, ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1985; Hermanson, BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press, San Diego, 1996; and Feeney et al, MODIFICATION OF PROTEINS; Advances in Chemistry Series, Vol. 198, American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C., 1982.
[0222] Useful reactive functional groups pendent from a sugar nucleus or modifying group include, but are not limited to: (a) carboxyl groups and various derivatives thereof including, but not limited to,
N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, N-hydroxybenztriazole esters, acid halides, acyl imidazoles, thioesters, p-nitrophenyl esters, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and aromatic esters;
(b) hydroxyl groups, which can be converted to, e.g., esters, ethers, aldehydes, etc. (c) haloalkyl groups, wherein the halide can be later displaced with a nucleophilic group such as, for example, an amine, a carboxylate anion, thiol anion, carbanion, or an alkoxide ion, thereby resulting in the covalent attachment of a new group at the functional group ofthe halogen atom;
(d) dienophile groups, which are capable of participating in Diels- Alder reactions such as, for example, maleimido groups;
(e) aldehyde or ketone groups, such that subsequent derivatization is possible via formation of carbonyl derivatives such as, for example, imines, hydrazones, semiCarbazones'θi" oximes, or via such mechanisms as Grignard addition or alkyllithium addition;
(f) sulfonyl halide groups for subsequent reaction with amines, for example, to form sulfonamides; (g) thiol groups, which can be, for example, converted to disulfides or reacted with acyl halides;
(h) amine or sulfhydryl groups, which can be, for example, acylated, alkylated or oxidized;
(i) alkenes, which can undergo, for example, cycloadditions, acylation, Michael addition, etc; and
(j) epoxides, which can react with, for example, amines and hydroxyl compounds.
[0223] The reactive functional groups can be chosen such that they do not participate in, or interfere with, the reactions necessary to assemble the reactive sugar nucleus or modifying group. Alternatively, a reactive functional group can be protected from participating in the reaction by the presence of a protecting group. Those of skill in the art understand how to protect a particular functional group such that it does not interfere with a chosen set of reaction conditions. For examples of useful protecting groups, see, for example, Greene et al, PROTECTIVE GROUPS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991.
[0224] In the discussion that follows, a number of specific examples of modified sugars that are useful in practicing the present invention are set forth. In the exemplary embodiments, a sialic acid derivative is utilized as the sugar nucleus to which the modifying group is attached. The focus ofthe discussion on sialic acid derivatives is for clarity of illustration only and should not be construed to limit the scope ofthe invention. Those of skill in the art will appreciate that a variety of other sugar moieties can be activated and derivatized in a manner analogous to that set forth using sialic acid as an example. For example, numerous methods are available for modifying galactose, glucose, N- acetylgalactosamine and fucose to name a few sugar substrates, which are readily modified by art recognized methods. See, for example, Elhalabi et al, Curr. Med. Chem. 6: 93 (1999); and Schafer et al, J. Org. Chem. 65: 24 (2000)). [0225] In an exemplary embodiment, the peptide that is modified by a method ofthe invention is a glycopeptide that is produced in prokaryotic cells (e.g., E.coli), eukaryotic cells lricludmg'yeast-anτt rhamfna'lilan-eeH's (e.g., CHO cells), or in a transgenic animal and thus, contains N- and/or O-linked oligosaccharide chains, which are incompletely sialylated. The oligosaccharide chains ofthe glycopeptide lacking a sialic acid and containing a terminal galactose residue can be PEG-ylated, PPG-ylated or otherwise modified with a modified sialic acid.
[0226] Exemplary PEG-sialic acid derivative include:
Figure imgf000061_0001
in which L is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl linker moiety joining the sialic acid moiety and the PEG moiety, and "n" is 1 or greater; and
Figure imgf000061_0002
in which the index "s" represents an integer from 0 to 20, and "n" is 1 or greater.
[0227] In Scheme 4, the amino glycoside 1, is treated with the active ester of a protected amino acid (e.g., glycine) derivative, converting the sugar amine residue into the corresponding protected amino acid amide adduct. The adduct is treated with an aldolase to form α-hydroxy carboxylate 2. Compound 2 is converted to the corresponding CMP derivative by the action of CMP-SA synthetase, followed by catalytic hydrogenation ofthe CMP derivative to produce compound 3. The amine introduced via formation ofthe glycine adduct is utilized as a locus of PEG attachment by reacting compound 3 with an activated PEG or PPG derivative (e.g., PEG-C(O)NHS, PEG-OC(O)O-p-nitrophenyl), producing species such as 4 or 5, respectively. Scheme 4'
Figure imgf000062_0001
CMP-SA-5-NHCOCH2NH — C(0)0-PEG
5
[0228] Table 1 sets forth representative examples of sugar monophosphates that are derivatized with a PEG or PPG moiety. Human growth hormone mutants can be modified by the method of Scheme 1. Other derivatives are prepared by art-recognized methods. See, for example, Keppler et al, Glycobiology 11: 11R (2001); and Charter et al., Glycobiology 10: 1049 (2000)). Other amine reactive PEG and PPG analogues are commercially available, or they can be prepared by methods readily accessible to those of skill in the art.
Table 1
Figure imgf000062_0002
CMP-SA-5-NH-R CMP-NeuAc-9-O-R
Figure imgf000063_0001
CMP-NeuAc-8-NH-R
Figure imgf000063_0002
CMP-NeuAc-4-NH-R
CMP-NeuAc-4-O-R
[0229] The modified sugar phosphates of use in practicing the present invention can be substituted in other positions as well as those set forth above. Presently preferred substitutions of sialic acid are set forth in Formula I:
Figure imgf000063_0003
in which X is a linking group, which is preferably selected from -O-, -N(H)-, -S, CH2-, and - N(R)2, in which each R is a member independently selected from R'-R5. The symbols Y, Z, A and B each represent a group that is selected from the group set forth above for the identity of X. X, Y, Z, A and B are each independently selected and, therefore, they can be the same or di'fferdhf.
Figure imgf000064_0001
K», s; R4 and R5 represent H, a water-soluble polymer, therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or other moiety. Alternatively, these symbols represent a linker that is bound to a water-soluble polymer, therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or other moiety. [0230] Exemplary moieties attached to the conjugates disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, PEG derivatives (e.g., alkyl-PEG, acyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, alkyl-acyl-PEG carbamoyl-PEG, aryl-PEG), PPG derivatives (e.g., alkyl-PPG, acyl-PPG, acyl-alkyl-PPG, alkyl-acyl-PPG carbamoyl-PPG, aryl-PPG), therapeutic moieties, diagnostic moieties, mannose-6-phosphate, heparin, heparan, SLex, mannose, mannose-6-phosphate, Sialyl Lewis X, FGF, NFGF, proteins, chondroitin, keratan, dermatan, albumin, integrins, antennary oligosaccharides, peptides and the like. Methods of conjugating the various modifying groups to a saccharide moiety are readily accessible to those of skill in the art (POLY (ETHYLENE GLYCOL CHEMISTRY : BIOTECHNICAL AND BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS, J. Milton Harris, Ed., Plenum Pub. Corp., 1992; POLY (ETHYLENE GLYCOL) CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS, J. Milton Harris, Ed., ACS Symposium Series No. 680,
American Chemical Society, 1997; Hermanson, BIOCONJUGATE TECHNIQUES, Academic Press, San Diego, 1996; and Dunn et al, Eds. POLYMERIC DRUGS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, ACS Symposium Series Vol. 469, American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. 1991).
Cross-linking Groups
[0231] Preparation ofthe modified sugar for use in the methods ofthe present invention includes attachment of a modifying group to a sugar residue and forming a stable adduct, which is a substrate for a glycosyltransferase. The sugar and modifying group can be coupled by a zero- or higher-order cross-linking agent. Exemplary bifunctional compounds which can be used for attaching modifying groups to carbohydrate moieties include, but are not limited to, bifunctional poly(ethyleneglycols), polyamides, polyethers, polyesters and the like. General approaches for linking carbohydrates to other molecules are known in the literature. See, for example, Lee et al, Biochemistry 28: 1856 (1989); Bhatia et al, Anal. Biochem. 178: 408 (1989); Janda et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 112: 8886 (1990) and Bednarski et al, WO 92/18135. In the discussion that follows, the reactive groups are treated as benign on the sugar moiety ofthe nascent modified sugar. The focus ofthe discussion is for clarity of illustration. Those of skill in the art will appreciate that the discussion is relevant to reactive groups on the modifying group as well. [02t'3'2 !- "An exemplary' str'ateigy-mvoives incorporation of a protected sulfhydryl onto the sugar using the heterobifunctional crosslinker SPDP (n-succinimidyl-3-(2- pyridyldithio)propionate and then deprotecting the sulfhydryl for formation of a disulfide bond with another sulfhydryl on the modifying group. [0233] If SPDP detrimentally affects the ability ofthe modified sugar to act as a glycosyltransferase substrate, one of an array of other crosslinkers such as 2-iminothiolane or N-succinimidyl S-acetylthioacetate (SAT A) is used to form a disulfide bond. 2- iminothiolane reacts with primary amines, instantly incorporating an unprotected sulfhydryl onto the amine-containing molecule. SATA also reacts with primary amines, but incorporates a protected sulfhydryl, which is later deacetaylated using hydroxylamine to produce a free sulfhydryl. In each case, the incorporated sulfhydryl is free to react with other sulfhydryls or protected sulfhydryl, like SPDP, forming the required disulfide bond.
[0234] The above-described strategy is exemplary, and not limiting, of linkers of use in the invention. Other crosslinkers are available that can be used in different strategies for crosslinking the modifying group to the peptide. For example, TPCH(S-(2-thiopyridyl)-L- cysteine hydrazide and TPMPH ((S-(2-thiopyridyl) mercapto-propionohydrazide) react with carbohydrate moieties that have been previously oxidized by mild periodate treatment, thus forming a hydrazone bond between the hydrazide portion ofthe crosslinker and the periodate generated aldehydes. TPCH and TPMPH introduce a 2-pyridylthione protected sulfhydryl group onto the sugar, which can be deprotected with DTT and then subsequently used for conjugation, such as forming disulfide bonds between components. "
[0235] If disulfide bonding is found unsuitable for producing stable modified sugars, other crosslinkers may be used that incorporate more stable bonds between components. The heterobifunctional crosslinkers GMBS (N-gama-malimidobutyryloxy)succinim'ide) and SMCC (succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimido-methyl)cyclohexane) react with primary amines, thus introducing a maleimide group onto the component. The maleimide group can subsequently react with sulfhydryls on the other component, which can be introduced by previously mentioned crosslinkers, thus forming a stable thioether bond between the components. If steric hindrance between components interferes with either component's activity or the ability ofthe modified sugar to act as a glycosyltransferase substrate, crosslinkers can be used which introduce long spacer arms between components and include derivatives of some ofthe previously mentioned crosslinkers (i.e., SPDP). Thus, there is an abundance of suitable crosslinkers, whϊch'are'useraϊj'ea'cfi of which is selected depending on the effects it has on optimal peptide conjugate and modified sugar production.
[0236] A variety of reagents are used to modify the components ofthe modified sugar with intramolecular chemical crosslinks (for reviews of crosslinking reagents and crosslinking procedures see: Wold, F., Meth. Enzymol. 25: 623-651, 1972; Weetall, H. H., and Cooney, D. A., In: ENZYMES AS DRUGS. (Holcenberg, and Roberts, eds.) pp. 395-442, Wiley, New York, 1981; Ji, T. H., Meth. Enzymol. 91: 580-609, 1983; Mattson et al, Mol Biol. Rep. 17: 167- 183, 1993, all of which are incorporated herein by reference). Preferred crosslinking reagents are derived from various zero-length, homo-bifunctional, and hetero-bifunctional crosslinking reagents. Zero-length crosslinking reagents include direct conjugation of two intrinsic chemical groups with no introduction of extrinsic material. Agents that catalyze formation of a disulfide bond belong to this category. Another example is reagents that induce condensation of a carboxyl and a primary amino group to form an amide bond such as carbodiimides, ethylchloroformate, Woodward's reagent K (2-ethyl-5-phenylisoxazolium-3'- sulfonate), and carbonyldiimidazole. In addition to these chemical reagents, the enzyme transglutaminase (glutamyl-peptide γ-glutamyltransferase; EC 2.3.2.13) may be used as zero- length crosslinking reagent. This enzyme catalyzes acyl transfer reactions at carboxamide groups of protein-bound glutaminyl residues, usually with a primary amino group as substrate. Preferred homo- and hetero-bifunctional reagents contain two identical or two dissimilar sites, respectively, which may be reactive for amino, sulfhydryl, guanidino, indole, or nonspecific groups.
Amino-Reactive Groups [0237] In one preferred embodiment, the sites on the cross-linker are amino-reactive groups. Useful non-limiting examples of amino-reactive groups include carbonate esters, N- hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) esters, imidoesters, isocyanates, acylhalides, arylazides, p- nitrophenyl esters, aldehydes, and sulfonyl chlorides.
[0238] NHS esters react preferentially with the primary (including aromatic) amino groups of a modified sugar component. The imidazole groups of histidines are known to compete with primary amines for reaction, but the reaction products are unstable and readily hydro lyzed. The reaction involves the nucleophilic attack of an amine on the acid carboxyl of an NHS ester to form an amide, releasing the N-hydroxysuccinimide. Thus, the positive charge ofthe original amino group is lost. [0239-]" •'"Iήiϊab'eStbfs'ar'e the'm'o'st'specific acylating reagents for reaction with the amine groups ofthe modified sugar components. At a pH between 7 and 10, imidoesters react only with primary amines. Primary amines attack imidates nucleophilically to produce an intermediate that breaks down to amidine at high pH or to a new imidate at low pH. The new imidate can react with another primary amine, thus crosslinking two amino groups, a case of a putatively monofunctional imidate reacting bifunctionally. The principal product of reaction with primary amines is an amidine that is a stronger base than the original amine. The positive charge ofthe original amino group is therefore retained.
[0240] Isocyanates (and isothiocyanates) react with the primary amines ofthe modified sugar components to form stable bonds. Their reactions with sulfhydryl, imidazole, and tyrosyl groups give relatively unstable products.
[0241] Acylazides are also used as amino-specific reagents in which nucleophilic amines of the affinity component attack acidic carboxyl groups under slightly alkaline conditions, e.g. pH 8.5. [0242] Arylhalides such as l,5-difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene react preferentially with the amino groups and tyrosine phenolic groups of modified sugar components, but also with sulfhydryl and imidazole groups.
[0243] p-Nitrophenyl esters of mono- and dicarboxylic acids are also useful amino-reactive groups. Although the reagent specificity is not very high, α- and ε-amino groups appear to react most rapidly.
[0244] Aldehydes such as glutaraldehyde react with primary amines of modified sugar. Although unstable Schiff bases are formed upon reaction ofthe amino groups with the aldehydes ofthe aldehydes, glutaraldehyde is capable of modifying the modified sugar with stable crosslinks. At pH 6-8, the pH of typical crosslinking conditions, the cyclic polymers undergo a dehydration to form α-β unsaturated aldehyde polymers. Schiff bases, however, are stable, when conjugated to another double bond. The resonant interaction of both double bonds prevents hydrolysis ofthe Schiff linkage. Furthermore, amines at high local concentrations can attack the ethylenic double bond to form a stable Michael addition product. [0245] Aromatic sulfonyl chlorides react with a variety of sites ofthe modified sugar components, but reaction with the amino groups is the most important, resulting in a stable sulfonamide linkage.
Figure imgf000068_0001
[0246] In another preferred embodiment, the sites are sulfhydryl-reactive groups. Useful, non-limiting examples of sulfhydryl-reactive groups include maleimides, alkyl halides, pyridyl disulfides, and thiophthalimides. [0247] Maleimides react preferentially with the sulfhydryl group ofthe modified sugar components to form stable thioether bonds. They also react at a much slower rate with primary amino groups and the imidazole groups of histidines. However, at pH 7 the maleimide group can be considered a sulfhydryl-specific group, since at this pH the reaction rate of simple thiols is 1000-fold greater than that ofthe corresponding amine. [0248] Alkyl halides react with sulfhydryl groups, sulfides, imidazoles, and amino groups. At neutral to slightly alkaline pH, however, alkyl halides react primarily with sulfhydryl groups to form stable thioether bonds. At higher pH, reaction with amino groups is favored.
[0249] Pyridyl disulfides react with free sulfhydryls via disulfide exchange to give mixed disulfides. As a result, pyridyl disulfides are the most specific sulfhydryl-reactive groups. [0250] Thiophthalimides react with free sulfhydryl groups to form disulfides.
Carboxyl-Reactive Residue [0251] In another embodiment, carbodiimides soluble in both water and organic solvent, are used as carboxyl-reactive reagents. These compounds react with free carboxyl groups forming a pseudourea that can then couple to available amines yielding an amide linkage teach how to modify a carboxyl group with carbodiimde (Yamada et al, Biochemistry 20: 4836-4842, 1981).
[0252] In addition to the use of site-specific reactive moieties, the present invention contemplates the use of non-specific reactive groups to link the sugar to the modifying group.
Exemplary non-specific cross-linkers include photoactivatable groups, completely inert in the dark, which are converted to reactive species upon absorption of a photon of appropriate energy. In one preferred embodiment, photoactivatable groups are selected from precursors of nitrenes generated upon heating or photolysis of azides. Electron-deficient nitrenes are extremely reactive and can react with a variety of chemical bonds including N-H, O-H, C-H, and C=C. Although three types of azides (aryl, alkyl, and acyl derivatives) may be employed, arylazides are presently preferred. The reactivity of arylazides upon photolysis is better with N-H and O-H than C-H bonds. Electron-deficient arylnitrenes rapidly ring- expand to form dehydroazepines, which tend to react with nucleophiles, rather than form C-H miseittiom prdkJirots,!' "li'ae v&elϋWlψ of 'arylazides can be increased by the presence of electron- withdrawing substituents such as nitro or hydroxyl groups in the ring. Such substituents push the absoφtion maximum of arylazides to longer wavelength. Unsubstituted arylazides have an absorption maximum in the range of 260-280 nm, while hydroxy and nitroarylazides absorb significant light beyond 305 nm. Therefore, hydroxy and nitroarylazides are most preferable since they allow to employ less harmful photolysis conditions for the affinity component than unsubstituted arylazides.
[0253] In another preferred embodiment, photoactivatable groups are selected from fluorinated arylazides. The photolysis products of fluorinated arylazides are arylnitrenes, all of which undergo the characteristic reactions of this group, including C-H bond insertion, with high efficiency (Keana et al, J. Org. Chem. 55: 3640-3647, 1990).
[0254] In another embodiment, photoactivatable groups are selected from benzophenone residues. Benzophenone reagents generally give higher crosslinking yields than arylazide reagents. [0255] In another embodiment, photoactivatable groups are selected from diazo compounds, which form an electron-deficient carbene upon photolysis. These carbenes undergo a variety of reactions including insertion into C-H bonds, addition to double bonds (including aromatic systems), hydrogen attraction and coordination to nucleophilic centers to give carbon ions. [0256] In still another embodiment, photoactivatable groups are selected from diazopyruvates. For example, the p-nitrophenyl ester of p-nitrophenyl diazopyruvate reacts with aliphatic amines to give diazopyruvic acid amides that undergo ultraviolet photolysis to form aldehydes. The photolyzed diazopyruvate-modifϊed affinity component will react like formaldehyde or glutaraldehyde forming crosslinks.
Homobifundional crosslinkers reactive with primary amines
[0257] Synthesis, properties, and applications of amine-reactive cross-linkers are commercially described in the literature (for reviews of crosslinking procedures and reagents, see above). Many reagents are available (e.g., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, 111.; Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo.; Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, OR.). [0258] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional NHS esters include disuccinimidyl glutarate (DSG), disuccinimidyl suberate (DSS), bis(sulfosuccinimidyl) suberate (BS), disuccinimidyl tartarate (DST), disulfosuccinimidyl tartarate (sulfo-DST), bis- carbonyloxy)ethylsulfone (sulfo-BSOCOES), ethylene glycolbis(succinimidylsuccinate) (EGS), ethylene glycolbis(sulfosuccinimidylsuccinate) (sulfo-EGS), dithiobis(succinimidyl- propionate (DSP), and dithiobis(sulfosuccinimidylpropionate (sulfo-DSP). Preferred, non- limiting examples of homobifunctional imidoesters include dimethyl malonimidate (DMM), dimethyl succinimidate (DMSC), dimethyl adipimidate (DMA), dimethyl pimelimidate (DMP), dimethyl suberimidate (DMS), dimethyl-3,3'-oxydipropionimidate (DODP), dimethyl-3 ,3 '-(methylenedioxy)dipropionimidate (DMDP), dimethyl-,3 '- (dimethyl enedioxy)dipropionimidate (DDDP), dimethyl-3 ,3 '-(tetramethylenedioxy)- dipropionimidate (DTDP), and dimethyl-3 ,3'-dithiobispropionimidate (DTBP).
[0259] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional isothiocyanates include: p- phenylenediisothiocyanate (DITC), and 4,4'-diisothiocyano-2,2'-disulfonic acid stilbene (DIDS).
[0260] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional isocyanates include xylene- diisocyanate, toluene-2,4-diisocyanate, toluene-2-isocyanate-4-isothiocyanate, 3- methoxydiphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 2,2'-dicarboxy-4,4'-azophenyldiisocyanate, and hexamethylenediisocyanate.
[0261] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional arylhalides include 1,5- difluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene (DFDNB), and 4,4'-difluoro-3,3'-dinitrophenyl-sulfone. [0262] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional aliphatic aldehyde reagents include glyoxal, malondialdehyde, and glutaraldehyde.
[0263] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional acylating reagents include nitrophenyl esters of dicarboxylic acids.
[0264] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional aromatic sulfonyl chlorides include phenol-2,4-disulfonyl chloride, and α-naphthol-2,4-disulfonyl chloride.
[0265] Preferred, non-limiting examples of additional amino-reactive homobifunctional reagents include erythritolbiscarbonate which reacts with amines to give biscarbamates.
Homobifunctional Crosslinkers Reactive with Free Sulfhydryl Groups
[0266] Synthesis, properties, and applications of such reagents are described in the literature (for reviews of crosslinking procedures and reagents, see above). Many ofthe ^4geIϊs-,'at & ιW r6ι^ili S ffalB (e.g., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, 111.; Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo.; Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, OR).
[0267] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional maleimides include bismaleimidohexane (BMH), N,N'-(l,3-phenylene) bismaleimide, N,N'-(1,2- phenylene)bismaleimide, azophenyldimaleimide, and bis(N-maleimidomethyl)ether.
[0268] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional pyridyl disulfides include l,4-di-3'-(2'-pyridyldithio)propionamidobutane (DPDPB).
[0269] Preferred, non- limiting examples of homobifunctional alkyl halides include 2,2'- dicarboxy-4,4'-diiodoacetamidoazobenzene, α,α'-diiodo-p-xylenesulfonic acid, α, α'-dibromo- p-xylenesulfonic acid, N,N'-bis(b-bromoethyl)benzylamine, N,N'- di(bromoacetyl)phenylthydrazine, and 1 ,2-di(bromoacetyl)amino-3 -phenylpropane.
Homobifunctional Photoactivatable Crosslinkers [0270] Synthesis, properties, and applications of such reagents are described in the literature (for reviews of crosslinking procedures and reagents, see above). Some ofthe reagents are commercially available (e.g., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, 111.; Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo.; Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, OR).
[0271] Preferred, non-limiting examples of homobifunctional photoactivatable crosslinker include bis-β-(4-azidosalicylamido)ethyldisulfide (BASED), di-N-(2-nitro-4-azidophenyl)- cystamine-S,S-dioxide (DNCO), and 4,4'-dithiobisphenylazide.
Amino-Readive HeteroBifundional Reagents with a Pyridyl Disulfide Moiety
[0272] Synthesis, properties, and applications of such reagents are described in the literature (for reviews of crosslinking procedures and reagents, see above). Many ofthe reagents are commercially available (e.g., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, III; Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo.; Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, OR). [0273] Preferred, non-limiting examples of hetero-bifunctional reagents with a pyridyl disulfide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include N-succinimidyl-3-(2- pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP), succinimidyl 6-3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionamidohexanoate (LC-SPDP), sulfosuccinimidyl 6-3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionamidohexanoate (sulfo- LCSPDP), 4-succinimidyloxycarbonyl-α-methyl-α-(2-pyridyldithio)toluene (SMPT), and sulfosuccinimidyl 6-α-methyl-α-(2-pyridyldithio)toluamidohexanoate (sulfo-LC-SMPT). " i≠i W®M έ M^kSS Αctional Reagents with a Maleimide Moiety [0274] Synthesis, properties, and applications of such reagents are described in the literature. Preferred, non-limiting examples of hetero-bifunctional reagents with a maleimide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include succinimidyl maleimidylacetate (AMAS), succinimidyl 3-maleimidylpropionate (BMPS), N- γ-maleimidobutyryloxysuccinimide ester (GMBS)N-γ-maleimidobutyryloxysulfo succinimide ester (sulfo-GMBS) succinimidyl 6- maleimidylhexanoate (EMCS), succinimidyl 3-maleimidylbenzoate (SMB), m- maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS), m-maleimidobenzoyl-N- hydroxysulfosuccinimide ester (sulfo-MBS), succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)- cyclohexane- 1 -carboxy late (SMCC), sulfosuccinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)cyclohexane- 1-carboxylate (sulfo-SMCC), succinimidyl 4-(p-maleimidophenyl)butyrate (SMPB), and sulfosuccinimidyl 4-(p-maleimidophenyl)butyrate (sulfo-SMPB).
Amino-Readive HeteroBifundional Reagents with an Alkyl Halide Moiety [0275] Synthesis, properties, and applications of such reagents are described in the literature Preferred, non- limiting examples of hetero-bifunctional reagents with an alkyl halide moiety and an amino-reactive NHS ester include N-succinimidyl-(4- iodoacetyl)aminobenzoate (SIAB), sulfosuccinimidyl-(4-iodoacetyl)aminobenzoate (sulfo- SIAB), succinimidyl-6-(iodoacetyl)aminohexanoate (SIAX), succinimidyl-6-(6-((iodoacetyl)- amino)hexanoylamino)hexanoate (SIAXX), succinimidyl-6-(((4-(iodoacetyl)-amino)- methyl)-cyclohexane-l-carbonyl)aminohexanoate (SIACX), and succinimidyl-4((iodoacetyl)- amino)methylcyclohexane- 1 -carboxylate (SIAC).
[0276] A preferred example of a hetero-bifunctional reagent with an amino-reactive NHS ester and an alkyl dihalide moiety is N-hydroxysuccinimidyl 2,3-dibromopropionate (SDBP). SDBP introduces intramolecular crosslinks to the affinity component by conjugating its amino groups. The reactivity ofthe dibromopropionyl moiety towards primary amine groups is controlled by the reaction temperature (McKenzie et al, Protein Chem. 7: 581-592 (1988)).
[0277] Preferred, non-limiting examples of hetero-bifunctional reagents with an alkyl halide moiety and an amino-reactive p-nitrophenyl ester moiety include p-nitrophenyl iodoacetate (NPIA). [Qjjf8]τ tteffilPEl-J'i!niJ&fei M ''are known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Pomato et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,965,106. It is within the abilities of one of skill in the art to choose an appropriate cross-linking agent for a particular application.
Cleavable Linker Groups [0279] In yet a further embodiment, the linker group is provided with a group that can be cleaved to release the modifying group from the sugar residue. Many cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al, Biochem. Biophys. Ada 761: 152-162 (1983); Joshi et al, J. Biol. Chem. 265: 14518-14525 (1990); Zarling et al, J. Immunol 124: 913-920 (1980); Bouizar et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 155: 141-147 (1986); Park et al, J. Biol. Chem. 261: 205-210 (1986); Browning et al, J. Immunol. 143: 1859-1867 (1989). Moreover a broad range of cleavable, bifunctional (both homo- and hetero-bifunctional) linker groups is commercially available from suppliers such as Pierce.
[0280] Exemplary cleaveable moieties can be cleaved using light, heat or reagents such as thiols, hydroxylamine, bases, periodate and the like. Moreover, certain preferred groups are cleaved in vivo in response to being endocytized (e.g., cis-aconityl; see, Shen et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 102: 1048 (1991)). Preferred cleaveable groups comprise a cleaveable moiety which is a member selected from the group consisting of disulfide, ester, imide, carbonate, nitrobenzyl, phenacyl and benzoin groups.
Conjugation of Modified Sugars to Peptides [0281] The modified sugars are conjugated to a glycosylated or non-glycosylated peptide using an appropriate enzyme to mediate the conjugation. Preferably, the concentrations of the modified donor sugar(s), enzyme(s) and acceptor peptide(s) are selected such that glycosylation proceeds until the acceptor is consumed. The considerations discussed below, while set forth in the context of a sialyltransferase, are generally applicable to other glycosyltransferase reactions.
[0282] A number of methods of using glycosyltransferases to synthesize desired oligosaccharide structures are known and are generally applicable to the instant invention. Exemplary methods are described, for instance, WO 96/32491, Ito et al, Pure Appl. Chem. 65: 753 (1993), and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,352,670, 5,374,541, and 5,545,553. [0283] The present invention is practiced using a single glycosyltransferase or a combination of glycosyltransferases. For example, one can use a combination of a sia,lyltF n^fφ a^ιppάa.'g8(J.ai( t^ !Sl B!Jasferase.- In those embodiments using more than one enzyme, e enzymes ana substrates are preferably combined in an initial reaction mixture, or the enzymes and reagents for a second enzymatic reaction are added to the reaction medium once the first enzymatic reaction is complete or nearly complete. By conducting two enzymatic reactions in sequence in a single vessel, overall yields are improved over procedures in which an intermediate species is isolated. Moreover, cleanup and disposal of extra solvents and by-products is reduced.
[0284] In a preferred embodiment, each ofthe first and second enzyme is a glycosyltransferase. In another preferred embodiment, one enzyme is an endoglycosidase. In an additional preferred embodiment, more than two enzymes are used to assemble the modified glycoprotein ofthe invention. The enzymes are used to alter a saccharide structure on the peptide at any point either before or after the addition ofthe modified sugar to the peptide.
[0285] In another embodiment, the method makes use of one or more exo- or endoglycosidase. The glycosidase is typically a mutant, which is engineered to form glycosyl bonds rather than cleave them. The mutant glycanase typically includes a substitution of an amino acid residue for an active site acidic amino acid residue. For example, when the endoglycanase is endo-H, the substituted active site residues will typically be Asp at position 130, Glu at position 132 or a combination thereof. The amino acids are generally replaced with serine, alanine, asparagine, or glutamine.
[0286] The mutant enzyme catalyzes the reaction, usually by a synthesis step that is analogous to the reverse reaction ofthe endoglycanase hydrolysis step. In these embodiments, the glycosyl donor molecule (e.g., a desired oligo- or mono-saccharide structure) contains a leaving group and the reaction proceeds with the addition ofthe donor molecule to a GlcNAc residue on the protein. For example, the leaving group can be a halogen, such as fluoride. In other embodiments, the leaving group is a Asn, or a Asn- peptide moiety. In yet further embodiments, the GlcNAc residue on the glycosyl donor molecule is modified. For example, the GlcNAc residue may comprise a 1,2 oxazoline moiety. [0287] In a preferred embodiment, each ofthe enzymes utilized to produce a conjugate of the invention are present in a catalytic amount. The catalytic amount of a particular enzyme varies according to the concentration of that enzyme's substrate as well as to reaction conditions- §uc>l |
Figure imgf000075_0001
and pH value. Means for determining the catalytic amount for a given enzyme under preselected substrate concentrations and reaction conditions are well known to those of skill in the art.
[0288] The temperature at which an above process is carried out can range from just above freezing to the temperature at which the most sensitive enzyme denatures. Preferred temperature ranges are about 0 °C to about 55 °C, and more preferably about 20 ° C to about 30 °C. In another exemplary embodiment, one or more components ofthe present method are conducted at an elevated temperature using a thermophilic enzyme.
[0289] The reaction mixture is maintained for a period of time sufficient for the acceptor to , be glycosylated, thereby forming the desired conjugate. Some ofthe conjugate can often be detected after a few hours, with recoverable amounts usually being obtained within 24 hours or less. Those of skill in the art understand that the rate of reaction is dependent on a number of variable factors (e.g, enzyme concentration, donor concentration, acceptor concentration, temperature, solvent volume), which are optimized for a selected system. [0290] The present invention also provides for the industrial-scale production of modified peptides. As used herein, an industrial scale generally produces at least about 250 mg, preferably at least about 500 mg, and more preferably at least about 1 gram of finished, purified conjugate, preferably after a single reaction cycle, i.e., the conjugate is not a combination the reaction products from identical, consecutively iterated synthesis cycles. [0291] In the discussion that follows, the invention is exemplified by the conjugation of modified sialic acid moieties to a glycosylated peptide. The exemplary modified sialic acid is labeled with m-PEG. The focus ofthe following discussion on the use of PEG-modified sialic acid and glycosylated peptides is for clarity of illustration and is not intended to imply that the invention is limited to the conjugation of these two partners. One of skill understands that the discussion is generally applicable to the additions of modified glycosyl moieties other than sialic acid. Moreover, the discussion is equally applicable to the modification of a glycosyl unit with agents other than m-PEG including other water-soluble polymers, therapeutic moieties, and biomolecules.
[0292] An enzymatic approach can be used for the selective introduction of m-PEG-ylated or m-PPG-ylated carbohydrates onto a peptide or glycopeptide. The method utilizes modified sugars containing PEG, PPG, or a masked reactive functional group, and is combined with the appropriate glycosyltransferase or glycosynthase. By selecting the
Figure imgf000076_0001
carbohydrate linkage and utilizing the modified sugar as the donor substiate, the PEG or PPG can be introduced directly onto the peptide backbone, onto existing sugar residues of a glycopeptide or onto sugar residues that have been added to a peptide. [0293] An acceptor for the sialyltransferase is present on the peptide to be modified by the methods ofthe present invention either as a naturally occurring structure or one placed there recombinantly, enzymatically or chemically. Suitable acceptors, include, for example, galactosyl acceptors such as Galβl,4GlcNAc, Galβl,4GalNAc, Galβ 1,3 GalNAc, lacto-N- tetraose, Galβ 1,3 GlcNAc, GalNAc, Galβ 1,3 GalNAc, Galβl,6GlcNAc, Galβl,4Glc (lactose), and other acceptors known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Paulson et al, J. Biol. Chem. 253: 5617-5624 (1978)).
[0294] In one embodiment, an acceptor for the sialyltransferase is present on the glycopeptide to be modified upon in vivo synthesis ofthe glycopeptide. Such glycopeptides can be sialylated using the claimed methods without prior modification ofthe glycosylation pattern ofthe glycopeptide. Alternatively, the methods ofthe invention can be used to sialylate a peptide that does not include a suitable acceptor; one first modifies the peptide to include an acceptor by methods known to those of skill in the art. In an exemplary embodiment, a GalNAc residue is added by the action of a GalNAc transferase.
[0295] In an exemplary embodiment, the galactosyl acceptor is assembled by attaching a galactose residue to an appropriate acceptor linked to the peptide, e.g., a GalNAc. The method includes incubating the peptide to be modified with a reaction mixture that contains a suitable amount of a galactosyltransferase (e.g., Galβ 1,3 or Galβ 1,4), and a suitable galactosyl donor (e.g., UDP-galactose). The reaction is allowed to proceed substantially to completion or, alternatively, the reaction is terminated when a preselected amount ofthe galactose residue is added. Other methods of assembling a selected saccharide acceptor will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
[0296] In yet another embodiment, glycopeptide-linked oligosaccharides are first "trimmed," either in whole or in part, to expose either an acceptor for the sialyltransferase or a moiety to which one or more appropriate residues can be added to obtain a suitable , acceptor. Enzymes such as glycosyltransferases and endoglycosidases (see, for example U.S. Patent No. 5,716,812) are useful for the attaching and trimming reactions. [Q2^, .]τ-Inιt-j .d si iqissιiorJlh^f 6^vs5 the method ofthe invention is exemplified by the use of modified sugars having a water-soluble polymer attached thereto. The focus ofthe discussion is for clarity of illustration. Those of skill will appreciate that the discussion is equally relevant to those embodiments in which the modified sugar bears a therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or the like.
[0298] In an exemplary embodiment, an O-linked carbohydrate residue is "trimmed" prior to the addition ofthe modified sugar. For example a GalNAc-Gal residue is trimmed back to GalNAc. A modified sugar bearing a water-soluble polymer is conjugated to one or more of the sugar residues exposed by the "trimming." In one example, a glycopeptide is "trimmed" and a water-soluble polymer is added to the resulting O-side chain amino acid or glycopeptide glycan via a saccharyl moiety, e.g., Sia, Gal, or GalNAc moiety conjugated to the water-soluble polymer. The modified saccharyl moiety is attached to an acceptor site on the "trimmed" glycopeptide. Alternatively, an unmodified saccharyl moiety, e.g., Gal can be added the terminus ofthe O-linked glycan. [0299] In another exemplary embodiment, a water-soluble polymer is added to a GalNAc residue via a modified sugar having a galactose residue. Alternatively, an unmodified Gal can be added to the terminal GalNAc residue.
[0300] In yet a further example, a water-soluble polymer is added onto a Gal residue using a modified sialic acid. [0301] In another exemplary embodiment, an O-linked glycosyl residue is "trimmed back" to the GalNAc attached to the amino acid. In one example, a water-soluble polymer is added via a Gal modified with the polymer. Alternatively, an unmodified Gal is added to the GalNAc, followed by a Gal with an attached water-soluble polymer. In yet another embodiment, one or more unmodified Gal residue is added to the GalNAc, followed by a sialic acid moiety modified with a water-soluble polymer.
[0302] Using the methods ofthe invention, it is possible to "trim back" and build up a carbohydrate residue of substantially any desired structure. The modified sugar can be added to the termini ofthe carbohydrate moiety as set forth above, or it can be intermediate between the peptide core and the terminus ofthe carbohydrate. [0303] In an exemplary embodiment, the water-soluble polymer is added to a terminal Gal residue using a polymer modified sialic acid. An appropriate sialyltransferase is used to add a modified sialic acid. The approach is summarized in Scheme 5. Scheme 5
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000078_0002
Sialyltransferase
CMP-SA-5-NHC0CH2NH — PEG(PPG)
Glycoprotein
Figure imgf000078_0003
[0304] In yet a further approach, summarized in Scheme 6, a masked reactive functionality is present on the sialic acid. The masked reactive group is preferably unaffected by the conditions used to attach the modified sialic acid to the peptide. After the covalent attachment ofthe modified sialic acid to the peptide, the mask is removed and the peptide is conjugated with an agent such as PEG, PPG, a therapeutic moiety, biomolecule or other agent. The agent is conjugated to the peptide in a specific manner by its reaction with the unmasked reactive group on the modified sugar residue.
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000078_0004
[0305] Any modified sugar can be used with its appropriate glycosyltransferase, depending on the terminal sugars ofthe oligosaccharide side chains ofthe glycopeptide (Table 2). As discussed above, the terminal sugar ofthe glycopeptide required for introduction ofthe PEG- ylated or PPG-ylated structure can be introduced naturally during expression or it can be produced post expression using the appropriate glycosidase(s), glycosyltransferase(s) or mix of glycosidase(s) and glycosyltransferase(s).
Table 2
Figure imgf000079_0001
UDP-galactosamine-derivatives UDP-galactose-derivatives (when A = NH, R4 may be acetyl)
Figure imgf000079_0002
UDP-Glucose-derivatives UDP-Glucosamine-derivatives (when A = NH, R4 may be acetyl)
Figure imgf000079_0003
GDP-Mannose-derivatives
X = 0, NH, S) CH2) N-(Rl-5)2. Y = X; Z = X; A = X; B = X. Ligand of interest = acyl-PEG, acyl-PPG, alkyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, acyl-alkyl-PEG, carbamoyl-PEG, carbamoyl-PPG, PEG, PPG,
Q = H2, O, S, NH, N-R. acyl-aryl-PEG, acyl-aryl-PPG, aryl-PEG, aryl-PPG, Mannose-g-phosphate, heparin, heparan, SLex, Mannose, FGF, VFGF,
R, R = H, Linker-M, M. protein, chondroitin, keratan, dermatan, albumin, integrins, peptides, etc.
M = Ligand of interest β όf .•lft.'a''^rth' .'exω^lSry»i bodiment, UDP-galactose-PEG is reacted with bovine milk βl,4-galactosyltransferase, thereby transferring the modified galactose to the appropriate terminal N-acetylglucosamine structure. The terminal GlcNAc residues on the glycopeptide may be produced during expression, as may occur in such expression systems as mammalian, insect, plant or fungus, but also can be produced by treating the glycopeptide with a sialidase and/or glycosidase and/or glycosyltransferase, as required.
[0307] In another exemplary embodiment, a GlcNAc transferase, such as GNT1-5, is utilized to transfer PEGylated-GlcN to a terminal mannose residue on a glycopeptide. In a still further exemplary embodiment, an the N- and/or O-linked glycan structures are enzymatically removed from a glycopeptide to expose an amino acid or a terminal glycosyl residue that is subsequently conjugated with the modified sugar. For example, an endoglycanase is used to remove the N-linked structures of a glycopeptide to expose a terminal GlcNAc as a GlcNAc-linked-Asn on the glycopeptide. UDP-Gal-PEG and the appropriate galactosyltransferase is used to introduce the PEG- or PPG-galactose functionality onto the exposed GlcNAc.
[0308] In an alternative embodiment, the modified sugar is added directly to the peptide backbone using a glycosyltransferase known to transfer sugar residues to the peptide backbone. This exemplary embodiment is set forth in Scheme 7. Exemplary glycosyltransferases useful in practicing the present invention include, but are not limited to, GalNAc transferases (GalNAc Tl-20), GlcNAc transferases, fucosyltransferases, glucosyltransferases, xylosylrransferases, mannosyltransferases and the like. Use of this approach allows the direct addition of modified sugars onto peptides that lack any carbohydrates or, alternatively, onto existing glycopeptides. In both cases, the addition ofthe modified sugar occurs at specific positions on the peptide backbone as defined by the substrate specificity ofthe glycosyltransferase and not in a random manner as occurs during modification of a protein's peptide backbone using chemical methods. An array of agents can be introduced into proteins or glycopeptides that lack the glycosyltransferase substrate peptide sequence by engineering the appropriate amino acid sequence into the polypeptide chain. ϋSc emiei' ;:
Figure imgf000081_0001
[0309] In each ofthe exemplary embodiments set forth above, one or more additional chemical or enzymatic modification steps can be utilized following the conjugation ofthe modified sugar to the peptide. In an exemplary embodiment, an enzyme (e.g., fucosyltransferase) is used to append a glycosyl unit (e.g., fucose) onto the terminal modified sugar attached to the peptide. In another example, an enzymatic reaction is utilized to "cap" (e.g., sialylate) sites to which the modified sugar failed to conjugate. Alternatively, a chemical reaction is utilized to alter the structure ofthe conjugated modified sugar. For example, the conjugated modified sugar is reacted with agents that stabilize or destabilize its linkage with the peptide component to which the modified sugar is attached. In another example, a component ofthe modified sugar is deprotected following its conjugation to the peptide. One of skill will appreciate that there is an array of enzymatic and chemical procedures that are useful in the methods ofthe invention at a stage after the modified sugar is conjugated to the peptide. Further elaboration ofthe modified sugar-peptide conjugate is within the scope ofthe invention.
Enzymes
Glycosyltransferases
[0310] Glycosyltransferases catalyze the addition of activated sugars (donor NDP-sugars), in a step- wise fashion, to a protein, glycopeptide, lipid or glycolipid or to the non-reducing end of a growing oligosaccharide. N-linked glycopeptides are synthesized via a transferase and a lipid-linked oligosaccharide donor Dol-PP-NAG Glc3Man9 in an en block transfer followed by trimming ofthe core. In this case the nature ofthe "core" saccharide is somewhat different from subsequent attachments. A very large number of glycosyltransferases are known in the art.
[0311] The glycosyltransferase to be used in the present invention may be any as long as it can utilize the modified sugar as a sugar donor. Examples of such enzymes include Leloir
Figure imgf000082_0001
N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase, fucosyltransferase, sialyltransferase, mannosyltransferase, xylosyltransferase, glucurononyltransferase and the like.
[0312] For enzymatic saccharide syntheses that involve glycosyltransferase reactions, glycosyltransferase can be cloned, or isolated from any source. Many cloned glycosyltransferases are known, as are their polynucleotide sequences. See, e.g., "The WWW Guide To Cloned Glycosyltransferases," (http://www.vei.co.uk/TGN/gt guide.htm). Glycosyltransferase amino acid sequences and nucleotide sequences encoding glycosyltransferases from which the amino acid sequences can be deduced are also found in various publicly available databases, including GenBank, Swiss-Prot, EMBL, and others.
[0313] Glycosyltransferases that can be employed in the methods ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, galactosyltransferases, fucosyltransferases, glucosyltransferases, N- acetylgalactosaminyltransferases, N-acetylglucosaminyltransferases, glucuronyltransferases, sialyltransferases, mannosyltransferases, glucuronic acid transferases, galacturonic acid transferases, and oligosaccharyltransferases. Suitable glycosyltransferases include those obtained from eukaryotes, as well as from prokaryotes.
[0314] DNA encoding the enzyme glycosyltransferases may be obtained by chemical synthesis, by screening reverse transcripts of mRNA from appropriate cells or cell line cultures, by screening genomic libraries from appropriate cells, or by combinations of these procedures. Screening of mRNA or genomic DNA may be carried out with oligonucleotide probes generated from the glycosyltransferases gene sequence. Probes may be labeled with a detectable group such as a fluorescent group, a radioactive atom or a chemiluminescent group in accordance with known procedures and used in conventional hybridization assays. In the alternative, glycosyltransferases gene sequences may be obtained by use ofthe polymerase chain reaction (PCR) procedure, with the PCR oligonucleotide primers being produced from the glycosyltransferases gene sequence. See, U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,195 to Mullis et al. and U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202 to Mullis.
[0315] The glycosyltransferases enzyme may be synthesized in host cells transformed with vectors containing DNA encoding the glycosyltransferases enzyme. A vector is a replicable DNA construct. Nectors are used either to amplify DΝA encoding the glycosyltransferases enzyme and/or to express DΝA which encodes the glycosyltransferases enzyme. An expression vector is a replicable DΝA construct in which a DΝA sequence encoding the §iycos;yitra ϊSrerøδ'es.enz riJte::ϊS'''oβi@rably linked to suitable control sequences capable of effecting the expression ofthe glycosyltransferases enzyme in a suitable host. The need for such control sequences will vary depending upon the host selected and the transformation method chosen. Generally, control sequences include a transcriptional promoter, an optional operator sequence to control transcription, a sequence encoding suitable mRNA ribosomal binding sites, and sequences which control the termination of transcription and translation. Amplification vectors do not require expression control domains. All that is needed is the ability to replicate in a host, usually conferred by an origin of replication, and a selection gene to facilitate recognition of transformants. Fucosyltransferases
[0316] In some embodiments, a glycosyltransferase used in the method ofthe invention is a fucosyltransferase. Fucosyltransferases are known to those of skill in the art. Exemplary fuco.syltransferases include enzymes, which transfer L-fucose from GDP-fucose to a hydroxy position of an acceptor sugar. Fucosyltransferases that transfer non-nucleotide sugars to an acceptor are also of use in the present invention.
[0317] In some embodiments, the acceptor sugar is, for example, the GlcNAc in a Galβ(l— 3,4)GlcNAcβ- group in an oligosaccharide glycoside. Suitable fucosyltransferases for this reaction include the Galβ(l→3,4)GlcNAcβl-α(l→3,4)fucosyltransferase (FTIII E.G. No. 2.4.1.65), which was first characterized from human milk (see, Palcic, et al, Carbohydrate Res. 190: 1-11 (1989); Prieels, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 256: 10456-10463 (1981); and Nunez, et al, Can. J. Chem. 59: 2086-2095 (1981)) and the Galβ(l→4)GlcNAcβ- αfucosyltransferases (FTIN, FTV, FTNI) which are found in human serum. FTNII (E.C. No. 2.4.1.65), a sialyl α(2->θ)Galβ((l-»3)GlcNAcβ fucosyltransferase, has also been characterized. A recombinant form ofthe Galβ(l— »3,4) GlcNAcβ- α(l- 3,4)fucosyltransferase has also been characterized (see, Dumas, et al, Bioorg. Med. Letters 1: 425-428 (1991) and Kukowska-Latallo, et al, Genes and Development 4: 1288- 1303 (1990)). Other exemplary fucosyltransferases include, for example, αl,2 fucosyltransferase (E.C. No. 2.4.1.69). Enzymatic fucosylation can be carried out by the methods described in Mollicone, et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 191: 169-176 (1990) or U.S. Patent No. 5,374,655. Cells that are used to produce a fucosyltransferase will also include an enzymatic system for synthesizing GDP-fucose. C aBsylfa sflr kes' ,'
[0318] In another group of embodiments, the glycosyltransferase is a galactosyltransferase. Exemplary galactosyltransferases include α(l,3) galactosyltransferases (E.C. No. 2.4.1.151, see, e.g., Dabkowski et al, Transplant Proc. 25:2921 (1993) and Yamamoto et al Nature 345: 229-233 (1990), bovine (GenBank J04989, Joziasse et al, J. Biol. Chem. 264: 14290- 14297 (1989)), murine (GenBank m26925; Larsen et al, Proc. N t 7. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 8227-8231 (1989)), porcine (GenBank L36152; Strahan et al, Immunogenetics 41: 101-105 (1995)). Another suitable αl,3 galactosyltransferase is that which is involved in synthesis of the blood group B antigen (EC 2.4.1.37, Yamamoto et al, J. Biol. Chem. 265: 1146-1151 (1990) (human)).
[0319] Also suitable for use in the methods of the invention are β(l,4) galactosyltransferases, which include, for example, EC 2.4.1.90 (LacΝAc synthetase) and EC 2.4.1.22 (lactose synthetase) (bovine (D'Agostaro et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 183: 211-217 (1989)), human (Masri et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 157: 657-663 (1988)), murine (Νakazawa et al, J. Biochem. 104: 165-168 (1988)), as well as E.C. 2.4.1.38 and the ceramide galactosyltransferase (EC 2.4.1.45, Stahl et al, J. Neurosci. Res. 38: 234-242 (1994)). Other suitable galactosyltransferases include, for example, αl,2 galactosyltransferases (from e.g., Schizosaccharomyces pombe, Chapell et al, Mol Biol. Cell 5: 519-528 (1994)). [0320] The production of proteins such as the enzyme GalNAc Ti αv from cloned genes by genetic engineering is well known. See, eg., U.S. Pat. No. 4,761,371. One method involves collection of sufficient samples, then the amino acid sequence ofthe enzyme is determined by N-terminal sequencing. This information is then used to isolate a cDNA clone encoding a full-length (membrane bound) transferase which upon expression in the insect cell line Sf9 resulted in the synthesis of a fully active enzyme. The acceptor specificity ofthe enzyme is then determined using a semiquantitative analysis ofthe amino acids surrounding known glycosylation sites in 16 different proteins followed by in vitro glycosylation studies of synthetic peptides. This work has demonstrated that certain amino acid residues are overrepresented in glycosylated peptide segments and that residues in specific positions surrounding glycosylated serine and threonine residues may have a more marked influence on acceptor efficiency than other amino acid moieties. Sϊ'aϊv]
[0321] Sialyltransferases are another type of glycosyltransferase that is useful in the recombinant cells and reaction mixtures ofthe invention. Cells that produce recombinant sialyltransferases will also produce CMP-sialic acid, which is a sialic acid donor for sialyltransferases. Examples of sialyltransferases that are suitable for use in the present invention include ST3Gal III (e.g., a rat or human ST3Gal III), ST3Gal IN, ST3Gal I, ST6Gal I, ST3Gal N, ST6Gal II, ST6GalΝAc I, ST6GalNAc II, and ST6GalNAc III (the sialyltransferase nomenclature used herein is as described in Tsuji et al, Glycobiology 6: v- xiv (1996)). An exemplary α(2,3)sialyltransferase referred to as α(2,3)sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.6) transfers sialic acid to the non-reducing terminal Gal of a Galβl— 3Glc disaccharide or glycoside. See, Nan den Eijnden et al, J. Biol. Chem. 256: 3159 (1981), Weinstein et al, J. Biol. Chem. 257: 13845 (1982) and Wen et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 21011 (1992). Another exemplary α2,3-sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.4) transfers sialic acid to the non-reducing terminal Gal ofthe disaccharide or glycoside. see, Rearick et al, J. Biol. Chem. 254: 4444 (1979) and Gillespie et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 21004 (1992). Further exemplary enzymes include Gal-β-l,4-GlcΝAc α-2,6 sialyltransferase (See, Kurosawa et al. Eur. J. Biochem. 219: 375-381 (1994)).
[0322] Preferably, for glycosylation of carbohydrates of glycopeptides the sialyltransferase will be able to transfer sialic acid to the sequence Galβl,4GlcNAc-, the most common penultimate sequence underlying the terminal sialic acid on fully sialylated carbohydrate structures (see, Table 3).
ΗiaeBa'SUUSSWft ri.sc use the Galβl,4GlcNAc sequence as an acceptor substrate
Figure imgf000086_0001
1) Goochee et al, Bio/Technology 9: 1347-1355 (1991)
2) Yamamoto et al, J. Biochem. 120: 104-110 (1996)
3) Gilbert et al, J. Biol. Chem. 271: 28271-28276 (1996)
[0323] An example of a sialyltransferase that is useful in the claimed methods is ST3Gal III, which is also referred to as α(2,3)sialyltransferase (EC 2.4.99.6). This enzyme catalyzes the transfer of sialic acid to the Gal of a Galβ 1,3 GlcNAc or Galβl,4GlcNAc glycoside (see, e.g., Wen et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 21011 (1992); Van den Eijnden et al, J. Biol. Chem. 256: 3159 (1991)) and is responsible for sialylation of asparagine-linked oligosaccharides in glycopeptides. The sialic acid is linked to a Gal with the formation of an α-linkage between the two saccharides. Bonding (linkage) between the saccharides is between the 2-position of NeuAc and the 3-position of Gal. This particular enzyme can be isolated from rat liver
(Weinstein et al, J. Biol. Chem. 257: 13845 (1982)); the human cDNA (Sasaki et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268: 22782-22787; Kitagawa & Paulson (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269: 1394- 1401) and genomic (Kitagawa et al. (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 931-938) DNA sequences are known, facilitating production of this enzyme by recombinant expression. In a preferred embodiment, the claimed sialylation methods use a rat ST3Gal III.
[0324] Other exemplary sialyltransferases of use in the present invention include those isolated from Campylobacter jejuni, including the α(2,3). See, e.g, WO99/49051.
[0325] Sialyltransferases other than those listed in Table 3, are also useful in an economic and efficient large-scale process for sialylation of commercially important glycopeptides. As a simple test to find out the utility of these other enzymes, various amounts of each enzyme
Figure imgf000087_0001
with asialo-αi AGP (at 1-10 mg/ml) to compare the ability ofthe sialyltransferase of interest to sialylate glycopeptides relative to either bovine ST6Gal I, ST3Gal III or both sialyltransferases. Alternatively, other glycopeptides or glycopeptides, or N-linked oligosaccharides enzymatically released from the peptide backbone can be used in place of asialo-cti AGP for this evaluation. Sialyltransferases with the ability to sialylate N-linked oligosaccharides of glycopeptides more efficiently than ST6Gal I are useful in a practical large-scale process for peptide sialylation (as illustrated for ST3Gal III in this disclosure).
Other glycosyltransferases [0326] One of skill in the art will understand that other glycosyltransferases can be substituted into similar transferase cycles as have been described in detail for the sialyltransferase. In particular, the glycosyltransferase can also be, for instance, glucosyltransferases, e.g., Alg8 (Stagljov et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91: 5977 (1994)) or Alg5 (Heesen et al, Eur. J. Biochem. 224: 71 (1994)). [0327] N-acetylgalactosaminylrransferases are also of use in practicing the present invention. Suitable N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferases include, but are not limited to, α(l,3) N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase, β(l,4) N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferases (Nagata et al, J. Biol. Chem. 267: 12082-12089 (1992) and Smith et al, J. Biol Chem. 269: 15162 (1994)) and polypeptide N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase (Homa et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268: 12609 ( 1993)). Suitable N-acetylglucosaminyltransferases include GnTI (2.4.1.101, Hull et al, BBRC 176: 608 (1991)), GnTII, GnTIII (Ihara et al, J. Biochem. 113: 692 (1993)), GnTIV, and GnTV (Shoreiban et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268: 15381 (1993)), O-linked N- acetylglucosaminyltransferase (Bierhuizen et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 9326 (1992)), N-acetylglucosamine-1 -phosphate transferase (Rajput et al, Biochem J. 285: 985 (1992), and hyaluronan synthase.
[0328] Mannosyltransferases are of use to transfer modified mannose moieties. Suitable mannosyltransferases include α(l,2) mannosyltransferase, α(l,3) mannosyltransferase, α(l,6) mannosyltransferase, β(l,4) mannosyltransferase, Dol-P-Man synthase, OChl, and Pmtl (see, Kornfeld et al, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 54: 631-664 (1985)). [0329] Xylosyl transferases are also useful in the present invention. See, for example, Rodgers, et al, Biochem. J., 288:817-822 (1992); and Elbain, et al, U.S. Patent No., 6,168,937. Qttf f futaU^^^ are described in Ichikawa et al, JACS 114: 9283
(1992), Wong et al, J. Org. Chem. 57: 4343 (1992), and Ichikawa et al. in CARBOHYDRATES AND CARBOHYDRATE POLYMERS. Yaltami, ed. (ATL Press, 1993).
[0330] Prokaryotic glycosyltransferases are also useful in practicing the invention. Such glycosyltransferases include enzymes involved in synthesis of lipooligosaccharides (LOS), which are produced by many gram negative bacteria. The LOS typically have terminal glycan sequences that mimic glycoconjugates found on the surface of human epithelial cells or in host secretions (Preston et al, Critical Reviews in Microbiology 23(3): 139-180 (1996)). Such enzymes include, but are not limited to, the proteins ofthe rfa operons of species such as E. coli and Salmonella typhimurium, which include a βl,6 galactosyltransferase and a βl,3 galactosyltransferase (see, e.g., EMBL Accession Nos. M80599 and M86935 (E. coli); ΕMBL Accession No. S56361 (S. typhimurium)), a glucosyltransferase (Swiss-Prot Accession No. P25740 (E. coli), an βl,2-glucosyltransferase (r/αJ)(Swiss-Prot Accession No. P27129 (E. coli) and Swiss-Prot Accession No. PI 9817 (S. typhimurium)), and an βl,2-N- acetylglucosaminyltransferase (r/αK)(ΕMBL Accession No. U00039 (E. coli). Other glycosyltransferases for which amino acid sequences are known include those that are encoded by operons such as rfaB, which have been characterized in organisms such as Klebsiella pneumoniae, E. coli, Salmonella typhimurium, Salmonella enterica, Yersinia enter ocolitica, Mycobaderium leprosum, and the rhl operon of Pseudomonas aeruginosa. [0331] Also suitable for use in the present invention are glycosyltransferases that are involved in producing structures containing lacto-N-neotetraose, D-galactosyl-β-l,4-N- acetyl-D-glucosaminyl-β-l,3-D-galactosyl-β-l,4-D-glucose, and the Pk blood group trisaccharide sequence, D-galactosyl-α-l,4-D-galactosyl-β-l,4-D-glucose, which have been identified in the LOS ofthe mucosal pathogens Neisseria gonnorhoeae and N. meningitidis (Scholten et al, J. Med. Microbiol 41: 236-243 (1994)). The genes from N. meningitidis and N. gonorrhoeae that encode the glycosyltransferases involved in the biosynthesis of these structures have been identified from N. meningitidis immunotypes L3 and LI (Jennings et al, Mol Microbiol. 18: 729-740 (1995)) and the N. gonorrhoeae mutant F62 (Gotshlich, J. Exp. Med. 180: 2181-2190 (1994)). In N. meningitidis, a locus consisting of three genes, IgtA, IgtB and Ig E, encodes the glycosyltransferase enzymes required for addition ofthe last three ofthe sugars in the lacto-N-neotetraose chain (Wakarchuk et al, J. Biol. Chem. 271: 19166- 73 (1996)). Recently the enzymatic activity ofthe IgtB and IgtA gene product was demonstrated, providing the first direct evidence for their proposed glycosyltransferase
Figure imgf000089_0001
271(45): 28271-276 (1996)). In N. gonorrhoeae, there are two additional genes, IgtD which adds β-D-GalΝAc to the 3 position ofthe terminal galactose ofthe lacto-N-neotetraose structure and IgtC which adds a terminal α-D-Gal to the lactose element of a truncated LOS, thus creating the Pk blood group antigen structure (Gotshlich (1994), supra.). In N. meningitidis, a separate immunotype LI also expresses the Pk blood group antigen and has been shown to carry an IgtC gene (Jennings et al, (1995), supra.). Neisseria glycosyltransferases and associated genes are also described in USPΝ 5,545,553 (Gotschlich). Genes for αl,2-fucosyltransferase and α 1,3 -fucosyltransferase from Helicobader pylori has also been characterized (Martin et al, J. Biol. Chem. 272: 21349- 21356 (1997)). Also of use in the present invention are the glycosyltransferases of
Campylobacter jejuni (see, for example, http://afrnb.cnrs-rnrs.fr/~pedro/CAZY/gtf_42.html).
Sulfotransferases
[0332] The invention also provides methods for producing peptides that include sulfated molecules, including, for example sulfated polysaccharides such as heparin, heparan sulfate, carragenen, and related compounds. Suitable sulfotransferases include, for example, chondroitin-6-sulphotransferase (chicken cDΝA described by Fukuta et al, J. Biol. Chem. 270: 18575-18580 (1995); GenBank Accession No. D49915), glycosaminoglycan N- acetylglucosamine N-deacetylase/N-sulphotransferase 1 (Dixon et α/., Genomics 26: 239-241 (1995); UL18918), and glycosaminoglycan N-acetylglucosamine N-deacetylase/N- sulphotransferase 2 (murine cDNA described in Orellana et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 2270- 2276 (1994) and Eriksson et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 10438-10443 (1994); human cDNA described in GenBank Accession No. U2304).
Cell-Bound Glycosyltransferases
[0333] In another embodiment, the enzymes utilized in the method ofthe invention are cell-bound glycosyltransferases. Although many soluble glycosyltransferases are known
(see, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,032,519), glycosyltransferases are generally in membrane- bound form when associated with cells. Many ofthe membrane-bound enzymes studied thus far are considered to be intrinsic proteins; that is, they are not released from the membranes by sonication and require detergents for solubilization. Surface glycosyltransferases have been identified on the surfaces of vertebrate and invertebrate cells, and it has also been recognized that these surface transferases maintain catalytic activity under physiological conditions. However, the more recognized function of cell surface glycosyltransferases is for |HtllcilMU.iSdH§iitiόrJI(!MolBJi; feΕcuLAR APPROACHES to SUPRACELLULAR PHENOMENA, 1990).
[0334] Methods have been developed to alter the glycosyltransferases expressed by cells. For example, Larsen et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86: 8227-8231 (1989), report a genetic approach to isolate cloned cDNA sequences that determine expression of cell surface oligosaccharide structures and their cognate glycosyltransferases. A cDNA library generated from mRNA isolated from a murine cell line known to express UDP-galactose:. β.-D- galactosyl-l,4-N-acetyl-D-glucosaminide α-l,3-galactosyltransferase was transfected into COS-1 cells. The transfected cells were then cultured and assayed for α 1-3 galactosyltransferase activity.
[0335] Francisco et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 2713-2717 (1992), disclose a method of anchoring β-lactamase to the external surface of Escherichia coli. A tripartite fusion consisting of (i) a signal sequence of an outer membrane protein, (ii) a membrane- spanning section of an outer membrane protein, and (iii) a complete mature β-lactamase sequence is produced resulting in an active surface bound β-lactamase molecule. However, the Francisco method is limited only to procaryotic cell systems and as recognized by the authors, requires the complete tripartite fusion for proper functioning.
Fusion Proteins
[0336] In other exemplary embodiments, the methods ofthe invention utilize fusion proteins that have more than one enzymatic activity that is involved in synthesis of a desired glycopeptide conjugate. The fusion polypeptides can be composed of, for example, a catalytically active domain of a glycosyltransferase that is joined to a catalytically active domain of an accessory enzyme. The accessory enzyme catalytic domain can, for example, catalyze a step in the formation of a nucleotide sugar that is a donor for the glycosyltransferase, or catalyze a reaction involved in a glycosyltransferase cycle. For example, a polynucleotide that encodes a glycosyltransferase can be joined, in-frame, to a polynucleotide that encodes an enzyme involved in nucleotide sugar synthesis. The resulting fusion protein can then catalyze not only the synthesis ofthe nucleotide sugar, but also the transfer ofthe sugar moiety to the acceptor molecule. The fusion protein can be two or more cycle enzymes linked into one expressible nucleotide sequence. In other embodiments the fusion protein includes the catalytically active domains of two or more glycosyltransferases. See, for example, 5,641,668. The modified glycopeptides ofthe present invention can be ffe^dϊlf de i ne IWd'nitriyifffifirel' utilizing various suitable fusion proteins (see, for example, PCT Patent Application PCT/CA98/01180, which was published as WO 99/31224 on June 24, 1999.)
Immobilized Enzymes [0337] In addition to cell-bound enzymes, the present invention also provides for the use of enzymes that are immobilized on a solid and/or soluble support. In an exemplary embodiment, there is provided a glycosyltransferase that is conjugated to a PEG via an intact glycosyl linker according to the methods of the invention. The PEG-linker-enzyme conjugate is optionally attached to solid support. The use of solid supported enzymes in the methods of the invention simplifies the work up ofthe reaction mixture and purification ofthe reaction product, and also enables the facile recovery ofthe enzyme. The glycosyltransferase conjugate is utilized in the methods ofthe invention. Other combinations of enzymes and supports will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
Glycosylation by Recombinant Methods [0338] Glycosylation of a mutant human growth hormone may also be accomplished intracellularly by recombinant means. A polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone, which comprises at least one newly introduced N- or O-linked glycosylation site, may be transfected into a suitable host cell line, e.g., a eukaryotic cell line derived from yeast, insect, or mammalian origin. The mutant human growth hormone recombinantly produced from such a cell line is glycosylated by the host cell glycosylation machinery.
Purification of Glycosylated Mutant hGH
[0339] The glycosylated human growth hormone produced by the above processes is preferably purified before use. Standard, well known techniques such as thin or thick layer chromatography, column chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, or membrane filtration can be used. It is preferred to use membrane filtration, more preferably utilizing a reverse osmotic membrane, or one or more column chromatographic techniques for the recovery as is discussed hereinafter and in the literature cited herein.
[0340] If the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone is produced intracellularly, as a first step, the particulate debris, either host cells or lysed fragments, is removed, for example, by centrifugation or ultrafiltration; optionally, the protein may be concentrated with a
Figure imgf000092_0001
followed by separating the polypeptide variant from other impurities by one or more steps selected from immunoaffinity chromatography, ion-exchange column fractionation (e.g., on diethylaminoethyl (DEAE) or matrices containing carboxymethyl or sulfopropyl groups), chromatography on Blue- Sepharose, CM Blue-Sepharose, MONO-Q, MONO-S, lentil lectin-Sepharose, WGA- Sepharose, Con A-Sepharose, Ether Toyopearl, Butyl Toyopearl, Phenyl Toyopearl, SP- Sepharose, or protein A Sepharose, SDS-PAGE chromatography, silica chromatography, chromatofocusing, reverse phase HPLC (e.g., silica gel with appended aliphatic groups), gel filtration using, e.g., Sephadex molecular sieve or size-exclusion chromatography, chromatography on columns that selectively bind the polypeptide, and ethanol or ammonium sulfate precipitation.
[0341] A glycosylated mutant human growth hormone produced in culture is usually isolated by initial extraction from cells, cell lysate, culture media, etc., followed by one or more concentration, salting-out, aqueous ion-exchange, or size-exclusion chromatography steps. Additionally, the glycoprotein may be purified by affinity chromatography. Finally, HPLC may be employed for final purification steps.
[0342] A protease inhibitor, e.g., methylsulfonylfluoride (PMSF) may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth of adventitious contaminants. [0343] In some cases, supernatants from systems that produce the glycosylated human growth hormone ofthe invention are first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, for example, an Amicon or Millipore Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. Following the concentration step, the concentrate may be applied to a suitable purification matrix. For example, a suitable affinity matrix may comprise a ligand for the peptide, a lectin or antibody molecule bound to a suitable support. Alternatively, an anion-exchange resin may be employed, for example, a matrix or substrate having pendant DEAE groups. Suitable matrices include acrylamide, agarose, dextran, cellulose, or other types commonly employed in protein purification. Also, a cation-exchange step may be employed. Suitable cation exchangers include various insoluble matrices comprising sulfopropyl or carboxymethyl groups. Sulfopropyl groups are particularly preferred.
[0344] Finally, one or more RP-HPLC steps employing hydrophobic RP-HPLC media, e.g., silica gel having pendant methyl or other aliphatic groups, may be employed to further purify φgtM' ft^^ hormone. Some or all ofthe foregoing purification steps, in various combinations, can also be employed to provide a glycoprotein. ,
[0345] The glycosylated mutant human growth hormone ofthe invention resulting from a large-scale fermentation may be purified by methods analogous to those disclosed by Urdal et al, J. Chromatog. 296: 171 (1984). This reference describes two sequential, RP-HPLC steps for purification of recombinant human IL-2 on a preparative HPLC column. Alternatively, techniques such as affinity chromatography, may be utilized to purify the glycoprotein.
Functional Assays for the Mutant hGH
[0346] Following the production and, preferably, purification of a glycosylated mutant human growth hormone, the biological functions ofthe glycoprotein are tested using several methods known in the art. The functional assays are based on various characteristics of human growth hormone, such as its specific binding to human growth hormone receptor, activation ofthe hGH receptor, and its activity in promoting cell growth. In each assay, wild- type human growth hormone is included as a positive control. [0347] A radioreceptor binding assay can be carried out to measure the binding between a radio-labeled hGH receptor and a mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention. Detailed description for such an assay can be found in the literature, e.g., Tsushima et al, J. Clin. Endocrinol Metab., 37: 334-337 (1973); Chin et al, Endocr. Meta. 37: 334 (1973); and U.S. Patent Nos. 4,871,835, 5,079,230. [0348] The ability of a mutant human growth hormone to promote cell growth is assessed by methods such as the tibia test (Parlow et al, Endocrinology 11: 1126(1965); U.S. Patent No. 4,871,835). Briefly, rats are hypophysectomized at 28-30 days of age and kept for 10-14 days without treatment. Human growth hormone mutants derived from recombinant source is then given to the rats by daily subcutaneous injections. The animals are sacrificed on the sixth day, their foreleg knee bones taken out and the width ofthe epiphyseal plates measured. The weight of these rats at the start ofthe experiment and before being sacrificed is also monitored and compared among different groups receiving daily injections ofthe mutant human growth hormone at different concentrations.
[0349] Furthermore, the biological activity of a mutant human growth hormone can be demonstrated in its ability to cause hGH-dependent tyrosine phosphorylation in IM-9 cells, which are derived from a clone of human lymphoblastoma and express human growth hormone receptor on the cell surface. Other cell types such as MB-2 cells may also be sfittfbli',,f tl|HlGHPictibfalIa!s y^l"The' level of tyrosine phosphorylation of cellular proteins upon exposure to the mutant human growth hormone is shown by a monoclonal antibody against phosphorylated tyrosine, as described by Silva et al, Endocrinology, 132: 101 (1993) and U.S. Patent No. 6,238,915.
Pharmaceutical Composition and Administration
[0350] The glycosylated mutant human growth hormone having desired oligosaccharide determinants described above can be used as therapeutics for treating a variety of diseases and conditions related to deficiency in growth hormone. Growth-related conditions that can be treated with the mutant human growth hormone ofthe present invention include: dwarfism, short-stature in children and adults, cachexia/muscle wasting, general muscular atrophy, and sex chromosome abnormality (e.g., Turner's Syndrome). Other conditions may be treated using the mutant hGH ofthe present invention include: short-bowel syndrome, lipodystrophy, osteoporosis, uraemaia, burns, female infertility, bone regeneration, general diabetes, type II diabetes, osteo-arthritis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), and insomia. The mutant hGH ofthe invention may also be used to promote various healing processes, e.g., general tissue regeneration, bone regeneration, and wound healing, or as a vaccine adjunct. Thus, the present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of glycosylated mutant human growth hormone, which is produced according to the methods described above. [0351] Pharmaceutical compositions ofthe invention are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems. Suitable formulations for use in the present invention are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985). For a brief review of methods for drug delivery, see, Langer, Science 249: 1527- 1533 (1990). [0352] The pharmaceutical compositions are intended for parenteral, intranasal, topical, oral, or local administration, such as by subcutaneous injection, aerosol inhalation, or transdermal adsorption, for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment. Commonly, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered parenterally, e.g., subcutaneously or intravenously. Thus, the invention provides compositions for parenteral administration which comprise the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone dissolved or suspended in an acceptable carrier, preferably an aqueous carrier, e.g., water, buffered water, saline, PBS and the like. The compositions may also contain detergents such as Tween 20 and Tween 80; sMϊize ''s eΗ; ^«fcήitii ι''fe'®r 'M|'' sucrose, and trehalose; and preservatives such as EDTA and m-cresol. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents, detergents and the like. [0353] These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH ofthe preparations typically will be between 3 and 11, more preferably from 5 to 9, and most preferably from 7 and 8. [0354] The compositions containing the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease or condition related to growth hormone deficiency, in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms ofthe disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as a "therapeutically effective dose." Amounts effective for this use will depend on the severity ofthe disease or condition and the weight and general state ofthe patient, but generally range from about 0.1 mg to about 2,000 mg of glycosylated mutant human growth hormone per day for a 70 kg patient, with dosages of from about 5 mg to about 200 mg ofthe compounds per day being more commonly used. [0355] In prophylactic applications, compositions containing the glycosylated mutant human growth hormone ofthe invention are administered to a patient susceptible to or otherwise at risk of a particular disease. Such an amount is defined to be a "prophylactically effective dose." In this use, the precise amounts again depend on the patient's state of health and weight, but generally range from about 0.1 mg to about 1,000 mg per 70 kilogram patient, more commonly from about 5 mg to about 200 mg per 70 kg of body weight.
[0356] Single or multiple administrations ofthe compositions can be carried out with dose levels and pattern being selected by the treating physician. In any event, the pharmaceutical formulations should provide a quantity ofthe glycosylated mutant human growth hormone of this invention sufficient to effectively treat the patient. [0357] The following examples are provided by way of illustration only and not by way of limitation. Those of skill in the art will readily recognize a variety of non-critical parameters that could be changed or modified to yield essentially similar results.
Example 1
[0358] Human growth hormone occurs in a variety of different isoforms and different amino acid sequences. The two best characterized forms include placental derived hGH, which is also known as GH-N (PDB P01242) and pituitary derived hGH, which is also known as somatotropin or GH-Ν (P01241); see Figure 1. The pituitary derived hGH is not glycosylated and is produced in Escherichia coli as a therapeutic. The placental derived hGH (GH-N) has one Ν-glycosylation site at amino acid 140 (see Table 4 and FIG. 1, see arrow).
Table 4. Human Growth Hormone (GH-Y), Placenta Derived: P01242 (SEQ ID ΝO:2) f ptiplsr If dnamlrarrlyqlaydtyqefeeayilkeqkysf Iqnpqtslc sesiptpsnrvktqqksnle llrisllliqswlepvqllrsvfanslvygasdsnvyrhlkdleegiqtlmwrledgsprtgqifnqsyskfdt kshnddallknygllycfrkdmdkvetflrivqcrsvegscgf f
[0359] The pituitary derived hGH (GH-N) can be modified at amino acid position 140 to introduce an N-linked glycosylation site by mutating the nucleotide sequence encoding this polypeptide so that instead of encoding the wild-type lysine (abbreviated as "k" at amino acid 140 ofthe GH-N polypeptide sequence in Table 5 and FIG. 1, see arrow), the nucleotide sequence will encode an asparagine (abbreviated "n") at amino acid position 140 of GH-N (see also FIG. 2).
Table 5. Human Growth Hormone (GH-N), Pituitary Derived: P01241 (SEQ ID NO:l) f ptiplsr 1 fdnamlrahrlhqlafdtyqefeeayipkeqkys f Iqnpqtslcf sesiptpsnreetqqksnle llrisllliqswlepvqflrsvfanslvygasdsnvydllkdleegiqtlmgrledgsprtgqifkqtyskfdt nshnddallknygllycfrkdmdkvetflrivqcrsvegscgf t
[0360] This mutated pituitary derived hGH, regardless ofthe expression system used to produce this polypeptide, can then be glycosylated or glycoconjugated (see WO 03/31464, incoφorated herein by reference). Preferably, the mutated pituitary derived hGH is glycoPEGylated, wherein a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety is conjugated to the mutated pituitary derived hGH polypeptide via a glycosyl linkage (see WO 03/31464, incorporated herein by reference). FIG.3 describes the GlycoPEGylation of an hGH N-linked glycan mutant produced in either Sf9 insect cells or mammalian cells. GlycoPEGylation ofthe mibtitedi iM idMvedllh^H-Sfeei ected to result in improved biophysical properties that may include but are not limited to improved half-life, improved area under the curve (AUC) values, reduced clearance, and reduced immunogenicity.
Example 2 [0361] An alternative approach is to create an O-linked glycosylation site into the pituitary derived hGH polypeptide. This O-linked glycosylation site may then be used as a site on which the mutated hGH polypeptide can be glycoPEGylated using a GalNAcT2 enzyme or the like. One or more additional transferases may then be used to add glycans or glycoconjugates to that site. Preferably, the mutated pituitary derived hGH polypeptide is glycoPEGylated. FIG.4 describes the glycoPEGylation of an hGH O-linked glycan mutant produced in Escherichia coli.
Example 3
[0362] As identified by the crystal structure of hGH and its receptor, the protein loop regions on pituitary derived hGH are best suited for mutation to introduce a glycosylation site (FIG. 5). Specifically, the nucleotide sequence that encodes amino acids 1-6 (FPTIPL; SEQ ID NO: 10), amino acids 48-52 (PQTSL; SEQ ID NO: 11), amino acids 59-64 (PTPSNR; SEQ ID NO: 12), amino acids 133-139 (PRTGQIF; SEQ ID NO: 13), amino acids 133-145 (PRTGQIFKQTYSK; SEQ ID NO: 14), or amino acids 139-142 (FKQT; SEQ ID NO: 15) of the wild-type pituitary derived hGH amino acid sequence (see Table 5 and FIG. 1) can be mutated so that either an N-linked or an O-linked glycosylation site is introduced into the resulting mutated pituitary-derived hGH polypeptide.
[0363] FIG. 6 illustrates six (6) of these introduced O-linked glycosylation sites. The arrows in Figure 6 each represent the threonine residue on which O-linked glycosylation will occur in the GH-N O-linked glycan hGH mutant. [0364] FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 each illustrates two additional GH-N O-linked glycan hGH mutants.
Example 4
[0365] This example describes amino acid sequence mutations introducing O-linked glycosylation sites, i.e., serine or threonine residues, into a preferably proline-containing site of a wild- type human growth hormone sequence or any modified version thereof. 1. 'N drmina :Mytatliohs.'
[0366] In the N-terminal mutants, the N-terminus of a wild-type hGH, FP2TIP5LS; SEQ ID NO: 16, is replaced with either MXnTP2TIP5LS or MAPTSSXnP2TIP5LS. Preferred examples include:
MNTPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO: 17
MQTPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO: 18 MAPTSSPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO: 19 MAPTSSSPTIPLS (IL-2 N-terminus); SEQ ID NO:20 MPTTFPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO:21 MPTSSPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO:22
MPTSSSPTIPLS; SEQ ID NO:23
2. Internal Mutation Site 1
[0367] In this type of mutants, the N-terminus of a wild-type hGH, FP2TIP5LS; SEQ ID NO:24, is replaced with ZmP2T XnBoP5LS. Preferred mutations include:
MFPTQIPLS; SEQ ID NO:25
MFPTSIPLS; SEQ ID NO:26 MFPTSSPLS; SEQ ID NO:27 MTPTQIPLS; SEQ ID NO:28 MFPTTTPLS; SEQ ID NO:29
3. Internal Mutation Site 2
[0368] In this type of mutants, the ammo acid sequence surrounding P , AYIP KEQKY; SEQ ID NO:30, is replace with AZmJqP37OrXnBoΔpY, where at least one of Z, J, O, X, and B is independently selected from either Thr or Ser; Δ may include Lys (K) and X may be Asp (D). Preferred examples include:
AYIP37TQGAY; SEQ ID NO:31
AYIP37TSSSY; SEQ ID NO:32 AQITP37TEQKY; SEQ ID NO:33 AYIP37TEQSY; SEQ ID NO:34 4 KtemaiMύMibh.'Silie &
[0369] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence surrounding P48, LQNP48QTSLC; SEQ ID NO:35, is replaced with LZmJqP48OrXnBoLC, where at least one of Z, J, O, and X are independently selected from either Thr or Ser. Preferred examples include:
LQTP48QTSLC; SEQ ID NO:36
LQNP48TTSLC; SEQ ID NO:37
5. Internal Mutation Site 4
[0370] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence surrounding P59, SESIP59TPNREET; SEQ ID NO:38, is replaced with SZmUsJqP59TPOrXnBoΔrT, where at least one of Z, J, O, B, Δ, U, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser; B, Δ, and Z may include charged amino acids. Preferred examples include:
SESTP59TPNREET; SEQ ID NO:39
SSSTP59TPNREET; SEQ ID NO:40
SESIP59TPNTEET; SEQ ID NO:41 SESIP59TPNTQET; SEQ ID NO:42
SESIP59TPTQGAT; SEQ ID NO:43
SESIP59TPTESST; SEQ ID NO:44
SQSTP59TPNREET; SEQ ID NO:45
SQSTP59TPNQEET; SEQ ID NO:46 SESTP59TPTSSST; SEQ ID NO:47
6. Internal Mutation Site 5
[0371] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence surrounding P89, SWLEP89NQFLRS; SEQ ID ΝO:48, is replaced with SZmUsJqP89OrXnBoΔrλtS, where at least one of Z, U, J, O, B, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser; J and λ may include charged amino acids. Preferred examples include:
SWLEP89TQGLRS; SEQ ID NO:49 SWLEP89TQGATS; SEQ ID NO:50 SSQTP89NQFLRS; SEQ ID ΝO:51 SWLEP89TSSLSS; SEQ ID NO:52 SMVTP89VQFLRS; SEQ ID NO:53 7 IntdmaliiMttyibn,Sife»
[0372] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence surrounding P133, EDGSP133RTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:54, has been replace with EZmUsJqP133OrXnBoΔrλtF, where at least one of Z, U, J, O, B, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser. Preferred examples include:
EDGSPI33TTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:55
EDGSP133NTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:56
EDGSP133TQGQIF; SEQ ID NO:57
EDGSP133TNGQIF; SEQ ID ΝO:58 EDGSP133TTTQIF; SEQ ID NO:59
EDGSP133TSSQIF; SEQ ID NO:60
EDGSP133TTQGIF; SEQ ID NO:61
EDGSP133QTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:62
EDGTP133NTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:63 EDQTP,33NTGQIF; SEQ ID NO:64
8. Internal Mutation Site 7
[0373] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence surrounding P140, GQIFK140QTYS; SEQ ID NO:65, is replace with GZmUsJqΔr140OrXnBoS, where at least one of Z, U, J, O, B, and X is independently selected from either Thr or Ser. Preferred examples include:
GQIFN140QTYS; SEQ ID NO:66 GQIFN140ITYS; SEQ ID NO:67 GQIFP140QTSS; SEQ ID NO:68 GQIFP140TTTS; SEQ ID NO:69 GQITP140QTYS; SEQ ID NO:70
GQIFT140QTYS; SEQ ID NO:71 GQIST140QTYS; SEQ ID NO:72 GQIPT140TTYS; SEQ ID NO:73
9. C-terminal Mutations [0374] In this type of mutants, the amino acid sequence at the C-terminus of a wild-type hGH, VEGSCG190F; SEQ ID NO:74, is replaced with VEGSCG190PXnBoZmUsP, where at lφδ ;,brHe,dfl :^ t,B -an"d:!IHi' si;ϊffle ! ndently selected from either Thr or Ser. Preferred examples include:
NEGSCGPTTTP; SEQ ID ΝO:75 VEGSCGPTSSP; SEQ ID NO:76 VEGSCGPTQGAMP; SEQ ID NO:77
VEGSCGPTTIP; SEQ ID NO:78 NEGSCGPMVTP; SEQ ID ΝO:79
[0375] In all above cases, X, Z, B, Δ, J, U, O, and λ are independently selected from E (glutamate), any uncharged amino acid or dipeptide combination including M, F, MF, and the like; m, n, o, p, q, r, s, and t are independently selected from integers from 0 to 3. In all cases, the N-terminal Met may be present or absent on any hGH mutant. The numbering of the amino acid residues is based on the initial unmodified sequence in which the left most residue is numbered 1. The numbering of unmodified amino acids remains unchanged following the modification. More than one ofthe above described sequence modifications may be present in a hGH mutant ofthe present invention.
[0376] While this invention has been disclosed with reference to specific embodiments, it is apparent that other embodiments and variations of this invention may be devised by others skilled in the art without departing from the true spirit and scope ofthe invention.
[0377] All patents, patent applications, and other publications cited in this application are incorporated by reference in the entirety.

Claims

WHAT IS CLA 1DT.S:
1. An isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide sequence encoding a mutant human growth hormone, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises a newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
2. The nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
3 . The nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is near a proline residue.
4 . The nucleic acid of claim 3, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
5. The nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
6 . The nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
7. An expression cassette comprising the nucleic acid of claim 1.
8. A cell comprising the nucleic acid of claim 1.
9. A mutant human growth hormone, comprising a newly introduced N- linked or O-linked glycosylation site that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
10. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 9, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
11. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 9, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is proximate a proline residue.
12. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 11, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ IDNO-.2.
13. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 9, comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
14. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 9, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
15. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 9, comprising a water- soluble polymer attached to a glycosylation site through a glycosyl linker.
16. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 15, wherein said glycosyl linker is an intact glycosyl linker.
17. The mutant human growth hormone of claim 15, wherein glycosylation site is a mutant glycosylation site.
18. A method for making a mutant human growth hormone, which comprises a newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone, comprising the steps of: (a) recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone; and (b) glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone at the newly introduced glycosylation site.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is near a proline residue.
21. The method of claim 20, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
22. The method of claim 18, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
23. The method of claim 18, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
24. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a mutant human growth hormone, which comprises a newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
25. The composition of claim 24, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
26. The composition of claim 24, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is near a proline residue.
27. The composition of claim 26, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
28. The composition of claim 24, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
29. The composition of claim 24, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
30. A method for treating human growth hormone deficiency in a patient, comprising the step of administering an effective amount of a mutant human growth hormone to the patient, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises a newly introduced N- linked or O-linked glycosylation that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
32. The method of claim 30, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is near a proline residue.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
34. The method of claim 30, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
35. The method of claim 30, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
36. A method for making a glycoconjugate of a mutant human growth hormone, which comprises a newly introduced N-linked or O-linked glycosylation that does not exist in the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone, comprising the steps of: (a) recombinantly producing the mutant human growth hormone, and (b) enzymatically glycosylating the mutant human growth hormone with a modified sugar at the newly introduced glycosylation site.
37. The method of claim 36, wherein the modified sugar is modified with a member selected from poly(ethylene glycol) and m-poly(ethylene glycol).
38. The method of claim 36, wherein the corresponding wild-type human growth hormone has the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 or SEQ ID NO:2.
39. The method of claim 36, wherein the newly introduced glycosylation site is near a proline residue.
40. The method of claim 36, wherein the proline residue is located at position 2, 5, 37, 48, 59, 89, 113, 140, or 190 of SEQ ID NO:l or SEQ ID NO:2.
41. The method of claim 36, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
42. The method of claim 36, wherein the mutant human growth hormone comprises more than one newly introduced glycosylation site.
PCT/US2004/014254 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants WO2004103275A2 (en)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
MXPA05011832A MXPA05011832A (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants.
US10/556,094 US7932364B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
BRPI0410164-2A BRPI0410164A (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 compositions and methods for preparing human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
EP04751591A EP1624847B1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
CA002524936A CA2524936A1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
AU2004240553A AU2004240553A1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
AT04751591T ATE540055T1 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR PRODUCING HUMAN GROWTH HORMONE GLYCOSYLATION MUTANTS
ES04751591T ES2380093T3 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
JP2006532844A JP2007523630A (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Composition and formulation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US46911403P 2003-05-09 2003-05-09
US60/469,114 2003-05-09
US49475103P 2003-08-13 2003-08-13
US60/494,751 2003-08-13
US49507603P 2003-08-14 2003-08-14
US60/495,076 2003-08-14
US53529004P 2004-01-08 2004-01-08
US60/535,290 2004-01-08

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004103275A2 true WO2004103275A2 (en) 2004-12-02
WO2004103275A3 WO2004103275A3 (en) 2007-05-18

Family

ID=33479814

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/014254 WO2004103275A2 (en) 2003-05-09 2004-05-07 Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants

Country Status (11)

Country Link
US (1) US7932364B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1624847B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2007523630A (en)
KR (1) KR20060030023A (en)
AT (1) ATE540055T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2004240553A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0410164A (en)
CA (1) CA2524936A1 (en)
ES (1) ES2380093T3 (en)
MX (1) MXPA05011832A (en)
WO (1) WO2004103275A2 (en)

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007521807A (en) * 2004-01-14 2007-08-09 オハイオ ユニバーシティ Method for producing peptides / proteins in plants and peptides / proteins produced thereby
WO2007120932A2 (en) 2006-04-19 2007-10-25 Neose Technologies, Inc. Expression of o-glycosylated therapeutic proteins in prokaryotic microorganisms
WO2006121569A3 (en) * 2005-04-08 2008-11-20 Neose Technologies Inc Compositions and methods for the preparation of protease resistant human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
JP2008542285A (en) * 2005-05-25 2008-11-27 ネオス テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド Glycopegylated factor IX
EP2049144A2 (en) * 2006-07-21 2009-04-22 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycosylation of peptides via o-linked glycosylation sequences
WO2009156511A2 (en) * 2008-06-27 2009-12-30 Novo Nordisk A/S N-glycosylated human growth hormone with prolonged circulatory half-life
US7696163B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-04-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
US7795210B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-09-14 Novo Nordisk A/S Protein remodeling methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US7803777B2 (en) 2003-03-14 2010-09-28 Biogenerix Ag Branched water-soluble polymers and their conjugates
US7842661B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2010-11-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin formulations
JP2011512121A (en) * 2008-01-08 2011-04-21 バイオジェネリックス アーゲー Glycoconjugation of polypeptides using oligosaccharyltransferase
US7932364B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2011-04-26 Novo Nordisk A/S Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
US7956032B2 (en) 2003-12-03 2011-06-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
US8043833B2 (en) 2005-10-31 2011-10-25 Novo Nordisk A/S Expression of soluble therapeutic proteins
US8063015B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2011-11-22 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US8076292B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2011-12-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Factor VIII: remodeling and glycoconjugation of factor VIII
US8207112B2 (en) 2007-08-29 2012-06-26 Biogenerix Ag Liquid formulation of G-CSF conjugate
US8268967B2 (en) 2004-09-10 2012-09-18 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated interferon α
US8361961B2 (en) 2004-01-08 2013-01-29 Biogenerix Ag O-linked glycosylation of peptides
US8563687B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2013-10-22 Ohio University Synthetic genes for plant gums and other hydroxyproline rich glycoproteins
US8633157B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-01-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin
US8632770B2 (en) 2003-12-03 2014-01-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor IX
US8716239B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2014-05-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Granulocyte colony stimulating factor: remodeling and glycoconjugation G-CSF
US8716240B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2014-05-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
US8791066B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2014-07-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Branched PEG remodeling and glycosylation of glucagon-like peptide-1 [GLP-1]
US8791070B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2014-07-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor IX
US8841439B2 (en) 2005-11-03 2014-09-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Nucleotide sugar purification using membranes
US8911967B2 (en) 2005-08-19 2014-12-16 Novo Nordisk A/S One pot desialylation and glycopegylation of therapeutic peptides
US8916360B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-12-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin
US8969532B2 (en) 2006-10-03 2015-03-03 Novo Nordisk A/S Methods for the purification of polypeptide conjugates comprising polyalkylene oxide using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
US9005625B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2015-04-14 Novo Nordisk A/S Antibody toxin conjugates
US9029331B2 (en) 2005-01-10 2015-05-12 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
US9050304B2 (en) 2007-04-03 2015-06-09 Ratiopharm Gmbh Methods of treatment using glycopegylated G-CSF
US9150848B2 (en) 2008-02-27 2015-10-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Conjugated factor VIII molecules
US9200049B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2015-12-01 Novo Nordisk A/S Remodeling and glycopegylation of fibroblast growth factor (FGF)
US9493499B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2016-11-15 Novo Nordisk A/S Process for the production of purified cytidinemonophosphate-sialic acid-polyalkylene oxide (CMP-SA-PEG) as modified nucleotide sugars via anion exchange chromatography
WO2018022939A1 (en) * 2016-07-27 2018-02-01 Amunix Operating Inc. Treatment of adult growth hormone deficiency with human growth hormone analogues

Families Citing this family (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6639050B1 (en) 1997-07-21 2003-10-28 Ohio University Synthetic genes for plant gums and other hydroxyproline-rich glycoproteins
US8008252B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2011-08-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Factor VII: remodeling and glycoconjugation of Factor VII
DE60336555D1 (en) 2002-06-21 2011-05-12 Novo Nordisk Healthcare Ag PEGYLATED GLYCO FORMS OF FACTOR VII
US20100069264A1 (en) * 2003-08-27 2010-03-18 Gil Sharon Libraries of recombinant chimeric proteins
ES2445948T3 (en) * 2003-11-24 2014-03-06 Ratiopharm Gmbh Glycopegylated Erythropoietin
NZ547554A (en) * 2003-12-03 2009-09-25 Biogenerix Ag Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
EP1751177A4 (en) 2004-04-19 2008-07-16 Univ Ohio Cross-linkable glycoproteins and methods of making the same
US20090292110A1 (en) * 2004-07-23 2009-11-26 Defrees Shawn Enzymatic modification of glycopeptides
US7998930B2 (en) 2004-11-04 2011-08-16 Hanall Biopharma Co., Ltd. Modified growth hormones
US20100009902A1 (en) * 2005-01-06 2010-01-14 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation Using Saccharyl Fragments
US20110003744A1 (en) * 2005-05-25 2011-01-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated Erythropoietin Formulations
KR101524880B1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2015-06-01 노파르티스 아게 Pharmaceutical compositions comprising hgh for oral delivery
LT2068907T (en) * 2006-10-04 2018-01-10 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycerol linked pegylated sugars and glycopeptides
EP2162535A4 (en) * 2007-06-04 2011-02-23 Novo Nordisk As O-linked glycosylation using n-acetylglucosaminyl transferases
US7968811B2 (en) * 2007-06-29 2011-06-28 Harley-Davidson Motor Company Group, Inc. Integrated ignition and key switch
US20110105735A1 (en) * 2009-10-29 2011-05-05 Heather Desaire Methods of producing and purifying proteins
WO2016200645A1 (en) * 2015-06-12 2016-12-15 Tianxin Wang Methods for protein modification in pharmaceutical applications

Family Cites Families (231)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1479268A (en) 1973-07-05 1977-07-13 Beecham Group Ltd Pharmaceutical compositions
US4179337A (en) 1973-07-20 1979-12-18 Davis Frank F Non-immunogenic polypeptides
CH596313A5 (en) 1975-05-30 1978-03-15 Battelle Memorial Institute
US4385260A (en) 1975-09-09 1983-05-24 Beckman Instruments, Inc. Bargraph display
US4414147A (en) 1981-04-17 1983-11-08 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Methods of decreasing the hydrophobicity of fibroblast and other interferons
JPS57206622A (en) 1981-06-10 1982-12-18 Ajinomoto Co Inc Blood substitute
US4438253A (en) 1982-11-12 1984-03-20 American Cyanamid Company Poly(glycolic acid)/poly(alkylene glycol) block copolymers and method of manufacturing the same
US4496689A (en) 1983-12-27 1985-01-29 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Covalently attached complex of alpha-1-proteinase inhibitor with a water soluble polymer
US4565653A (en) 1984-03-30 1986-01-21 Pfizer Inc. Acyltripeptide immunostimulants
US4879236A (en) 1984-05-16 1989-11-07 The Texas A&M University System Method for producing a recombinant baculovirus expression vector
JPS6238172A (en) 1985-08-12 1987-02-19 株式会社 高研 Production of anti-thrombotic medical material
AU597574B2 (en) 1986-03-07 1990-06-07 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Method for enhancing glycoprotein stability
US4925796A (en) 1986-03-07 1990-05-15 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Method for enhancing glycoprotein stability
US4902505A (en) 1986-07-30 1990-02-20 Alkermes Chimeric peptides for neuropeptide delivery through the blood-brain barrier
IL82834A (en) 1987-06-09 1990-11-05 Yissum Res Dev Co Biodegradable polymeric materials based on polyether glycols,processes for the preparation thereof and surgical artiicles made therefrom
US5153265A (en) 1988-01-20 1992-10-06 Cetus Corporation Conjugation of polymer to colony stimulating factor-1
US4847325A (en) 1988-01-20 1989-07-11 Cetus Corporation Conjugation of polymer to colony stimulating factor-1
GB8810808D0 (en) 1988-05-06 1988-06-08 Wellcome Found Vectors
US5169933A (en) 1988-08-15 1992-12-08 Neorx Corporation Covalently-linked complexes and methods for enhanced cytotoxicity and imaging
US5104651A (en) 1988-12-16 1992-04-14 Amgen Inc. Stabilized hydrophobic protein formulations of g-csf
US6166183A (en) 1992-11-30 2000-12-26 Kirin-Amgen, Inc. Chemically-modified G-CSF
DE68925966T2 (en) 1988-12-22 1996-08-29 Kirin Amgen Inc CHEMICALLY MODIFIED GRANULOCYTE COLONY EXCITING FACTOR
AU634517B2 (en) * 1989-01-19 1993-02-25 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Somatotropin analogs
AU620673B2 (en) * 1989-01-31 1992-02-20 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Somatotropin analogs
US5194376A (en) 1989-02-28 1993-03-16 University Of Ottawa Baculovirus expression system capable of producing foreign gene proteins at high levels
US5122614A (en) 1989-04-19 1992-06-16 Enzon, Inc. Active carbonates of polyalkylene oxides for modification of polypeptides
JP2875884B2 (en) 1989-04-19 1999-03-31 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ Active polyalkylene oxide carbonates for use in modifying polypeptides
US5324844A (en) 1989-04-19 1994-06-28 Enzon, Inc. Active carbonates of polyalkylene oxides for modification of polypeptides
US5342940A (en) 1989-05-27 1994-08-30 Sumitomo Pharmaceuticals Company, Limited Polyethylene glycol derivatives, process for preparing the same
US5672683A (en) 1989-09-07 1997-09-30 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin neuropharmaceutical agent fusion protein
US5154924A (en) 1989-09-07 1992-10-13 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin receptor specific antibody-neuropharmaceutical agent conjugates
US5977307A (en) 1989-09-07 1999-11-02 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin receptor specific ligand-neuropharmaceutical agent fusion proteins
US5182107A (en) 1989-09-07 1993-01-26 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin receptor specific antibody-neuropharmaceutical or diagnostic agent conjugates
US5527527A (en) 1989-09-07 1996-06-18 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin receptor specific antibody-neuropharmaceutical agent conjugates
US5032519A (en) 1989-10-24 1991-07-16 The Regents Of The Univ. Of California Method for producing secretable glycosyltransferases and other Golgi processing enzymes
US5312808A (en) 1989-11-22 1994-05-17 Enzon, Inc. Fractionation of polyalkylene oxide-conjugated hemoglobin solutions
US5595900A (en) 1990-02-14 1997-01-21 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Methods and products for the synthesis of oligosaccharide structures on glycoproteins, glycolipids, or as free molecules, and for the isolation of cloned genetic sequences that determine these structures
US5324663A (en) 1990-02-14 1994-06-28 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Methods and products for the synthesis of oligosaccharide structures on glycoproteins, glycolipids, or as free molecules, and for the isolation of cloned genetic sequences that determine these structures
DE4009630C2 (en) 1990-03-26 1995-09-28 Reinhard Prof Dr Dr Brossmer CMP-activated fluorescent sialic acids and processes for their preparation
US5583042A (en) 1990-04-16 1996-12-10 Neose Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Apparatus for the synthesis of saccharide compositions
US5951972A (en) 1990-05-04 1999-09-14 American Cyanamid Company Stabilization of somatotropins and other proteins by modification of cysteine residues
US5219564A (en) 1990-07-06 1993-06-15 Enzon, Inc. Poly(alkylene oxide) amino acid copolymers and drug carriers and charged copolymers based thereon
CU22302A1 (en) 1990-09-07 1995-01-31 Cigb Codifying nucleotidic sequence for a protein of the external membrane of neisseria meningitidis and the use of that protein in preparing vaccines.
US5529914A (en) 1990-10-15 1996-06-25 The Board Of Regents The Univeristy Of Texas System Gels for encapsulation of biological materials
US5410016A (en) 1990-10-15 1995-04-25 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Photopolymerizable biodegradable hydrogels as tissue contacting materials and controlled-release carriers
ATE196548T1 (en) * 1991-05-10 2000-10-15 Genentech Inc SELECTING AGONISTS AND ANTAGONISTS OF LIGANDS
US5352670A (en) 1991-06-10 1994-10-04 Alberta Research Council Methods for the enzymatic synthesis of alpha-sialylated oligosaccharide glycosides
US5374655A (en) 1991-06-10 1994-12-20 Alberta Research Council Methods for the synthesis of monofucosylated oligosaccharides terminating in di-N-acetyllactosaminyl structures
KR950014915B1 (en) 1991-06-19 1995-12-18 주식회사녹십자 Asialoglycoprotein-conjugated compounds
US5281698A (en) 1991-07-23 1994-01-25 Cetus Oncology Corporation Preparation of an activated polymer ester for protein conjugation
IT1260468B (en) 1992-01-29 1996-04-09 METHOD FOR MAINTAINING THE ACTIVITY OF PROTEOLYTIC ENZYMES MODIFIED WITH POLYETHYLENGLYCOL
US5858751A (en) 1992-03-09 1999-01-12 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for producing sialyltransferases
US5962294A (en) 1992-03-09 1999-10-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods for the identification and synthesis of sialyltransferases
US6037452A (en) 1992-04-10 2000-03-14 Alpha Therapeutic Corporation Poly(alkylene oxide)-Factor VIII or Factor IX conjugate
US5614184A (en) 1992-07-28 1997-03-25 New England Deaconess Hospital Recombinant human erythropoietin mutants and therapeutic methods employing them
WO1994004193A1 (en) 1992-08-21 1994-03-03 Enzon, Inc. Novel attachment of polyalkylene oxides to bio-effecting substances
JP3979678B2 (en) 1992-08-24 2007-09-19 サントリー株式会社 Novel glycosyltransferase, gene encoding the same, and method for producing the enzyme
NZ250375A (en) 1992-12-09 1995-07-26 Ortho Pharma Corp Peg hydrazone and peg oxime linkage forming reagents and protein derivatives
WO1994015625A1 (en) 1993-01-15 1994-07-21 Enzon, Inc. Factor viii - polymeric conjugates
US5349001A (en) 1993-01-19 1994-09-20 Enzon, Inc. Cyclic imide thione activated polyalkylene oxides
US5321095A (en) 1993-02-02 1994-06-14 Enzon, Inc. Azlactone activated polyalkylene oxides
US5202413A (en) 1993-02-16 1993-04-13 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Alternating (ABA)N polylactide block copolymers
US5374541A (en) 1993-05-04 1994-12-20 The Scripps Research Institute Combined use of β-galactosidase and sialyltransferase coupled with in situ regeneration of CMP-sialic acid for one pot synthesis of oligosaccharides
EP0726318A1 (en) 1993-05-14 1996-08-14 The Upjohn Company An acceptor polypeptide for an N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase
US5621039A (en) 1993-06-08 1997-04-15 Hallahan; Terrence W. Factor IX- polymeric conjugates
US5919455A (en) 1993-10-27 1999-07-06 Enzon, Inc. Non-antigenic branched polymer conjugates
US5643575A (en) 1993-10-27 1997-07-01 Enzon, Inc. Non-antigenic branched polymer conjugates
US5446090A (en) 1993-11-12 1995-08-29 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Isolatable, water soluble, and hydrolytically stable active sulfones of poly(ethylene glycol) and related polymers for modification of surfaces and molecules
US5443953A (en) 1993-12-08 1995-08-22 Immunomedics, Inc. Preparation and use of immunoconjugates
US5369017A (en) 1994-02-04 1994-11-29 The Scripps Research Institute Process for solid phase glycopeptide synthesis
US5605793A (en) 1994-02-17 1997-02-25 Affymax Technologies N.V. Methods for in vitro recombination
US5837458A (en) 1994-02-17 1998-11-17 Maxygen, Inc. Methods and compositions for cellular and metabolic engineering
US5492841A (en) 1994-02-18 1996-02-20 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Quaternary ammonium immunogenic conjugates and immunoassay reagents
US5432059A (en) 1994-04-01 1995-07-11 Specialty Laboratories, Inc. Assay for glycosylation deficiency disorders
US5646113A (en) 1994-04-07 1997-07-08 Genentech, Inc. Treatment of partial growth hormone insensitivity syndrome
US5629384A (en) 1994-05-17 1997-05-13 Consiglio Nazionale Delle Ricerche Polymers of N-acryloylmorpholine activated at one end and conjugates with bioactive materials and surfaces
US5545553A (en) 1994-09-26 1996-08-13 The Rockefeller University Glycosyltransferases for biosynthesis of oligosaccharides, and genes encoding them
US5834251A (en) 1994-12-30 1998-11-10 Alko Group Ltd. Methods of modifying carbohydrate moieties
US5932462A (en) 1995-01-10 1999-08-03 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Multiarmed, monofunctional, polymer for coupling to molecules and surfaces
US5922577A (en) 1995-04-11 1999-07-13 Cytel Corporation Enzymatic synthesis of glycosidic linkages
US6030815A (en) 1995-04-11 2000-02-29 Neose Technologies, Inc. Enzymatic synthesis of oligosaccharides
US5728554A (en) 1995-04-11 1998-03-17 Cytel Corporation Enzymatic synthesis of glycosidic linkages
US5876980A (en) 1995-04-11 1999-03-02 Cytel Corporation Enzymatic synthesis of oligosaccharides
US6015555A (en) 1995-05-19 2000-01-18 Alkermes, Inc. Transferrin receptor specific antibody-neuropharmaceutical or diagnostic agent conjugates
US5824864A (en) 1995-05-25 1998-10-20 Pioneer Hi-Bred International, Inc. Maize gene and protein for insect control
US5858752A (en) 1995-06-07 1999-01-12 The General Hospital Corporation Fucosyltransferase genes and uses thereof
US6127153A (en) 1995-06-07 2000-10-03 Neose Technologies, Inc. Method of transferring at least two saccharide units with a polyglycosyltransferase, a polyglycosyltransferase and gene encoding a polyglycosyltransferase
US5672662A (en) 1995-07-07 1997-09-30 Shearwater Polymers, Inc. Poly(ethylene glycol) and related polymers monosubstituted with propionic or butanoic acids and functional derivatives thereof for biotechnical applications
US5770420A (en) 1995-09-08 1998-06-23 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Methods and products for the synthesis of oligosaccharide structures on glycoproteins, glycolipids, or as free molecules, and for the isolation of cloned genetic sequences that determine these structures
ES2338431T3 (en) 1995-09-21 2010-05-07 Genentech, Inc. VARIANTS OF HUMAN GROWTH HORMONE.
US5716812A (en) 1995-12-12 1998-02-10 The University Of British Columbia Methods and compositions for synthesis of oligosaccharides, and the products formed thereby
ATE380820T1 (en) 1996-03-08 2007-12-15 Univ Michigan MURINE ALPHA(1,3)-FUCOSYLTRANSFERASE (FUC-TVII)
US20020064546A1 (en) 1996-09-13 2002-05-30 J. Milton Harris Degradable poly(ethylene glycol) hydrogels with controlled half-life and precursors therefor
JP2001502005A (en) 1996-10-10 2001-02-13 サイテル コーポレイション Purification of carbohydrates using ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis and nanofiltration
HUP0000150A3 (en) 1996-10-15 2002-07-29 Liposome Company Inc Princeton Peptide-lipid conjugates,liposomes and liposomal drug delivery
IL129843A0 (en) 1996-11-08 2000-02-29 Cytel Corp Improved expression vectors
US6399336B1 (en) 1997-01-16 2002-06-04 Neose Technologies, Inc. Practical in vitro sialylation of recombinant glycoproteins
US5945314A (en) 1997-03-31 1999-08-31 Abbott Laboratories Process for synthesizing oligosaccharides
JP2002505574A (en) 1997-04-30 2002-02-19 エンゾン,インコーポレイテッド Polyalkylene oxide-modified single-chain polypeptides
US6183738B1 (en) 1997-05-12 2001-02-06 Phoenix Pharamacologics, Inc. Modified arginine deiminase
US6399337B1 (en) 1997-06-06 2002-06-04 The Governors Of The University Of Alberta α1,3-fucosyltransferase
WO1999000150A2 (en) 1997-06-27 1999-01-07 Regents Of The University Of California Drug targeting of a peptide radiopharmaceutical through the primate blood-brain barrier in vivo with a monoclonal antibody to the human insulin receptor
US20030027257A1 (en) * 1997-08-21 2003-02-06 University Technologies International, Inc. Sequences for improving the efficiency of secretion of non-secreted protein from mammalian and insect cells
ATE419009T1 (en) 1997-10-31 2009-01-15 Genentech Inc METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS CONSISTING OF GLYCOPROTEIN GLYCOFORMS
CA2312843A1 (en) 1997-12-01 1999-06-10 Neose Technologies Inc. Enzymatic synthesis of gangliosides
EP0924298A1 (en) 1997-12-18 1999-06-23 Stichting Instituut voor Dierhouderij en Diergezondheid (ID-DLO) Protein expression in baculovirus vector expression systems
DK1053019T3 (en) 1998-01-07 2004-04-13 Debio Rech Pharma Sa Degradable heterobifunctional polyethylene glycol acrylates and gels and conjugates derived therefrom
JP4078032B2 (en) 1998-03-12 2008-04-23 ネクター セラピューティックス エイエル,コーポレイション Poly (ethylene glycol) derivatives with proximal reactive groups
EP1091751A4 (en) * 1998-03-25 2005-01-19 Sloan Kettering Institutefor C Trimeric antigenic o-linked glycopeptide conjugates, methods of preparation and uses thereof
US20030166525A1 (en) 1998-07-23 2003-09-04 Hoffmann James Arthur FSH Formulation
US7304150B1 (en) 1998-10-23 2007-12-04 Amgen Inc. Methods and compositions for the prevention and treatment of anemia
WO2000026354A1 (en) 1998-10-30 2000-05-11 Novozymes A/S Glycosylated proteins having reduced allergenicity
DE19852729A1 (en) 1998-11-16 2000-05-18 Werner Reutter Recombinant glycoproteins, processes for their preparation, medicaments containing them and their use
US6465220B1 (en) 1998-12-21 2002-10-15 Glycozym Aps Glycosylation using GalNac-T4 transferase
US6949372B2 (en) 1999-03-02 2005-09-27 The Johns Hopkins University Engineering intracellular sialylation pathways
US6261805B1 (en) 1999-07-15 2001-07-17 Boyce Thompson Institute For Plant Research, Inc. Sialyiation of N-linked glycoproteins in the baculovirus expression vector system
US6537785B1 (en) 1999-09-14 2003-03-25 Genzyme Glycobiology Research Institute, Inc. Methods of treating lysosomal storage diseases
US6716626B1 (en) 1999-11-18 2004-04-06 Chiron Corporation Human FGF-21 nucleic acids
US6348558B1 (en) 1999-12-10 2002-02-19 Shearwater Corporation Hydrolytically degradable polymers and hydrogels made therefrom
PT1259563E (en) 1999-12-22 2009-04-14 Nektar Therapeutics Al Corp Method for the preparation of 1-benzotriazolyl carbonate esters of water soluble polymers.
WO2001049830A2 (en) 1999-12-30 2001-07-12 Maxygen Aps Improved lysosomal enzymes and lysosomal enzyme activators
US6555660B2 (en) 2000-01-10 2003-04-29 Maxygen Holdings Ltd. G-CSF conjugates
DK1257295T3 (en) 2000-02-11 2009-08-10 Bayer Healthcare Llc Factor VII or VIIA-like molecules
AU2001232337A1 (en) 2000-02-18 2001-08-27 Kanagawa Academy Of Science And Technology Pharmaceutical composition, reagent and method for intracerebral delivery of pharmaceutically active ingredient or labeling substance
EP1263771B1 (en) 2000-03-16 2006-06-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Chemoselective ligation by use of a phosphine
US6586398B1 (en) 2000-04-07 2003-07-01 Amgen, Inc. Chemically modified novel erythropoietin stimulating protein compositions and methods
US7338932B2 (en) 2000-05-11 2008-03-04 Glycozym Aps Methods of modulating functions of polypeptide GalNAc-transferases and of screening test substances to find agents herefor, pharmaceutical compositions comprising such agents and the use of such agents for preparing medicaments
MXPA02011016A (en) 2000-05-12 2004-03-16 Neose Technologies Inc In vitro.
NZ522030A (en) 2000-05-15 2004-11-26 F Erythropoietin composition with a multiple charged inorganic anion i.e. a sulfate a citrate or a phosphate to stabilize the composition
ATE309385T1 (en) 2000-06-28 2005-11-15 Glycofi Inc METHOD FOR PRODUCING MODIFIED GLYCOPROTEINS
AU2001267337A1 (en) 2000-06-30 2002-01-14 Maxygen Aps Peptide extended glycosylated polypeptides
US6423826B1 (en) 2000-06-30 2002-07-23 Regents Of The University Of Minnesota High molecular weight derivatives of vitamin K-dependent polypeptides
WO2002013843A2 (en) 2000-08-17 2002-02-21 University Of British Columbia Chemotherapeutic agents conjugated to p97 and their methods of use in treating neurological tumours
KR100645843B1 (en) 2000-12-20 2006-11-14 에프. 호프만-라 로슈 아게 Erythropoietin conjugates
US7892730B2 (en) 2000-12-22 2011-02-22 Sagres Discovery, Inc. Compositions and methods for cancer
PA8536201A1 (en) 2000-12-29 2002-08-29 Kenneth S Warren Inst Inc PROTECTION AND IMPROVEMENT OF CELLS, FABRICS AND ORGANS RESPONDING TO Erythropoietin
US6531121B2 (en) 2000-12-29 2003-03-11 The Kenneth S. Warren Institute, Inc. Protection and enhancement of erythropoietin-responsive cells, tissues and organs
DE60232434D1 (en) 2001-02-27 2009-07-09 Maxygen Aps NEW INTERFERON-BETA-LIKE MOLECULES
US7235638B2 (en) 2001-03-22 2007-06-26 Novo Nordisk Healthcare A/G Coagulation factor VII derivatives
WO2002092147A2 (en) 2001-05-11 2002-11-21 Aradigm Corporation Optimization of the molecular properties and formulation of proteins delivered by inhalation
WO2002092619A2 (en) * 2001-05-14 2002-11-21 The Gouvernment Of The United States Of America, Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Modified growth hormone
KR100453877B1 (en) 2001-07-26 2004-10-20 메덱스젠 주식회사 METHOD OF MANUFACTURING Ig-FUSION PROTEINS BY CONCATAMERIZATION, TNFR/Fc FUSION PROTEINS MANUFACTURED BY THE METHOD, DNA CODING THE PROTEINS, VECTORS INCLUDING THE DNA, AND CELLS TRANSFORMED BY THE VECTOR
WO2003017949A2 (en) 2001-08-29 2003-03-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Novel synthetic ganglioside derivatives and compositions thereof
US7214660B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-05-08 Neose Technologies, Inc. Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
ES2556338T3 (en) 2001-10-10 2016-01-15 Novo Nordisk A/S Remodeling and glycoconjugation of peptides
US7179617B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-02-20 Neose Technologies, Inc. Factor IX: remolding and glycoconjugation of Factor IX
US7399613B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2008-07-15 Neose Technologies, Inc. Sialic acid nucleotide sugars
US7125843B2 (en) 2001-10-19 2006-10-24 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugates including more than one peptide
US7696163B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-04-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
US7297511B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-11-20 Neose Technologies, Inc. Interferon alpha: remodeling and glycoconjugation of interferon alpha
US7173003B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-02-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Granulocyte colony stimulating factor: remodeling and glycoconjugation of G-CSF
US7265084B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-09-04 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopegylation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US7226903B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-06-05 Neose Technologies, Inc. Interferon beta: remodeling and glycoconjugation of interferon beta
US7439043B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2008-10-21 Neose Technologies, Inc. Galactosyl nucleotide sugars
US7795210B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-09-14 Novo Nordisk A/S Protein remodeling methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US8008252B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2011-08-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Factor VII: remodeling and glycoconjugation of Factor VII
AU2004236174B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2011-06-02 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US7157277B2 (en) 2001-11-28 2007-01-02 Neose Technologies, Inc. Factor VIII remodeling and glycoconjugation of Factor VIII
US7265085B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-09-04 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
JP2005510229A (en) 2001-11-28 2005-04-21 ネオーズ テクノロジーズ, インコーポレイテッド Remodeling of glycoproteins using amidases
US7473680B2 (en) 2001-11-28 2009-01-06 Neose Technologies, Inc. Remodeling and glycoconjugation of peptides
US20060035224A1 (en) 2002-03-21 2006-02-16 Johansen Jack T Purification methods for oligonucleotides and their analogs
DE60336555D1 (en) 2002-06-21 2011-05-12 Novo Nordisk Healthcare Ag PEGYLATED GLYCO FORMS OF FACTOR VII
DE10232916B4 (en) 2002-07-19 2008-08-07 Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. Apparatus and method for characterizing an information signal
AU2003254139A1 (en) 2002-07-23 2004-02-09 Neose Technologies, Inc. H. Pylori FUCOSYLTRANSFERASES
CA2497777A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2004-03-18 The General Hospital Corporation Modified asialo-interferons and uses thereof
JP2006501820A (en) 2002-09-06 2006-01-19 バイエル・フアーマシユーチカルズ・コーポレーシヨン Modified GLP-1 receptor agonists and their pharmacological uses
DE60314658D1 (en) 2002-11-08 2007-08-09 Glycozym Aps METHOD OF IDENTIFYING AGENTS PAINTING THE FUNCTIONS OF POLYPEPTIDE GALNAC TRANSFERASE MODULES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SUCH AGENTS, AND USE OF SUCH AGENTS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF MEDICAMENTS
JP4412461B2 (en) 2002-11-20 2010-02-10 日油株式会社 Modified bio-related substance, production method thereof and intermediate
US20050064540A1 (en) 2002-11-27 2005-03-24 Defrees Shawn Ph.D Glycoprotein remodeling using endoglycanases
EP1424344A1 (en) 2002-11-29 2004-06-02 Aventis Behring Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung Modified cDNA factor VIII and its derivates
PT1428878E (en) 2002-12-13 2008-11-18 Bioceuticals Arzneimittel Ag Process for the production and purification of erythropoietin
CA2519092C (en) 2003-03-14 2014-08-05 Neose Technologies, Inc. Branched water-soluble polymers and their conjugates
US20060276618A1 (en) 2003-03-18 2006-12-07 Defrees Shawn Activated forms of water-soluble polymers
EP1613261A4 (en) 2003-04-09 2011-01-26 Novo Nordisk As Intracellular formation of peptide conjugates
US7718363B2 (en) 2003-04-25 2010-05-18 The Kenneth S. Warren Institute, Inc. Tissue protective cytokine receptor complex and assays for identifying tissue protective compounds
ES2380093T3 (en) 2003-05-09 2012-05-08 Biogenerix Ag Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
WO2005012484A2 (en) 2003-07-25 2005-02-10 Neose Technologies, Inc. Antibody-toxin conjugates
US20060198819A1 (en) 2003-08-08 2006-09-07 Novo Nordisk Healthcare A/G Use of galactose oxidase for selective chemical conjugation of protractor molecules to proteins of therapeutic interest
BRPI0409650A (en) 2003-09-09 2006-04-25 Warren Pharmaceuticals Inc methods for regulating hematocrit and human levels, artificial erythropoietin products, methods for preparing an erythropoietin product and for treating anemia in patients at risk of tissue damage, and, pharmaceutical composition
US7524813B2 (en) 2003-10-10 2009-04-28 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Selectively conjugated peptides and methods of making the same
US8633157B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-01-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin
US20080305992A1 (en) 2003-11-24 2008-12-11 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopegylated erythropoietin
ES2445948T3 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-03-06 Ratiopharm Gmbh Glycopegylated Erythropoietin
US7842661B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2010-11-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin formulations
US7956032B2 (en) 2003-12-03 2011-06-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
NZ547554A (en) 2003-12-03 2009-09-25 Biogenerix Ag Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
JP2007515410A (en) 2003-12-03 2007-06-14 ネオス テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド GlycoPEGylated follicle stimulating hormone
US20080318850A1 (en) 2003-12-03 2008-12-25 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopegylated Factor Ix
CN101072789B (en) 2004-01-08 2013-05-15 生物种属学股份公司 O-linked glycosylation of peptides
WO2005067601A2 (en) 2004-01-09 2005-07-28 Neose Technologies, Inc. Vectors for recombinant protein expression in e.coli
US20070105770A1 (en) 2004-01-21 2007-05-10 Novo Nordisk A/S Transglutaminase mediated conjugation of peptides
EP1720892B1 (en) 2004-01-26 2013-07-24 BioGeneriX AG Branched polymer-modified sugars and nucleotides
JP2007531715A (en) 2004-03-17 2007-11-08 イーライ リリー アンド カンパニー Glycol-linked FGF-21 compound
KR20070008645A (en) 2004-05-04 2007-01-17 노보 노르디스크 헬스 케어 악티엔게젤샤프트 O-linked glycoforms of polypeptides and method to manufacture them
JP2008501344A (en) 2004-06-03 2008-01-24 ネオス テクノロジーズ インコーポレイティッド Truncated ST6GalNAcI polypeptide and nucleic acid
WO2005121331A2 (en) 2004-06-03 2005-12-22 Neose Technologies, Inc. Truncated galnact2 polypeptides and nucleic acids
WO2006014349A2 (en) 2004-07-02 2006-02-09 The Kenneth S. Warren Institute, Inc. Method of producing fully carbamylated erythropoietin
WO2006014466A2 (en) 2004-07-02 2006-02-09 The Kenneth S. Warren Institute, Inc. Novel carbamylated epo and method for its production
WO2006010143A2 (en) 2004-07-13 2006-01-26 Neose Technologies, Inc. Branched peg remodeling and glycosylation of glucagon-like peptide-1 [glp-1]
US20090292110A1 (en) 2004-07-23 2009-11-26 Defrees Shawn Enzymatic modification of glycopeptides
EP1778838A2 (en) 2004-08-02 2007-05-02 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Conjugation of fvii
US20060024286A1 (en) 2004-08-02 2006-02-02 Paul Glidden Variants of tRNA synthetase fragments and uses thereof
EP1799249A2 (en) 2004-09-10 2007-06-27 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycopegylated interferon alpha
EP1797192A1 (en) 2004-09-29 2007-06-20 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Modified proteins
EP1814573B1 (en) 2004-10-29 2016-03-09 ratiopharm GmbH Remodeling and glycopegylation of fibroblast growth factor (fgf)
US20090054623A1 (en) 2004-12-17 2009-02-26 Neose Technologies, Inc. Lipo-Conjugation of Peptides
US20100009902A1 (en) 2005-01-06 2010-01-14 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation Using Saccharyl Fragments
NZ556436A (en) 2005-01-10 2010-11-26 Biogenerix Ag Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
WO2006078645A2 (en) 2005-01-19 2006-07-27 Neose Technologies, Inc. Heterologous polypeptide expression using low multiplicity of infection of viruses
WO2006105426A2 (en) 2005-03-30 2006-10-05 Neose Technologies, Inc. Manufacturing process for the production of peptides grown in insect cell lines
US9187546B2 (en) 2005-04-08 2015-11-17 Novo Nordisk A/S Compositions and methods for the preparation of protease resistant human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
JP5216580B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2013-06-19 ノヴォ ノルディスク アー/エス Glycopegylated factor IX
ES2553160T3 (en) 2005-06-17 2015-12-04 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Selective reduction and derivatization of engineered Factor VII proteins comprising at least one non-native cysteine
US20070105755A1 (en) 2005-10-26 2007-05-10 Neose Technologies, Inc. One pot desialylation and glycopegylation of therapeutic peptides
US20090305967A1 (en) 2005-08-19 2009-12-10 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor vii and factor viia
EP1926817A2 (en) 2005-09-14 2008-06-04 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Human coagulation factor vii polypeptides
US20090048440A1 (en) 2005-11-03 2009-02-19 Neose Technologies, Inc. Nucleotide Sugar Purification Using Membranes
CN101484576A (en) 2006-05-24 2009-07-15 诺沃-诺迪斯克保健股份有限公司 Factor IX analogues having prolonged in vivo half life
JP2009544327A (en) 2006-07-21 2009-12-17 ノヴォ ノルディスク アー/エス Glycosylation of peptides with O-linked glycosylation sequences
ITMI20061624A1 (en) 2006-08-11 2008-02-12 Bioker Srl SINGLE-CONJUGATE SITE-SPECIFIC OF G-CSF
ES2531934T3 (en) 2006-09-01 2015-03-20 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Modified glycoproteins
JP2010505874A (en) 2006-10-03 2010-02-25 ノヴォ ノルディスク アー/エス Purification method for polypeptide conjugates
LT2068907T (en) 2006-10-04 2018-01-10 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycerol linked pegylated sugars and glycopeptides
US20080207487A1 (en) 2006-11-02 2008-08-28 Neose Technologies, Inc. Manufacturing process for the production of polypeptides expressed in insect cell-lines
KR20150064246A (en) 2007-04-03 2015-06-10 바이오제너릭스 게엠베하 Methods of treatment using glycopegylated g―csf
US20090053167A1 (en) 2007-05-14 2009-02-26 Neose Technologies, Inc. C-, S- and N-glycosylation of peptides
EP2162535A4 (en) 2007-06-04 2011-02-23 Novo Nordisk As O-linked glycosylation using n-acetylglucosaminyl transferases
JP5876649B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2016-03-02 ラツィオファルム ゲーエムベーハーratiopharm GmbH Improved process for producing nucleotide sugars
FR2918288B1 (en) 2007-07-03 2009-08-28 Zedel Soc Par Actions Simplifi LOCKING UP DEVICE ON DOUBLE ROPE
US8207112B2 (en) 2007-08-29 2012-06-26 Biogenerix Ag Liquid formulation of G-CSF conjugate

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
None
See also references of EP1624847A4

Cited By (48)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8563687B2 (en) 1997-07-21 2013-10-22 Ohio University Synthetic genes for plant gums and other hydroxyproline rich glycoproteins
US7696163B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-04-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
US8076292B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2011-12-13 Novo Nordisk A/S Factor VIII: remodeling and glycoconjugation of factor VIII
US8716240B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2014-05-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
US8716239B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2014-05-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Granulocyte colony stimulating factor: remodeling and glycoconjugation G-CSF
US7795210B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2010-09-14 Novo Nordisk A/S Protein remodeling methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US8247381B2 (en) 2003-03-14 2012-08-21 Biogenerix Ag Branched water-soluble polymers and their conjugates
US7803777B2 (en) 2003-03-14 2010-09-28 Biogenerix Ag Branched water-soluble polymers and their conjugates
US8791070B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2014-07-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor IX
US8853161B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2014-10-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US8063015B2 (en) 2003-04-09 2011-11-22 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US7932364B2 (en) 2003-05-09 2011-04-26 Novo Nordisk A/S Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
US9005625B2 (en) 2003-07-25 2015-04-14 Novo Nordisk A/S Antibody toxin conjugates
US7842661B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2010-11-30 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin formulations
US8633157B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-01-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin
US8916360B2 (en) 2003-11-24 2014-12-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated erythropoietin
US8632770B2 (en) 2003-12-03 2014-01-21 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor IX
US7956032B2 (en) 2003-12-03 2011-06-07 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
US8361961B2 (en) 2004-01-08 2013-01-29 Biogenerix Ag O-linked glycosylation of peptides
JP2007521807A (en) * 2004-01-14 2007-08-09 オハイオ ユニバーシティ Method for producing peptides / proteins in plants and peptides / proteins produced thereby
US9006410B2 (en) 2004-01-14 2015-04-14 Ohio University Nucleic acid for plant expression of a fusion protein comprising hydroxyproline O-glycosylation glycomodule
US8791066B2 (en) 2004-07-13 2014-07-29 Novo Nordisk A/S Branched PEG remodeling and glycosylation of glucagon-like peptide-1 [GLP-1]
US8268967B2 (en) 2004-09-10 2012-09-18 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated interferon α
US10874714B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2020-12-29 89Bio Ltd. Method of treating fibroblast growth factor 21 (FGF-21) deficiency
US9200049B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2015-12-01 Novo Nordisk A/S Remodeling and glycopegylation of fibroblast growth factor (FGF)
US9029331B2 (en) 2005-01-10 2015-05-12 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated granulocyte colony stimulating factor
WO2006121569A3 (en) * 2005-04-08 2008-11-20 Neose Technologies Inc Compositions and methods for the preparation of protease resistant human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
EP2386571A3 (en) * 2005-04-08 2012-02-15 BioGeneriX AG Compositions and methods for the preparation of protease resistant human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
US8404809B2 (en) 2005-05-25 2013-03-26 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycopegylated factor IX
JP2008542285A (en) * 2005-05-25 2008-11-27 ネオス テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド Glycopegylated factor IX
US8911967B2 (en) 2005-08-19 2014-12-16 Novo Nordisk A/S One pot desialylation and glycopegylation of therapeutic peptides
US8043833B2 (en) 2005-10-31 2011-10-25 Novo Nordisk A/S Expression of soluble therapeutic proteins
US8841439B2 (en) 2005-11-03 2014-09-23 Novo Nordisk A/S Nucleotide sugar purification using membranes
WO2007120932A2 (en) 2006-04-19 2007-10-25 Neose Technologies, Inc. Expression of o-glycosylated therapeutic proteins in prokaryotic microorganisms
US9187532B2 (en) * 2006-07-21 2015-11-17 Novo Nordisk A/S Glycosylation of peptides via O-linked glycosylation sequences
JP2009544327A (en) * 2006-07-21 2009-12-17 ノヴォ ノルディスク アー/エス Glycosylation of peptides with O-linked glycosylation sequences
EP2049144A4 (en) * 2006-07-21 2012-07-25 Novo Nordisk As Glycosylation of peptides via o-linked glycosylation sequences
EP2049144A2 (en) * 2006-07-21 2009-04-22 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycosylation of peptides via o-linked glycosylation sequences
US8969532B2 (en) 2006-10-03 2015-03-03 Novo Nordisk A/S Methods for the purification of polypeptide conjugates comprising polyalkylene oxide using hydrophobic interaction chromatography
US9050304B2 (en) 2007-04-03 2015-06-09 Ratiopharm Gmbh Methods of treatment using glycopegylated G-CSF
US9493499B2 (en) 2007-06-12 2016-11-15 Novo Nordisk A/S Process for the production of purified cytidinemonophosphate-sialic acid-polyalkylene oxide (CMP-SA-PEG) as modified nucleotide sugars via anion exchange chromatography
US8207112B2 (en) 2007-08-29 2012-06-26 Biogenerix Ag Liquid formulation of G-CSF conjugate
JP2011512121A (en) * 2008-01-08 2011-04-21 バイオジェネリックス アーゲー Glycoconjugation of polypeptides using oligosaccharyltransferase
US9150848B2 (en) 2008-02-27 2015-10-06 Novo Nordisk A/S Conjugated factor VIII molecules
US20110118183A1 (en) * 2008-06-27 2011-05-19 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag N-glycosylated human growth hormone with prolonged circulatory half-life
WO2009156511A3 (en) * 2008-06-27 2010-04-01 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag N-glycosylated human growth hormone with prolonged circulatory half-life
WO2009156511A2 (en) * 2008-06-27 2009-12-30 Novo Nordisk A/S N-glycosylated human growth hormone with prolonged circulatory half-life
WO2018022939A1 (en) * 2016-07-27 2018-02-01 Amunix Operating Inc. Treatment of adult growth hormone deficiency with human growth hormone analogues

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
MXPA05011832A (en) 2006-02-17
KR20060030023A (en) 2006-04-07
ATE540055T1 (en) 2012-01-15
CA2524936A1 (en) 2004-12-02
US7932364B2 (en) 2011-04-26
EP1624847A2 (en) 2006-02-15
AU2004240553A1 (en) 2004-12-02
BRPI0410164A (en) 2006-05-16
US20080102083A1 (en) 2008-05-01
ES2380093T3 (en) 2012-05-08
EP1624847A4 (en) 2008-06-18
WO2004103275A3 (en) 2007-05-18
JP2007523630A (en) 2007-08-23
EP1624847B1 (en) 2012-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1624847B1 (en) Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
EP1765853B1 (en) O-linked glycosylation of G-CSF peptides
US8791066B2 (en) Branched PEG remodeling and glycosylation of glucagon-like peptide-1 [GLP-1]
EP2049144B1 (en) Glycosylation of peptides via o-linked glycosylation sequences
US20090053167A1 (en) C-, S- and N-glycosylation of peptides
US20100286067A1 (en) Glycoconjugation of polypeptides using oligosaccharyltransferases
WO2008151258A2 (en) O-linked glycosylation using n-acetylglucosaminyl transferases
ZA200701909B (en) Compositions and methods for the preparation of human growth hormone glycosylation mutants
MXPA06007725A (en) O-linked glycosylation of peptides

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004240553

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 543137

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006532844

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 171592

Country of ref document: IL

DPEN Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2004240553

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20040507

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2005/011832

Country of ref document: MX

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004240553

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2524936

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020057021304

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 02351/KOLNP/2005

Country of ref document: IN

Ref document number: 2351/KOLNP/2005

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004751591

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005/09864

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200509864

Country of ref document: ZA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20048168473

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004751591

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020057021304

Country of ref document: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0410164

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10556094

Country of ref document: US